JP2020127649A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance interest in a performance regarding a game machine capable of setting to one of plural setting values.SOLUTION: A game machine can execute a first setting suggestive performance and a second setting suggestive performance on the basis of occurrence of a small win, the first setting suggestive performance is executed during "a variation display period of a second special pattern in which a display result becomes "small win" in a high-probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state)", and the second setting suggestive performance is executed during "a big win game period of a big win type not controlled to a high-probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state) based on a display result of variation display of a second special pattern executed in a high-probability/second KT state (small win RUSH state)".SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 12-5

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of playing a game.

As shown in Patent Document 1, a gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for a player, and that displays a character image according to the setting value before and after the setting change Proposed.

JP, 2010-200902, A (Drawing 12).

Regarding the gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values as described in Patent Document 1, the player feels interesting when the effect that suggests the setting is executed. It is preferable to do so.

The present invention has been made in view of the above situation, and an object of the present invention is to improve the enjoyment of production related to a gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values.

The gaming machine of means C1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of setting values (setting values 1 to 6 having different jackpot determination random number ranges),
Game state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player,
And a production control means (CPU 120 for production control) for controlling the production,
The effect control means suggests a first setting suggestive effect (a setting value depending on the mode of the small hit character) as a setting suggestive effect for making a setting-related suggestion based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (execution of a small hitting variation). Effect) and a second setting suggestion effect different from the first setting suggestion effect (an effect that suggests a set value depending on the mode (type) of the card image) can be executed.
The period in which the first setting suggestion effect is executed is different from the period in which the second setting suggestion effect is executed (the first setting suggestion effect is displayed in the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). The result is "small hit" is executed in the variable display period of the second special symbol and the small hit game period, and the second setting suggestion effect is of the big hit type that ends the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). It is executed during the jackpot game period)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to execution of a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects during the same period.

The gaming machine of means C2 is
A gaming machine of means C1,
A setting means (CPU 120 for effect control) for determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect,
The timing at which the first determination is performed to determine whether to execute the first setting suggestive effect by the determining means (the timing at which the variable display of the second special symbol is started) and the second setting suggestive effect are executed. Different from the timing of the second determination to determine whether to do (timing to start the big hit gaming state),
The timing at which the first setting suggestion effect is executed by the effect control means (high probability/period controlled to the second KT state) and the timing at which the second setting suggestion effect is executed (controlled to the big hit game state). The game machine is characterized by a different period.
With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the determination unit and the processing load of the effect control unit.

The gaming machine of means C3 is
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2,
The game state control means (CPU 103) is a state advantageous to the player and is different from the advantageous state (big hit game state), and a special state (small hit game state), and a game value is easily given by the special state. It is possible to control to a specific state (high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state)),
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
It is possible to execute the first setting suggestion effect in correspondence with the control of the special state in the specific state (high probability/second setting suggestion in response to occurrence of a small hit in the second KT state (small hit RUSH state) Production is executed)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, the first setting suggestion effect is executed corresponding to the control of the special state, so that the interest in the special state can be further improved.

The gaming machine of means C4 is
A gaming machine of means C3,
In the special state (small hitting game state), the game control means (CPU 103) can set the variable device (special variable winning ball device 17) to a state in which a game medium (game ball) can win.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120), when the number of game media winning the variable device is a predetermined number (4 or more), as the setting suggestion effect, the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect. A game machine characterized by being capable of executing a third setting suggesting effect (an effect suggesting a setting value depending on the mode of the image of "+10") that is different from any of the setting suggesting effects.
With such a configuration, it is possible to make the number of game media won in the variable device interested, and to further enhance the interest in the special state.

The gaming machine of means C5 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C4,
The game state control means (CPU 103) has a special state (small hit game state) different from the advantageous state (big hit game state) and a special state (small hit game state), which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to control to a specific state (high probability/second KT state) in which a game value (game ball) is easily given,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of executing the second setting suggestion effect in response to the end of the control in the specific state (high probability/not controlled to the second KT state). (While in the big hit game state of "2R normal big hit", the second setting suggestion effect is executed)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid excessive discouragement of the player due to the termination of the control of the specific state, to maintain the motivation of the game and to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine of means C6 is
A gaming machine of means C5,
The game state control means (CPU 103) is a first advantageous state (a big hit game state of "10R probability variation big hit") that is controlled to the specific state (high probability/second KT state) after the advantageous state ends, and the advantageous state ends. It is possible to control to any advantageous state of the second advantageous state (big hit game state of "2R normal big hit") which is not controlled to the specific state (high probability/second KT state) later,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute the second setting suggestion effect in response to being controlled to the second advantageous state (confirmed that the second KT state is not controlled). While the "2R normal big hit" big hit game state, the second setting suggestion effect is being executed)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give attention to which advantageous state is controlled, and to avoid excessive discouragement of the player when the second advantageous state is controlled. Becomes

The gaming machine of means C7 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C6,
The game state control means (CPU 103) has a special state (small hit game state) different from the advantageous state (big hit game state) and a special state (small hit game state), which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to control to a specific state (high probability/second KT state) in which a game value (game ball) is easily given,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
In the second setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion is displayed (card image) to make a suggestion about the setting,
The setting suggestion display (card image) displayed in the second setting suggestion effect is set to a display mode corresponding to the number of times the special state is controlled in the specific state (corresponding to the card image, high probability/first Display the number of cards corresponding to the number of small wins in the 2KT state)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, the number of times the special state is controlled in the specific state can be made to be interested, and the interest of the specific state can be further improved.

The game machine of means C8 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C7,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can display a plurality of types of setting suggestion displays with different visibility in the second setting suggestion effect (as shown in FIG. 12-10 (3)). The visibility is higher in the order of "J" (jack) card image 30TM200J = playing card "Q" (queen) card image 30TM200Q <playing card "K" (king) card image 30TM200K)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of the second setting suggestion effect.

The game machine of means C9 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C8,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of first setting suggestion effects (first setting suggestion effect in blue mode, first setting suggestion effect in red mode),
It is possible to display a history display in which the type of the first setting suggestive effect and the number of times the type of the first setting suggestive effect is executed are associated with each other (as shown in FIG. 12-6(1), in a blue mode). The small hit character history image 30TM160B corresponding to the blue mode small hit character 30TM150B displayed along with the execution of the first setting suggestion effect, and the number of times corresponding to the number of times the first setting suggesting effect of the blue mode is executed. Displayed in association with history display B)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player can easily confirm the type of the first setting suggestive effect and the number of times the first setting suggestive effect of the type has been executed by checking the history display. As a result, it is easy to infer the setting based on the first setting suggestion effect, and the interest of the first setting suggestion effect can be further improved.

The game machine of means C10 is
A gaming machine of means C9,
Variable display means (CPU 103, effect control CPU 120) capable of performing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols),
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can display the history display when variable display is not being executed (when the probability control/second KT state is controlled, a special symbol (decorative symbol) is displayed. Regardless of whether or not the variable display is executed, each small hit character history image and each number of times history display are displayed in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5 (history display area 30TM170A, history display area 30TM170B, history display area 30TM170C). And are continuously displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player can check the history display even when the variable display is not executed, so that the setting based on the first setting suggestive effect can be easily guessed and the first setting can be performed. The interest of suggestive production can be further improved.

The game machine of means A1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of setting values (setting values 1 to 6 having different jackpot determination random number ranges),
Game state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player,
And a production control means (CPU 120 for production control) for controlling the production,
The effect control means suggests a first setting suggestive effect (a setting value depending on the mode of the small hit character) as a setting suggestive effect for making a setting-related suggestion based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (execution of a small hitting variation). Effect) and a second setting suggestion effect different from the first setting suggestion effect (an effect that suggests a set value depending on the mode (type) of the card image) can be executed.
The accuracy of the suggestion is different between the first setting suggestive effect and the second setting suggestive effect (the second setting suggestive effect is more accurate than the first setting suggestive effect in the accuracy of the suggestion (reliability )Is high)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects having different suggestion accuracy based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, and thus it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effects.

The game machine of means A2 is
A gaming machine of means A1,
A setting means (CPU 120 for effect control) for determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect,
The timing at which the first determination is performed to determine whether to execute the first setting suggestive effect by the determining means (the timing at which the variable display of the second special symbol is started) and the second setting suggestive effect are executed. Different from the timing of the second determination to determine whether to do (timing to start the big hit gaming state),
The timing at which the first setting suggestion effect is executed by the effect control means (high probability/period controlled to the second KT state) and the timing at which the second setting suggestion effect is executed (controlled to the big hit game state). The game machine is characterized by a different period.
With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the determination unit and the processing load of the effect control unit.

The game machine of means A3,
A gaming machine of means A1 or means A2,
The game state control means (CPU 103) is a state advantageous to the player and is different from the advantageous state (big hit game state), and a special state (small hit game state), and a game value is easily given by the special state. It is possible to control to a specific state (high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state)),
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
It is possible to execute the first setting suggestion effect in correspondence with the control of the special state in the specific state (high probability/second setting suggestion in response to occurrence of a small hit in the second KT state (small hit RUSH state) Production is executed)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, the first setting suggestion effect is executed corresponding to the control of the special state, so that the interest in the special state can be further improved.

The game machine of means A4,
A gaming machine of means A3,
In the special state (small hitting game state), the game control means (CPU 103) can set the variable device (special variable winning ball device 17) to a state in which a game medium (game ball) can win.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120), when the number of game media winning the variable device is a predetermined number (4 or more), as the setting suggestion effect, the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect. A game machine characterized by being capable of executing a third setting suggesting effect (an effect suggesting a setting value depending on the mode of the image of "+10") that is different from any of the setting suggesting effects.
With such a configuration, it is possible to make the number of game media won in the variable device interested, and to further enhance the interest in the special state.

The game machine of means A5,
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A4,
The game state control means (CPU 103) has a special state (small hit game state) different from the advantageous state (big hit game state) and a special state (small hit game state), which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to control to a specific state (high probability/second KT state) in which a game value (game ball) is easily given,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of executing the second setting suggestion effect in response to the end of the control in the specific state (high probability/not controlled to the second KT state). (While in the big hit game state of "2R normal big hit", the second setting suggestion effect is executed)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid excessive discouragement of the player due to the termination of the control of the specific state, to maintain the motivation of the game and to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

The game machine of means A6 is
A gaming machine of means A5,
The game state control means (CPU 103) is a first advantageous state (a big hit game state of "10R probability variation big hit") that is controlled to the specific state (high probability/second KT state) after the advantageous state ends, and the advantageous state ends. It is possible to control to any advantageous state of the second advantageous state (big hit game state of "2R normal big hit") which is not controlled to the specific state (high probability/second KT state) later,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute the second setting suggestion effect in response to being controlled to the second advantageous state (confirmed that the second KT state is not controlled). While the "2R normal big hit" big hit game state, the second setting suggestion effect is being executed)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give attention to which advantageous state is controlled, and to avoid excessive discouragement of the player when the second advantageous state is controlled. Becomes

The game machine of means A7 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A6,
The game state control means (CPU 103) has a special state (small hit game state) different from the advantageous state (big hit game state) and a special state (small hit game state), which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to control to a specific state (high probability/second KT state) in which a game value (game ball) is easily given,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
In the second setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion is displayed (card image) to make a suggestion about the setting,
The setting suggestion display (card image) displayed in the second setting suggestion effect is set to a display mode corresponding to the number of times the special state is controlled in the specific state (corresponding to the card image, high probability/first Display the number of cards corresponding to the number of small wins in the 2KT state)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, the number of times the special state is controlled in the specific state can be made to be interested, and the interest of the specific state can be further improved.

The game machine of means A8,
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A7,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can display a plurality of types of setting suggestion displays with different visibility in the second setting suggestion effect (as shown in FIG. 12-10 (3)). The visibility is higher in the order of "J" (jack) card image 30TM200J = playing card "Q" (queen) card image 30TM200Q <playing card "K" (king) card image 30TM200K)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of the second setting suggestion effect.

The game machine of means A9,
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A8,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of first setting suggestion effects (first setting suggestion effect in blue mode, first setting suggestion effect in red mode),
It is possible to display a history display in which the type of the first setting suggestive effect and the number of times the type of the first setting suggestive effect is executed are associated with each other (as shown in FIG. 12-6(1), in a blue mode). The small hit character history image 30TM160B corresponding to the blue mode small hit character 30TM150B displayed along with the execution of the first setting suggestion effect, and the number of times corresponding to the number of times the first setting suggesting effect of the blue mode is executed. Displayed in association with history display B)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player can easily confirm the type of the first setting suggestive effect and the number of times the first setting suggestive effect of the type has been executed by checking the history display. As a result, it is easy to infer the setting based on the first setting suggestion effect, and the interest of the first setting suggestion effect can be further improved.

The game machine of means A10,
A gaming machine of means A9,
Variable display means (CPU 103, effect control CPU 120) capable of performing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols),
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can display the history display when variable display is not being executed (when the probability control/second KT state is controlled, a special symbol (decorative symbol) is displayed. Regardless of whether or not the variable display is executed, each small hit character history image and each number of times history display are displayed in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5 (history display area 30TM170A, history display area 30TM170B, history display area 30TM170C). And are continuously displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player can check the history display even when the variable display is not executed, so that the setting based on the first setting suggestive effect can be easily guessed and the first setting can be performed. The interest of suggestive production can be further improved.

The game machine of means B1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of setting values (setting values 1 to 6 having different jackpot determination random number ranges),
Game state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling to an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player,
And a production control means (CPU 120 for production control) for controlling the production,
The effect control means suggests a first setting suggestive effect (a setting value depending on the mode of the small hit character) as a setting suggestive effect for making a setting-related suggestion based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (execution of a small hitting variation). Effect) and a second setting suggestion effect different from the first setting suggestion effect (an effect that suggests a set value depending on the mode (type) of the card image) can be executed.
At least a part of the information about the setting of the gaming machine suggested by the first setting suggestion effect and the information about the setting of the gaming machine suggested by the second setting suggestion effect are different (indicated by the first setting suggestion effect). The information related to the setting is the information "whether the setting value is an even number or an odd number", while the information related to the setting suggested by the second setting suggestion effect is "whether the setting value is an even number. In addition to the information "or is it an odd number", the information "the setting value is not 1" and the information "the setting value is any of 4 to 6" are included.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the information suggested by the first setting suggestive effect and the information suggested by the second setting suggestive effect are made different from each other, so that the interest of the setting suggestive effect can be improved.

The game machine of means B2 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
A setting means (CPU 120 for effect control) for determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect,
The timing at which the first determination is performed to determine whether to execute the first setting suggestive effect by the determining means (the timing at which the variable display of the second special symbol is started) and the second setting suggestive effect are executed. Different from the timing of the second determination to determine whether to do (timing to start the big hit gaming state),
The timing at which the first setting suggestion effect is executed by the effect control means (high probability/period controlled to the second KT state) and the timing at which the second setting suggestion effect is executed (controlled to the big hit game state). The game machine is characterized by a different period.
With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the determination unit and the processing load of the effect control unit.

The game machine of means B3 is
A gaming machine of means B1 or means B2,
The game state control means (CPU 103) is a state advantageous to the player and is different from the advantageous state (big hit game state), and a special state (small hit game state), and a game value is easily given by the special state. It is possible to control to a specific state (high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state)),
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
It is possible to execute the first setting suggestion effect in correspondence with the control of the special state in the specific state (high probability/second setting suggestion in response to occurrence of a small hit in the second KT state (small hit RUSH state) Production is executed)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, the first setting suggestion effect is executed corresponding to the control of the special state, so that the interest in the special state can be further improved.

The game machine of means B4 is
A gaming machine of means B3,
In the special state (small hitting game state), the game control means (CPU 103) can set the variable device (special variable winning ball device 17) to a state in which a game medium (game ball) can win.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120), when the number of game media winning the variable device is a predetermined number (4 or more), as the setting suggestion effect, the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect. A game machine characterized by being capable of executing a third setting suggesting effect (an effect suggesting a setting value depending on the mode of the image of "+10") that is different from any of the setting suggesting effects.
With such a configuration, it is possible to make the number of game media won in the variable device interested, and to further enhance the interest in the special state.

The game machine of means B5 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B4,
The game state control means (CPU 103) has a special state (small hit game state) different from the advantageous state (big hit game state) and a special state (small hit game state), which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to control to a specific state (high probability/second KT state) in which a game value (game ball) is easily given,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of executing the second setting suggestion effect in response to the end of the control in the specific state (high probability/not controlled to the second KT state). (While in the big hit game state of "2R normal big hit", the second setting suggestion effect is executed)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid excessive discouragement of the player due to the termination of the control of the specific state, to maintain the motivation of the game and to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

The game machine of means B6 is
A gaming machine of means B5,
The game state control means (CPU 103) is a first advantageous state (a big hit game state of "10R probability variation big hit") that is controlled to the specific state (high probability/second KT state) after the advantageous state ends, and the advantageous state ends. It is possible to control to any advantageous state of the second advantageous state (big hit game state of "2R normal big hit") which is not controlled to the specific state (high probability/second KT state) later,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute the second setting suggestion effect in response to being controlled to the second advantageous state (confirmed that the second KT state is not controlled). While the "2R normal big hit" big hit game state, the second setting suggestion effect is being executed)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give attention to which advantageous state is controlled, and to avoid excessive discouragement of the player when the second advantageous state is controlled. Becomes

The game machine of means B7 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B6,
The game state control means (CPU 103) has a special state (small hit game state) different from the advantageous state (big hit game state) and a special state (small hit game state), which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to control to a specific state (high probability/second KT state) in which a game value (game ball) is easily given,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
In the second setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion is displayed (card image) to make a suggestion about the setting,
The setting suggestion display (card image) displayed in the second setting suggestion effect is set to a display mode corresponding to the number of times the special state is controlled in the specific state (corresponding to the card image, high probability/first Display the number of cards corresponding to the number of small wins in the 2KT state)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, the number of times the special state is controlled in the specific state can be made to be interested, and the interest of the specific state can be further improved.

The game machine of means B8 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B7,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can display a plurality of types of setting suggestion displays with different visibility in the second setting suggestion effect (as shown in FIG. 12-10 (3)). The visibility is higher in the order of "J" (jack) card image 30TM200J = playing card "Q" (queen) card image 30TM200Q <playing card "K" (king) card image 30TM200K)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of the second setting suggestion effect.

The game machine of means B9 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B8,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of first setting suggestion effects (first setting suggestion effect in blue mode, first setting suggestion effect in red mode),
It is possible to display a history display in which the type of the first setting suggestive effect and the number of times the type of the first setting suggestive effect is executed are associated with each other (as shown in FIG. 12-6(1), in a blue mode). The small hit character history image 30TM160B corresponding to the blue mode small hit character 30TM150B displayed along with the execution of the first setting suggestion effect, and the number of times corresponding to the number of times the first setting suggesting effect of the blue mode is executed. Displayed in association with history display B)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player can easily confirm the type of the first setting suggestive effect and the number of times the first setting suggestive effect of the type has been executed by checking the history display. As a result, it is easy to infer the setting based on the first setting suggestion effect, and the interest of the first setting suggestion effect can be further improved.

The game machine of means B10 is
A gaming machine of means B9,
Variable display means (CPU 103, effect control CPU 120) capable of performing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols),
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can display the history display when variable display is not being executed (when the probability control/second KT state is controlled, a special symbol (decorative symbol) is displayed. Regardless of whether or not the variable display is executed, each small hit character history image and each number of times history display are displayed in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5 (history display area 30TM170A, history display area 30TM170B, history display area 30TM170C). And are continuously displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player can check the history display even when the variable display is not executed, so that the setting based on the first setting suggestive effect can be easily guessed and the first setting can be performed. The interest of suggestive production can be further improved.

Further, for example, in JP-A-2018-033787 (paragraph 0040, 0088), the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed, and it is determined to be a small hit in the second special symbol determination. , It is described that the small hit game is repeatedly performed when the player makes a right hit in the probability variation game state. In addition, there is a configuration in which any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. For example, in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraphs 0069, 0085,0090, and FIG. 12), display control of effects based on set values is performed, and processing for displaying each character image of giraffe, elephant, and lion is prescribed. It is described to execute at timing. By combining the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-033787 and Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, it is possible to perform setting suggestion production in a game that is controllable in a special state. However, the interest of the game cannot be sufficiently improved only by executing the setting suggestion effect in the game configured to be controllable in the special state. Therefore, an object of the invention according to means D1 to means D7 is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of setting suggestion production.

(Means D1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is capable of playing a game, and is set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values “1” to “6”) having different advantages for the player. It is a gaming machine that can be set to a value, and advantageous state control means (for example, executing steps S122 to S125 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state). Part), and a special state control means (for example, a part that executes steps S126 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that is a state different from the advantageous state. , A special state control means capable of controlling to a special state (for example, KT state) in which a game value is easily given by a special state (for example, a part for executing steps 052IWS2208, S2210, S2211, S2212, S2213 in the game control microcomputer 100) ), and a setting suggestion effect capable of executing a setting suggestion effect (eg, a small hit winning suggestion effect) in response to a game medium (eg, a game ball) passing through a specific area (eg, a special winning opening) An execution unit (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes 052IWS323 and S324) is provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect.

(Means D2) In the means D1, the advantageous state control means can control the advantageous state (eg, big hit game state) when the specific display result (eg, big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. Yes, the special state control means controls the special state (for example, the small hitting game state) when the special display result (for example, the small hitting pattern) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. Display result determining means for determining the display result of the variable display, using a determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, a determination value for the big hit determination, a determination value for the small hit determination). (For example, a portion for executing steps 026IWS59A, S64A, S59B, S64B in the game control microcomputer 100), the determination value is used to determine that a specific display result is displayed as a variable display display result. A specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for big hit judgment) and a special judgment value (for example, a judgment value for small hit judgment) for deciding to derive and display a special display result as a display result of variable display are provided. Setting means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100) that is included and can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values The step of S21TM4530 to S21TM4620 in) may be provided, and the number of special determination values may be the same regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). With such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability.

(Means D3) In the means D1 or the means D2, the setting suggestion effect executing means can execute the setting suggestion effect in response to the control to the special state (for example, a small hit in the high probability/second KT state). Based on the fact that a game ball has won in the special winning opening, it is possible to execute a small hit winning suggestion effect and a prize ball number display suggesting effect). With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in association with the control to the special state.

(Means D4) In any one of the means D1 to D3, the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning a prize) is controlled while being controlled to the advantageous state and the special state. Variable means capable of controlling the ball device 17) into an easy entry state (eg, open state) in which a game medium (eg, game ball) easily enters and an inaccessible state (eg, closed state) in which difficult or impossible entry is possible. The control means (for example, the portion that executes steps S122 to S124, S126, and S127 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided, and the setting suggestion effect execution means corresponds to the variable means being controlled to the easy entry state. , It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect (for example, when the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 17 is in the open state, and the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening or the special winning opening occurs. Based on that, it is possible to execute the small hit winning suggestion effect and the prize ball number indication suggesting effect). With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in association with the control of the variable unit.

(Means D5) In any one of the means D1 to the means D4, the setting suggestion effect executing means, when the control of the game state is switched (for example, at the start or end of the big hit game, from low probability/first KT state to normal) It is configured to be able to execute a setting suggestion effect (when changing to a state (low probability/low base state)) (for example, changing the display mode (for example, display color) of right-handed display in step 052IWS624). May be. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in association with the switching of the control of the game state.

(Means D6) In any one of the means D1 to D5, the setting suggestion effect executing means is the number of times the special state is controlled during the special state, the total game value given by the special state during the special state, or Depending on the number of times the variable display is executed during the special state, the setting suggestion effect can be executed with different selection ratios (for example, the number of prize balls is 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666). The number of prize balls indication suggestion effects A to F are executed at different selection ratios in accordance with the arrival at No. 2. Or, for example, the number of small hits generated during the high probability/second KT state or the high probability/second KT state. It may be configured to execute the prize ball number indication suggestive effects A to F at different selection ratios according to the number of times of the variable display executed therein.). With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in association with the number of times of control to the special state, the total game value, or the number of times of variable display execution.

(Means D7) In any one of the means D1 to the means D6, the special state control means has a special special state (for example, the second KT state) as a special state, which is disadvantageous to the player as compared with the special special state. It is possible to control to a disadvantageous special state (for example, the first KT state), and the setting suggestion effect executing means plays a specific area when the game medium passes through the specific area during the advantageous special state and during the disadvantageous special state. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect with a different selection ratio when the medium passes (for example, only when the game ball is won in the special winning opening as a small win during the second KT state, a small hit is suggested. It is possible to execute an effect or an indication suggestion for displaying the number of prize balls. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion production in association with the type of special state.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the timer interruption processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of a first special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of character part control process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a payout control board. It is a rear view showing a pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. (1)-(3) is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of setting suggestion production, (4) is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the production mode of setting suggestion production. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a notification when the setting change flag is set at the time of power activation. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing a control when a power failure occurs before a set value is determined, and (2) is a control when a power failure occurs after a set value is determined. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the special variable winning a prize ball apparatus in the characteristic part 052IW. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards etc. in the characteristic part 052IW. It is an explanatory view for explaining a big hit probability and a small hit probability for each set value. It is an explanatory view for explaining a big hit probability and a small hit probability for each set value. It is an explanatory view showing a big hit type determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a small hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decorative design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decorative design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decorative design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern table for small hits. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning a prize ball device and special variable winning a prize ball device in KT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning a prize ball device and special variable winning a prize ball device in KT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning a prize ball device and special variable winning a prize ball device in KT state. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is a flowchart showing a first special symbol normal process. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation process. It is a flowchart showing a first special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart showing a second special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart showing a second special symbol variation process. It is a flowchart showing a second special symbol stop process. It is a flow chart which shows accessory control normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows gate passage waiting processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing during a big hit opening. It is a flowchart showing a big hit ending process. It is a flowchart showing a small hit ending process. It is an explanatory view for explaining how to transition the gaming state. It is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol process processing. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol normal process. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric auditors product pre-opening process. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows suggestion processing at the time of over winning. It is an explanatory view showing a concrete example of an over-winning suggestive effect determination table. It is a flowchart showing a suggestion process at the time of small winning. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a small hit winning suggestion effect determination table. It is a flow chart which shows prize number display suggestion production processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a prize sphere number display suggestion production determination table. It is a flow chart which shows a prize sphere emphasis production processing. It is an explanatory view showing a concrete example of a prize ball number emphasis effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start setting process. It is an explanatory view for explaining a concrete example of a setting value suggestive effect determination table. It is an explanatory view for explaining a concrete example of a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flowchart showing a special figure hit waiting process. It is a flowchart showing a special figure hit waiting process. It is a flow chart which shows ending production processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of setting value suggestive production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode of right-handed notification. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the over-winning suggestion production, the small hit winning suggestion production, and the prize ball number display suggesting production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the over-winning suggestion production, the small hit winning suggestion production, and the prize ball number display suggesting production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variable display when it is a small hit in the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the variable display of one special symbol. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change processing in the modification 1. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol change processing in the modification 1. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variable display at the time of a small hit in the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the variable display of the one special symbol in the modification 1. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change processing in modification 2. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol change processing in modification 2. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variable display at the time of being a small hit in the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the variable display of one special symbol in the modification 2. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol change processing in modification 3. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variable display at the time of a small hit in the variable display of the other special symbol during execution of the variable display of one special symbol in the modification 3. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change processing in modification 4. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol change processing in modification 4. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a hold display and an active display in a low probability state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a hold display and an active display in a high probability state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding various productions in cloudy mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding various productions in a rain mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding various productions in a typhoon mode. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of various effects in the jackpot gaming state. It is the explanation drawing which shows the concrete example of the production aspect regarding various production in the big hit game state. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of various effects in the highly accurate/first KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding the various productions in the highly precise/1st KT state. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of various effects in the highly accurate/second KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding the various productions in the highly precise/2nd KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decorative design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of each display information displayed on an image display apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production determination processing at the time of change start. It is an explanatory view showing a table for determining whether or not to execute a first setting suggestion effect and an effect mode. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of the 1st setting suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding 1st setting suggestion production. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production decision processing at the time of big hit start. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the production|generation aspect of 2nd setting suggestion production. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of the 2nd setting suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production aspect regarding 2nd setting suggestion production. It is a time chart which shows the display period of a 2nd special display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a 2nd special display.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot into the game area by being shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a variable display (also called a special drawing game) of special symbols (also called a special drawing) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. There is provided a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. The variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a blinking manner. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols". Further, a special figure game using the first special figure is called a "first special figure game", and a special figure game using the second special figure is also called a "second special figure game". The special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

Further, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, a right-handed indicator 26 for urging a right-handed operation to perform a firing operation aiming at the right side of the game area is provided. There is. The right-handed indicator 26 is composed of, for example, an LED, and is turned on by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern showing numbers or the like) Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game, the decorative pattern is variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, there is provided a display area for displaying a suspension display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended. In this example, the first hold display area 5A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure, and the second hold display for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure. Region 5B is provided. A display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-handing notification LED 37 for urging a right-handing operation is provided. It should be noted that the right-handing notification LED 37 is lighting-controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2 ).

The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of held storages. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved memory number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A indicates the number of LEDs to be lit. To display the first number of reserved memories, and the second reserved indicator 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning opening is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening is guided to the back surface of the game board 2 and detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. When a game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on this detection information.

Further, a row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first start winning opening so that a game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area does not enter the area where the first starting winning opening is provided. Has been done. Thus, the row of nails 19 for preventing the game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area from entering is provided, so that the game ball is operated to aim at the left side of the game area (so-called left hitting). The game ball can be won in the first start winning port only when the operation is performed.

In this example, the row of nails 19 is provided, so that the game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when the player makes a left-handed operation. I can't stop. For example, the first start winning opening is provided on the left side of the game area, so that the game ball may be allowed to enter the first starting winning opening only when a left-handed operation is performed, or the first starting winning opening may be formed. The mouth may be provided on the left side of the game area and the row of nails 19 may be provided to allow the game ball to enter the first start winning opening only when the left hitting operation is performed.

On the right side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 is provided. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.

Below the passage gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 forming a special winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom of the flow path through which the game ball flows down in the front-back direction to move the bottom surface. The game ball is changed to an open state (also referred to as an open state) in which a game ball can be won in a special winning opening located below the member and a closed state (also referred to as a closed state) in which the game ball cannot be won. The special variable winning ball device 7 is a jackpot gaming state that occurs when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the bottom member is moved forward. From the closed state, which is moved forward toward the bottom, the bottom member is moved backward, and the opening control is performed to open the special winning opening, which is the winning area.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, a special variable winning ball device 17 forming a special winning port for a small hit and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning port are provided. As shown in, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged adjacent to the right side thereof. The special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and a plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom of the flow path through which the game ball flows down in the front-back direction. By moving the ball back and forth, a special winning opening or a second starting winning opening located below the bottom member allows the game ball to win (also called an open state) and the game ball cannot win the prize (closed state). Say). The special variable winning ball device 17 is a small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit pattern) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. From the closed state in which the forward movement is performed forward, the bottom member is moved backward in the backward direction, and the opening control is performed to open the special winning opening which is the winning area. Further, the variable winning ball device 6B, when the normal symbol display device 20 hits and displays the symbol, the bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front, The opening control for opening the second starting winning opening, which is the winning area, is executed.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed to have the same structure. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed in such a manner that the bottom member is slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, so that the game ball dropped on the special variable winning ball device 7 is If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state, the special variable winning ball device 7 is moved from the upper left to the lower right, and drops onto the variable winning ball device 6B below it.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed such that the bottom surface members are slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left, so that the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 17 are variable. If the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is closed, the game ball on the winning ball device 6B moves from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B. Go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are disposed adjacent to each other, the special variable winning ball device 7 does not win the special winning ball device 6B. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning opening is in the open state, the gaming ball dropped to the second starting winning opening and the special variable winning ball. The game ball does not flow toward the device 17. On the other hand, if the second start winning hole is not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided to the special variable winning ball device 17. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward to open the special winning opening, the gaming ball wins the special winning opening. Furthermore, if the special winning opening is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and drops to the out opening as it is.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of restricting pieces for reducing the flow-down speed of the game balls flowing down on the bottom surface member. There is. In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with the restriction pieces, so that the game flows downward from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the movement of the front-back direction component, and the time required for the flow is delayed compared with the case without the restriction piece.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged on the right side. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 6B is the special variable winning ball device. Since the game balls flow toward the 17, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side in this sense. Can be said.

Inside the special winning opening, there is provided a switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a game ball winning in the special winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on this detection information. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be opened and the special winning opening is opened, it becomes a state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening is closed, the player cannot pass the game ball into the special winning opening to get the prize ball. You will be at a disadvantage.

Inside the special winning opening, a switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting a game ball winning in the special winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening that is opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of the winning balls is smaller than that when the gaming ball wins the big winning opening, For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter) other prize holes such as the first start prize hole 1 and the second start prize hole. Therefore, if the special variable winning a prize ball device 17 is controlled to be opened and the special winning opening is opened, it becomes a state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning a prize ball device 17 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening is closed, the player cannot pass the game ball to the special winning opening to get the prize ball. You will be at a disadvantage.

Further, in the second starting winning opening, a second starting opening switch 22B capable of detecting a game ball winning in the second starting winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this pachinko game machine 1, the passage gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning hole), the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning hole), and the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning hole). Is provided to the right of the game area, so when the player is in the big hit game or in the KT state (so-called small hit time), the player aims at the right side of the game area to perform a firing operation (so-called right hitting operation). )I do.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the left and right lower sides of the game area), there are provided general winning openings 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when entering one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (eg, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The entry of a game ball into each prize hole including the general prize hole 10 is also referred to as a "prize". In particular, the winning of the starting openings (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a normal symbol display device 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of a normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a universal symbol game.

Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure pending storages, which is the number of universal figure games pending for execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, since the variation display of the normal symbol is executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the passage gate 41 plays a role as a normal starting area. However, even when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the big hit game state shifts based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the pass gate 41, so the pass gate 41 also plays a role as an operation area. Therefore, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that serves both as a normal starting region and an operating region.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game balls and a large number of obstacle nails. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect frame LED 9 is provided in the periphery of the game area. ..

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented out by a predetermined ball lending machine can be held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball striking device. A ball hitting plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and tilted is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that the player can press. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like is provided. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the operation (operation etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progression)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a shooting operation (so-called left hitting operation) aiming at the left side of the game area. When a player rotates the ball-striking ball handle 30 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to perform a left-striking operation, and the game ball enters the first start winning port formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol display The first special figure game by the device 4A is started.

It should be noted that, when the game ball enters (start winning) the starting winning opening during the period during which the special drawing game is being executed, or during the period when it is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (a start prize has occurred, If the special drawing game based on the starting prize cannot be immediately executed), the special drawing game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) is displayed as a stop special symbol, it is a "big hit" symbol. .. Further, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, it is "missing". Even in the first special figure game, the small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed at an extremely low rate, and the small hit symbol may be displayed.

After the display result in the first special figure game is "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

In the big hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is one of the elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. In this way, one cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can get the prize ball by entering the game ball into the special winning opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

In addition, the "big hit" category is set. For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum opening period) of the special winning opening, and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, probability variation state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) The jackpot type is set according to these. As the big hit type, a big hit type that can obtain many prize balls or a big hit type that has few prize balls or hardly obtain prize balls may be provided.

After the jackpot game state is finished, it may be controlled to a certain variation state, a KT state, or a high base state according to the jackpot type.

In the probability variation state (probability variation state), the probability variation control is performed so that the probability that the display result is "big hit" is higher than in the normal state. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and a "big hit" is likely to occur.

In the KT state, the KT control that is more likely to make a small hit than in the normal state is executed. In this pachinko game machine 1, since a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small hitting game state, the number of prize balls obtained is smaller than that in the big hitting game state, but this is an advantageous state for the player.

In the high base state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special map fluctuation time (the period during which the special map changes) is shortened compared to the normal state (time saving state), is called "Public hit" in the normal figure game. By increasing the probability of becoming higher than in the normal state, the control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed. The high base state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved, which is an advantageous state for the player.

The probability change state, the KT state, and the high base state are continued until one of the ending conditions such as that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state has started is satisfied first. To do. The condition that the end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as the number of times cut (variable times cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is an advantageous state such as a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player, a game state other than a special state such as a probability change state, a KT state, a high base state, etc., and the display result in the special figure game is "big hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability of being controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (when the predetermined return processing is not executed after the power is turned on, for example, when the system is reset). It is in a state of being.

When the big hit game is finished and the game state is controlled to the positive change state, the KT state, or the high base state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a shooting operation (right hitting operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. When the player makes a right-hand hitting operation by rotating the hit ball operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal symbol display device 20 starts the general figure game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the previous execution period of the general-purpose game, etc. (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot execute the general-purpose game based on the passage immediately) , The universal figure game based on the passage is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this public figure game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol is "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When the "universal figure hit" is reached, opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning port is opened).

When the game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) as a fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed, "big hit", If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the "small hit" symbol is obtained. Also, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, "missing symbol" is generated.

After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player, provided that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. After the display result in the second special figure game is "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled.

In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. Note that, similar to the big hit type, the "small hit" may be provided with a small hit type.

After the small hit game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the special figure game display result is "small hit" is continuously controlled (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the predetermined number of special figure games in the above-mentioned number of times cutting, the game state is naturally changed).

The gaming state may change based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a certain change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (notification of the progress status of the game and/or excitement of the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. However, in addition to or in place of the display, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the point of the frame LED 9 is used. It may be performed by turning on/off the light, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As effects to be executed in accordance with the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game is displayed. In response to the start of the 2 special drawing game, the variable display of the decorative design is started. At the timing at which the display result (also called the fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) becomes the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. ) Is also stopped (displayed).

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, with the reach mode, when the decorative design stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of a big hit combination described later, the decorative design not yet stopped and displayed is variably displayed. Is an aspect in which is continued.

Further, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special drawing game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) being a “big hit” (also called a big hit reliability or a big hit expectation degree) according to the effect mode. Different types of reach effects are executed. Reach productions include, for example, normal reach and super-reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the design is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, "7") is stopped and displayed together on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. ..

In the case of "probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is finished, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7", etc.) are displayed together and stopped, and after the jackpot gaming state is terminated, it is changed to the probability variation state. In the case of "non-probability variation big hit (normal big hit)" that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation pattern, and the even-numbered decorative pattern is also referred to as a non-probability variation pattern (normal pattern). After the reach mode is achieved with the non-probability variation pattern, the promotion effect that finally becomes the “probability variation jackpot” may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative design (for example, "" 1 3 5”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “small hit”). As an example, the decorative patterns constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state similar to small hit game state) and when it is "small hit" The common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special drawing game is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative design is not the reach mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach lost") may be displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "non-reach lost"). In addition, when the display result is “miss”, after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination (“reach miss”) (Also referred to as) the fixed decorative design may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative design is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display before the execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the prefetching notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, once the decorative design is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative design and then the variable display is resumed, one variable display is simulated like multiple variable display. You may make it perform a pseudo continuous production.

Even during the big hit game state, a big hit midfield effect for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit midfield effect, an effect that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion effect that indicates that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, the small hitting production which notifies the small hitting game state is executed. Incidentally, during the small hit game state, some big hit type (big hit type of big hit game state of the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, big hit type that makes the subsequent game state a highly accurate state) big hit game By executing a common effect in the state, the player may not be able to know whether the present is in the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high-precision state and the low-precision state. May be.

Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special figure game (including hold management), execution of ordinary figure game (including hold management), big hit It has a function of controlling the gaming state, the small hitting gaming state, the gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described below, effect control commands described below, data such as various tables referred to when making various determinations described below) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped partially or entirely. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts the numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display device 20, first hold) An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal figure hold indicator 25C, and the like, and an output port for transmitting the signal.

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), count switch (first counting switch 23 and second counting switch 24). )) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 by taking in a detection signal (a detection signal indicating that the game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on). By the transmission of the detection signal, passing or entry of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 receives a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81, the solenoid 82, the solenoid 83, etc.) for the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric auditors or the special winning opening door. The data is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the special winning opening solenoid 83.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, a production control board (command for designating (notifying) the progress status of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of the special figure game (including a big hit type), and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), a game status (for example, start and end of variable display, status of opening big winning opening, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), command for specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and effects (various effects according to the progress of the game based on the received effect control command, It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery.

On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125 are mounted.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described functions of the effect control board 12 and an effect to be executed). (Including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of effect based on a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further outputs a sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image, and turns on/off the frame LED 9 and the right-handing notification LED 37, so that the sound control signal (a signal that specifies a sound to be output) is voice controlled. The LED signal is supplied to the board 13 or an LED signal (a signal designating the lighting/lighting-out mode of the LED) is supplied to the LED control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L, 8R, drives the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound designating signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designating signal from the speakers 8L, 8R. Let

The LED control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handing notification LED 37, and drives the frame LED 9 and the right-handing notification LED 37 based on the LED signal, and in a mode specified by the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right-hand strike notification LED 37 are turned on/off. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and turning on/off of the LED.

It should be noted that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control for turning on/off the LED (supply of a sound designation signal or LED signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32). You may do it.

The random number circuit 124 updatable counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 transmits, for example, an input port for taking in the production control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, LED signal). And an output port of.

Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the sound control substrate 13, and the LED control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main processing shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interruption prohibition (step S1). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register settings, RAM 102 accessible settings, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

When the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 stops operating due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes a process of adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

And CPU103 transmits the production control command which directs recovery from power failure to production control board 12 (Step S7). Along with this, a production control command for designating a backed-up game state before power failure, and a production control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later. When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command that specifies the time of restoration from power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that recovery from power failure has been performed or is being restored from power failure. The screen is displayed to The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). Then, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, and thereby the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. Whether or not the detection signal is received from various switches such as the switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 is determined (step S21). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, start information (start Information such as the number of winnings) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process (step S25A). The CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing the execution and suspension of the first special symbol game (details will be described later). Further, the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process (step S25B). The CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, so that execution and suspension management of the second special symbol game are realized. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be simultaneously executed in parallel.

Subsequent to the first special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes an accessory control process process (step S25C). The CPU 103 executes the accessory control process process for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing control of a big hit game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc. (details will be described later).

Following the accessory control process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, and based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41), the management of execution and suspension of the general figure game, It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "universal figure hit". The ordinary figure game is executed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the ordinary figure hold display device 25C is turned on to display the number of held ordinary figure patterns.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when an electric power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

Although not shown in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt processing, a test terminal is a processing for outputting a test signal for making it possible to confirm the control state of the gaming machine outside the gaming machine. Processing is also executed. In the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 performs control to output a test signal (right-handed test signal) that can specify that the right-handed operation is being performed. Specifically, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 performs control to output a right-handed test signal during a big hit game, a small hit game based on a variation display of the second special symbol, and a KT state. On the other hand, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 does not perform the control of outputting the right-handed test signal during the small hitting game based on the variable display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process processing. In the first special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a first start winning determination process (step S101A).

In the first start prize winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start prize in the first start winning opening, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When a start winning prize is generated in the first starting winning opening, a random number value for determining a display result (including a big hit type) and a variation pattern is extracted and stored in a first holding storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as holding information. To be done. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the first hold storage number, the transmission for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the first hold storage number, and the look-ahead determination on the effect control board 12. Settings are made. The effect control command at the time of the winning prize thus set to be transmitted is, for example, after the first special symbol process processing is completed, the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

After executing the first start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110A to S113A according to the value of the first special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process of the first special symbol process process (steps S110A to S113A), a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The first special symbol normal process of step S110A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In the first special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game, based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit" or "small hit" and "big hit" In this case, the jackpot type is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set in correspondence with the determined display result. .. After that, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal process ends.

When making various decisions based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The first variation pattern setting process of step S111A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "1". In the first variation pattern setting process, a random number value for determining the variation pattern is used to determine a plurality of types of variation patterns based on a pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. It includes a process for determining which one. In the first fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the first fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure change time) (also the execution time of variable display of the decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether reach or not), the variable display of the decorative pattern. Is specified, and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

The first special symbol variation process of step S112A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "2". In this first special symbol variation process, a process for setting for varying the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, and the elapsed time from when the first special symbol starts to vary is measured. It includes processing to do. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the first special symbol variation process ends. To do.

In this example, since the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the first special symbol variation process (step S112A), the first When the variable display of the special symbol is being displayed, it may be a small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol and be controlled to a small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is before the small hit opening). Process ~ determine whether or not the value is equivalent to the small hit end process), if the small hit game is not changing the value of the first special symbol process flag from the value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process In this way, if the small hit game is not in progress, the value of the first special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop process. By performing such control, the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, and the variable display of the first special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. Control to do so. Not only such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol is interrupted (of the timer The update may be interrupted).

Further, for example, the small hit ending period as the small hit end processing period may be configured to be different depending on the gaming state. For example, in a normal state, if configured to suspend the variable display of the first special symbol, the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes long, and the execution period and the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol If the difference becomes large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period due to the stop of swinging of the decorative pattern and the like, which results in a discomfort to the player. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable that the short hitting ending period be shorter than that in the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). In this case, for example, the small hitting ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the normal state, while the small hitting ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state.

Further, in the case of configuring as described above, for example, in the first KT state, since the game ball is practically difficult to win in the small hit control and no special effect is produced, the small hit ending period is shorter than that in the second KT state. It may be configured to do so. On the other hand, in the second KT state, the game ball is easy to win in the small hit control and an effect for emphasizing the small hit control is executed. Therefore, the small hit ending period may be made longer than that in the first KT state. .. In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, while the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

Further, as for the small hit fanfare period as the small hit opening pre-processing period, the length of the period may be changed depending on the gaming state similarly to the above small hit ending period.

The first special symbol stop process of step S113A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "3". In this first special symbol stop processing, to stop the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, to stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the first special symbol It includes the process of setting. When the display result is "big hit", setting processing for starting the big hit game is performed. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", processing for starting the small hit game is performed. Then, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "Small hit" or "Loss", the game state is updated when the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state is controlled, and when the cut-out is completed. .. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop process ends.

The process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process process described in FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process process will be described. In addition, each random number value extracted in the first start winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in the second hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as hold information.

In this example, since the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the process shifts to the second special symbol variation process and the variation of the second special symbol. While being displayed, it may be a small hit in the variable display of the first special symbol and may be controlled to a small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the first special figure process flag is before the small hit opening). Process-determine whether or not the value is equivalent to the small hit end process), if the small hit game is not changing the value of the second special symbol process flag from the value corresponding to the second special symbol variation process In this way, if the small hit game is not in progress, the value of the second special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop process. By performing such control, the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variable display of the first special symbol, and the variable display of the second special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. Control to do so. Note that, not only in such control, for example, during the small hitting game based on the variation display of the first special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the second special symbol is interrupted (of the timer The update may be interrupted).

Incidentally, also for the small hit control based on the variable display of the second special symbol, the length of the small hit fanfare period or the small hit ending period may be changed depending on the game state.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25C shown in FIG. 4 as the accessory control process process. In this accessory control process process, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S120 to S128 in accordance with the value of the accessory control process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S120 to S128) of the accessory control process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The accessory control normal process of step S120 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "0". In this accessory control normal process, whether or not the setting for starting the big hit game is monitored, and if the setting for starting the big hit game is made, the process for starting the big hit game is performed. The value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "1".

The gate passage waiting process of step S121 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "1". In this gate passage waiting process, control for waiting for the game ball to pass through the passage gate 41 is performed. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "2".

The big hit opening preprocessing of step S122 is executed when the accessory control process flag is "2". This big hit opening preprocessing includes processing for starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening in the open state based on that the display result is "big hit" Has been. When the special winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period in which the special winning opening is opened and the upper limit number of times of round execution are set according to which the big hit type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", and the big hit opening preprocessing is completed.

The big hit opening process in step S123 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "3". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the special winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, etc. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "4". , The big hit open process ends.

The big hit opening post-processing of step S124 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "4". This big jackpot post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the special winning opening has reached the set upper limit number of executions, when the maximum number of executions has been reached, the jackpot gaming state It includes the process of setting to terminate the. When the round execution count does not reach the upper limit execution count, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “3”, while when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution count, the accessory control process The value of the flag is updated to "5". When the value of the accessory control process flag is updated, the jackpot opening post-process ends.

The big hit ending process of step S125 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "5". This big hit end processing, waiting processing until the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the ending effect as the effect operation that notifies the end of the big hit game state is executed, and the probability change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state It includes control, KT control, processing for making various settings for starting high base control, and the like. When such a setting is made, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit opening pre-processing of step S126 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "6". The small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the special winning opening in the small hit game state based on the display result of "small hit". At this time, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "7", and the small hit opening pretreatment ends.

The small hitting open process of step S127 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "7". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the special winning opening and the timing of returning the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. A process for determining whether or not it is included. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hitting game state comes, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "8", and the small hitting open process ends.

The small hit ending process of step S128 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is "8". The small hitting end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is executed. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the small hitting end processing ends.

(Main operation of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 7. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 7 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12. Register setting etc. of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation are executed.

Then, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disabled state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main substrate 11 via the relay substrate 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 is stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received, the content specified by the effect control command, and the like can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. The reception flag provided is turned on. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an operation of displaying an effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, an operation of outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation of a decorative light emitter such as the frame LED 9 and a decorative LED, and driving of the movable body 32. Controls for operating various effect devices such as actions are performed. Further, with respect to the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed in accordance with the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process processing in step S76, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 7 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process processing shown in FIG. 8, the effect control CPU 120 first executes prefetching advance notice setting processing (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice production are performed based on the production control command at the time of the winning prize transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of a decorative pattern in the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command or the like designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In the variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the fixed decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, the reach effect and various The presence/absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, and execution start timing are determined. Then, the effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result or the like is set. Then, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern in response to the instruction to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect process, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and sending a command (illumination signal) to the LED control board 14. Various effect control is performed during variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on/off/blinking the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the variable display end of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command for designating stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to what is done, the fixed decorative design which is the display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative design is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display effect effect processing ends.

The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In the special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the main board 11 receives an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state. When a production control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6." Update to ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hitting. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed without receiving the command designating the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "miss". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure hit waiting process ends.

The effect process during the small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. .. Also, in the small hitting production process, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small winning finish production in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 designating termination of the small hitting game state, for example. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit completion production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In the small hitting end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect processing is ended.

The big hit medium effect process of step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big hit mid effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command for ending the big hit game state from the main board 11. It updates to "7" and finishes the big hit mid-game production process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and performs various kinds of end effect effect control at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the ending effect process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, the game medium is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

What is displayed during variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating “-” may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting a medal, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus when the stop symbol combination is a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by The present invention can be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, referred to as bonus).

The program and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device included in. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game execution mode is not limited to that executed by mounting a removable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the hardware resources of other devices may be directly used on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In the present specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the effect (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) is “0%”. May be included. For example, it is also included that one is a ratio of "0%" and the other is a ratio of "100%" or a ratio less than "100%".

[Explanation on Characteristic Part 21TM]
Next, the characteristic part 21TM will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, a performance control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 as shown in FIG. 9-1. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 or the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2 described above, on the main board 11, the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, etc. Various parts are connected, and various effect devices such as the speakers 8L and 8R and the frame LED 9 are connected to the effect control board 12, but these are omitted in FIG. 9-1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side. As shown in FIG. 9-3, the main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in the board case 21TM201, and the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is progressed. Various circuits for controlling are installed. The main board 11 is mainly intended for a setting function of random numbers used in a special drawing game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and a sub-side control board including an effect control board 12 and the like. It has a function of outputting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal and transmitting it, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like. In addition, the main board 11 performs lighting/extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by turning on/off/coloring the normal symbol display 20 It also has a control function.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 which can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display monitor 21TM029 displays various winning information regarding winning. It also has a display function. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be changed over by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

The main board 11 incorporates various signals such as a power-off signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal in addition to the detection signals from the game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for detecting a game ball, for example. An information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as a security signal from the switch circuit 110 transmitting to 100 and the terminal board 21TM016 is mounted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the main substrate 11 shown in FIG. 9-1 is enclosed in a substrate case 21TM201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and a display monitor 21TM029 is provided at the center of the main substrate 11. (For example, 7 segments) are arranged, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged on the front surface when the main board 11 is viewed. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 9-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode described later is provided in the lower center of the back surface of the main board 11. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back surface side of the game board 2 in the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. It is a front surface when visually recognized, and is different from the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

In addition, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is provided with respective winning openings (large winning openings, second starting winning openings, first starting winning openings, first to fourth general winning openings, hereinafter referred to as "entry area". (Also referred to as) the number of game balls that have entered the game ball, and various winning information such as continuous ratios and winning ratios is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and these winning information are displayed. By doing so, it is possible to confirm various winning information such as consecutive ratios and winning ratios after installation at the game hall. That is, on the maker side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming balls enter the general winning opening (pass the test) at a predetermined frequency. Also, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment has been made, and as a result of the adjustment, whether the game ball has entered the general winning opening at the frequency as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made in the pachinko gaming machine 1 after installation.

Further, the power supply board is enclosed in a board case made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and set values such as a winning probability (ball-out rate) of a big hit, which will be described later, are changed on the lower right side of the back surface of the power supply board. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 that functions as a setting switch for power supply and a power switch 21TM055 are provided. A clerk at the game hall operates the power switch 21TM055 while the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that each board such as the main board 11, the production control board 12, and the payout control board 21TM037 is predetermined. Operating voltage is supplied. Furthermore, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and initialization processing (RAM clear) described later is performed. Executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 on the same power board, the power-on operation and the initialization operation can be easily performed.

The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Therefore, only a store clerk who possesses a predetermined key can operate it. Further, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires key operation, only a clerk of the game shop who has a key for operating the lock switch 21TM051 can operate it. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is a switch capable of executing an ON/OFF switching operation by a predetermined key, but can execute the switching operation and execute an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pushing operation). It may be a possible switch.

The lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state. That is, the lock switch 21TM051 can be maintained in the ON state or the OFF state even if the force is not applied by the clerk at the game hall. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 has a configuration in which the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the store clerk or the like in the amusement arcade must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to retrieve the key, so that the store clerk or the like in the amusement park leaves the lock switch 21TM051 in the ON state. It is possible to prevent it.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-3, in the lower portion of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for discharging the gaming balls winning each winning opening and the gaming balls entering the out opening to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (exhaust port) is provided, and an outlet switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a game ball that has been launched) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the switch circuit 110.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the frame LED 9 and the decoration. It includes an LED control command used to control the lighting operation and the like of the application LED.

FIG. 9-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 9-2, the payout control board 21TM037 is provided with a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer and has at least a built-in RAM. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a RAM (not shown), a ROM (not shown) storing a payout control program, an I/O port, and the like constitute a payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is realized by a payout control CPU 21TM371, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having a RAM and a ROM, and an I/O port. Further, the I/O port may be incorporated in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

Detection signals from the out-of-ball switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I/O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and then output to the main board 11 via the I/O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. ..

Further, on the payout control board 21TM037, as shown in FIG. 9-2, a gaming machine frame opening sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2, and the front surface of the gaming board 2 can be opened and closed. A gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 including a door frame opening sensor that detects opening of the glass door frame 3a that is covered with is connected, and various abnormalities are generated based on detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function to determine the occurrence of (error). The detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, whereby the payout control microcomputer The 21TM370 is capable of distinguishing between the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

The detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I/O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor including a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used for detecting that the game ball is clogged, that is, so-called ball biting. .. In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037, the detection signal from the ball out switch 21TM187 indicates the ball out condition, or the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full condition. Then, the ball payout process is stopped.

Furthermore, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is at a low level with respect to the launch board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball launch from the hitting ball launching device. Output full signal. The firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 output from the AND circuit 21TM091 of the firing board 21TM090 is transmitted from the firing board 21TM090 to the firing motor 21TM094. The full signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the launch board 21TM090, and the drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the launch motor 21TM094) Which is a signal that serves to supply power from the power supply board) is input to the other input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the firing motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the firing motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is outputting the full signal, the output of the firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 is stopped.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting/outputting (transmitting/receiving) a signal through serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are connected between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via serial communication circuits 21TM505 and 21TM380. For confirmation, signals (prize ball request signal, received ACK signal) are exchanged (transmitted/received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal for confirming the connection (the prize ball request signal in this embodiment) at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When receiving the award ball request signal from the game controlling microcomputer 100, transmits to the game controlling microcomputer 100 a signal (reception ACK signal) notifying that. In this embodiment, by placing specific data on the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are transmitted at the timing of transmitting and receiving the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal. It is configured to exchange specific data with. For example, when a winning occurs, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of award balls to be paid out by changing a predetermined bit of the award ball request signal, and the prize having the setting is made. The ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, when the prize ball payout operation ends, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets data indicating the end of the prize ball by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and sets the received ACK signal with the setting. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 100. Also, when a predetermined error (error such as ball lending, full tank, ball out, etc.) occurs, data indicating the content of the error is set by changing the predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting concerned is set. The received ACK signal thus made is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives, through the output port 21TM372b, a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls paid out and a ball lending number signal indicating the number of lent balls on a terminal board (frame external terminal board and board external terminal board). Output (including and) to 21TM160. Although a driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, it is omitted in FIG. 9-2.

Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 by the 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Further, a signal for instructing turning on/off is output to the award ball LED 21TM053 and the out-of-ball LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. A detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

Further, a drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. Although a driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 21TM372a, it is omitted in FIG. 9-3.

A card unit control microcomputer is installed in the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable indicator lamp, a connecting stand direction indicator, a card insertion indicator lamp and a card insertion slot. A frequency display LED 21TM060, a ball lending possible LED 21TM061, a ball lending switch 21TM062, and a return switch 21TM063 are connected to the interface board (relay board) 21TM066.

From the interface board 21TM066 to the card unit 21TM050, a ball lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated are given according to the operation of the player. .. Further, the card unit 21TM050 provides a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lendability display signal to the interface board 21TM066. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal) and a pachinko machine operation signal ( (PRDY signal) is transmitted and received via the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066, as shown in FIG. 9-2.

When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. Further, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connected state/unconnected state of the card unit 21TM050 according to the input state of the VL signal. When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit controlling microcomputer outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050, and when detecting the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to give the player a predetermined number of lending balls. Pay out. Then, when the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 lowers the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. After that, on condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not in the ON state, when the payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100, the prize ball payout control is executed.

The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the power supply from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided in the AC24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. Is prevented.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured so that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the jackpot is changed. .. The set value is made up of 6 levels from 1 to 6, where 6 is the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value becomes smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage becomes gradually lower.

FIGS. 9-4A to 9F are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, when the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, that is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a determination value for a big hit is set.

As shown in FIG. 9-4(A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1 is used, if the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is a variable display target. If the set value is "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", it will win the jackpot with a lower probability (1/300). ing. Also, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4(B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. There is a higher probability (1/280) than in some cases to win the jackpot. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4(C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, It is designed to win the jackpot with a higher probability (1/280) than in the case of "2". Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9D, when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 4, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/250) than in the case of "2" and "3". Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4(E), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235) than in the case of "2", "3", and "4". Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, the first special symbol is designed to win the big hit with the same probability (1/235) as when targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4(F), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the case of "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to the jackpot shown in FIGS. 9-4(A) to (F). When the hit determination value is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). That is, the jackpot winning is determined with a probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 9-4(A) to (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Also, to determine whether to make a big hit, it means to decide whether to control the big hit gaming state, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design.

Further, in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 is configured to determine whether or not to make a big hit using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-4(A) to (F). It is provided separately, and the determination of the big hit is performed by using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. Good.

In this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a total of 6 setting values 1 to 6, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The settable values that can be set to 2 may be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

(Setting suggestion production)
The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the setting value by executing the effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by changing the mode of the ending effect executed when the big hit game state ends, according to the specified set value. 9-5 (1), (2), and (3) show examples of setting suggestive effects. FIG. 9-5(1) is an example in which the ending image in the "sunny" mode is selected on the big hit ending screen, and FIG. 9-5(2) is the ending screen in the "cloudy" form is selected on the big hit ending screen. For example, FIG. 9-5(3) shows an example in which the ending image in the "rain" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. Further, FIG. 9-5(4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestive effect based on the setting value designated by the setting command.

The CPU 103 transmits a setting command designating a setting value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, when the jackpot gaming state is over, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command for executing the ending production in the image display device 5 to the production control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 can store the setting value designated by the received setting command in the RAM 102, and determine the ending effect mode based on the stored setting value. For example, based on the effect control command transmitted when the jackpot gaming state is finished, the image display device 5 is stored together with a character (character of "BONUS end") informing that the jackpot gaming state is ended. It is possible to display an ending image in a mode (sunny mode, cloudy mode, rainy mode) determined based on the set value.

In the table shown in FIG. 9-5(4), the setting values designated by the setting command are "1, 2", "3, 4", and "5, 6". , When setting the mode of the setting suggestive effect to the “clear” mode shown in FIG. 9-5(1), when determining to the “cloudy” mode shown in FIG. 9-5(2), and FIG. 9- In the case of determining the “rain” mode shown in 5(3), the determination value of is assigned.

When the setting value designated by the received setting command is "1" or "2", the effect control CPU 120 suggests a "fine" mode setting shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It was decided to execute the effect (ending effect), and it was decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a medium ratio (for example, 40%). It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the “rain” mode shown in (3) at a rate of 40% (for example, 40%). When the setting value designated by the received setting command is “3” or “4”, the effect control CPU 120 has a low rate (for example, 20%) of the “clear” mode shown in (1). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%), and the medium degree. It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the “rain” mode shown in (3) at a rate (for example, 30%). When the setting value designated by the received setting command is "5" or "6", the effect control CPU 120 has a high rate (for example, 50%) of the "clear" mode shown in (1). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the “rain” mode shown in (3) at a rate (for example, 30%).

In this way, by varying the determination rate of each mode of the setting suggestion effect according to the set value, the player becomes interested in how the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the setting suggestion effect is performed. The interest of the production can be improved. In this example, the player becomes interested in how the ending effect executed when the jackpot gaming state ends is executed, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in the "sunny" mode. You will expect to be done.

(Process at power-on)
Next, the power-on process will be described.
9-6 to 9-8 are diagrams showing an example of processing executed in the game control microcomputer 100 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 9-6, the CPU 103 of the game controlling microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM4010). In this process, a parity check is performed as a data check.

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value, for example, 0-5. Is confirmed (step S21TM4020). In this example, as the set values stored in the set value storage area, six numbers 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are set as normal values, and six-stage set values having different jackpot probabilities are provided. ing. The setting value 0 in this example corresponds to the setting value 1 shown in FIG. 9-4 described above, and the setting value 1 in this example corresponds to the setting value 2 shown in FIG. 9-4 described above. The value 2 corresponds to the setting value 3 shown in FIG. 9-4 described above, the setting value 3 in this example corresponds to the setting value 4 shown in FIG. 9-4 described above, and the setting value 4 in this example is described above. 9-4, etc., and the setting value 5 in this example corresponds to the setting value 6 shown in FIG. 9-4, etc. described above.

Here, in this example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is shipped from the game machine maker (before being installed in the game arcade), in the set value storage area, the value with the lowest jackpot probability among the above regular values. It is assumed that (0 in this example) is stored. If the data in the set value storage area is corrupted, it may not be a normal value. If the set value is a regular value (YES in step S21TM4020), it is confirmed whether or not the setting change flag is set (step S21TM4030). The setting change flag is set when the setting change mode described later is entered (step S21TM4580), and cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (step S21TM4720).

If the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 confirms whether the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4040).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether or not the RAM clear (initialization of the game state) is determined to be executed, and when the value is 1, it is determined that the RAM clear is performed. It has been done. In this example, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the RAM clear is not actually executed, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear is executed after the processing related to the setting change mode is completed. Will be done.

The area in which the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power is cut off, the value of the RAM clear flag is not held, and the value of the RAM clear flag at power restoration is 0 (initial value is not set). The notification that the game state is initialized may be performed before the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and as described later, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. It may be performed.

On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is OFF (NO in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4060.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300, and the gaming machine frame/door frame opening A detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected are output from the sensor 21TM300 to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the gaming control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, When recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, the game control microcomputer 100 is notified on the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

The game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects to the game control microcomputer 100 a detection signal indicating that the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a are detected. When the detection signal indicating that is output (that is, when the gaming control microcomputer 100 includes the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300), the gaming control microcomputer 100 determines By inputting the detection signal, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it is confirmed whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4070). .. If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), the process proceeds to step S21TM4510 and subsequent steps related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 9-7. When the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the set value can be confirmed and changed, and when the mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode, the set value can be confirmed.

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), and the power is not cut off during the setting change ( If NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060), and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), the setting value is changed and/or Alternatively, confirmation is possible. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), which one of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is set? Without being controlled by the mode, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command) described later.

In the present embodiment, in order to bring the setting value into a state in which the setting value cannot be changed (setting confirmation mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (2) ) Two conditions are required: the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. When the CPU 103 confirms that the conditions (1) and (2) are both satisfied by the determination processing in steps S21TM4060 and S21TM4070, the CPU 103 can confirm the setting value (setting confirmation). Mode). In addition to these conditions (1) and (2), the RAM clear flag is set based on the fact that (3) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES). As described later, it is possible to shift to a state in which the set value can be changed (setting change mode) on the condition that the setting has been performed.

As described above, the lock switch 21TM051 that must be operated to confirm or change the set value is provided on the back side of the game board 2, and must be operated unless the game machine frame 3 is opened. I can't. Even if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is operated means that the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 has an abnormality or is somehow illegal. There is a possibility that the setting value is being confirmed or changed by the means. In such a state, since it is inappropriate to permit the confirmation or change of the set value, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set in the confirmation mode. Also, the control is not controlled in any of the setting change modes.

In the present embodiment, as condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although controllable, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode. It may not be controlled by any of the above.

On the other hand, in step S21TM4060, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a If it is in the closed state, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command) described later without being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Further, when it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), the control is not performed in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and step S21TM4760 described later is performed. Move on to (Send setting command).

In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4120. Further, in checking the value stored in the setting value storage area (step S21TM4020), if the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the setting value storage area (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103 determines that , And proceeds to step S21TM4120. When it is confirmed that the setting change flag is set in the setting change flag check (step S21TM4030) (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4120.

Here, even if a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is damaged, it is determined as NO in step S21TM4010. Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. That is, when there is a possibility that the value stored in the setting value storage area is inappropriate, the setting is changed based on the fact that the setting change mode transition condition (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. Will be controlled by the mode. If the check result is normal in the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010) (YES in step S21TM4010), a regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area. (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. When the setting change mode was controlled at the time of the previous power failure, the setting change mode is controlled based on the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) being satisfied. It will be.

In step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 confirms whether the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4120), it is confirmed whether the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4130). ..

If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140).

If the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). Then, the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 9-7 is executed.

On the other hand, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4120 (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a In the closed state, in step S21TM4130, when the lock switch 21TM051 is not in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4130), in the step S21TM4140, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state In (NO in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 indicates that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal without executing the processing of step S21TM4510 and subsequent steps related to the setting change mode. The set value abnormality error command shown is transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control.

Upon receiving the setting value abnormality error command, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 that the setting value may be abnormal. For example, a message "Setting value may be abnormal" is displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to temporarily turn off the power (turn off the power switch 21TM055) and then shift to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on). Then, a notification prompting the user to perform an operation for changing the set value (fixing the set value) is performed. For example, the message "Please turn on the power again to switch to the setting change mode after turning off the power" is displayed. It should be noted that similar notification may be performed by voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined loop process (repeating steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) until the power is turned off.

In this loop processing, the CPU 103 waits for 4 ms (step S21TM4200) and then displays the character “E” on the display monitor 21TM029. Despite that there is a possibility, the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode (all of which are determined to be YES in steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140) is not satisfied and the setting change mode is not entered." Notify (step S21TM4210). Then, the security signal is output from the output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21TM4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information of a plurality of gaming machines, a card unit or a calling lamp device provided corresponding to the gaming machine). To be done.

During the loop processing period, the character "E" is displayed every 4 ms on the 7-segment display provided in the display monitor 21TM029. A weight of 4 ms is provided to prevent excessive heat from staying in the 7-segment display and damaging the display. The security signal is continuously output during the loop processing. By outputting the security signal to the outside, a predetermined event (in this example, the set value is a normal value (0 to 5) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the input of the security signal in an external device such as a hall computer. It is possible to identify the possibility that the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied and the setting change mode has not been entered)).

The loop process of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 is continued until the power supply is stopped (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the set value is not a regular value (NO in step S21TM4020), and the power is cut off during the setting change ( That is, when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and when YES is determined in step S21TM4030), in any of the cases, the game should not be played in this state, Before shifting to normal game processing (for example, game control timer interrupt processing including prize ball processing, special symbol process processing, etc.), it is necessary to set the set value in the set value storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set to shift to the setting change mode.

In the present embodiment, (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in an ON state in order to bring the setting value into a changeable state (setting change mode). (3) Three conditions that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state are required. When the CPU 103 confirms by the determination processing of steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140 that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied, it is possible to change the setting value ( It is possible to switch to the setting change mode).

If any one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the setting value is not permitted, so that the setting value of the setting value storage area can be set to a regular value. Without, it is not possible to shift to the normal game processing. Therefore, when NO is determined in any of the determination processes of steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140, the process proceeds to the loop process (steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) described above.

Once the process shifts to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), the game player cannot shift to the normal game process. Therefore, the clerk or the like in the game arcade must turn off the pachinko gaming machine 1 and turn it on again. I won't. As described above, when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied, the power is temporarily cut off so that all the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied at the next power-on. Then, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and the set value in the set value storage area is fixed to a regular value.

When any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 presets the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The light may be emitted in the power-off instruction mode to prompt the user to turn off the power.

In the present embodiment, when the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the setting value is not permitted to be changed, but the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode). , (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), two conditions are required.

However, when the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. Even if the two conditions of (YES in step S21TM4130) are satisfied, the setting confirmation mode is not controlled. Even if these conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, (3) if it is determined in step S21TM4140 that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state (NO), It is controlled to the game stopped state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Next, processing related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-7 and 9-8. In the processing of FIG. 9-7, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value (any one of 0 to 5 in this example) ( Step S21TM4510). When the regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area (YES in step S21TM4510), the process proceeds to step S21TM4530. When the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the setting value storage area (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 has the lowest jackpot probability "0" as the regular value in the setting value storage area. Is stored (step S21TM4520). Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4530.

Next, the CPU 103 performs a power-off process after performing a wait of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) (step S21TM4540). In the power-off process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a power-off signal based on a power-off including an unexpected power failure is input, and if the power-off signal is input, the CPU 103 checks whether the power is supplied. Immediately before the power supply stops operating due to the stop, the power supply stop processing is executed. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes a process of adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. That is, in the power-off processing, the check data is stored in the predetermined backup area.

Thereby, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled (when the repeated processing of step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620 or the repeated processing of step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 is performed), the power supply When the disconnection occurs, the data check is appropriately executed in step S21TM4010 after the power is restored.

Next, the CPU 103 causes the display monitor 21TM029 to display a value corresponding to the set value (0 to 5 in this example) stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4550). Here, the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area. Since the clerk of the amusement hall normally recognizes the range of the set value as 1 to 6, if the value stored in the set value storage area is displayed as it is on the display monitor 21TM029, the clerk of the amusement hall actually uses it. There is a risk of erroneously recognizing the setting value of. Therefore, in this example, [the value stored in the set value storage area+1] is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as the set value. Next, the CPU 103 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is not executed after the mode (here, the setting confirmation mode) ends, the CPU 103 specifies that the setting confirmation mode is controlled. A setting confirmation mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4650), and the process proceeds to step S21TM4680. The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, when the RAM clear is executed after the mode (here, the setting change mode) ends, the CPU 103 changes the set value. A setting change flag indicating that there is a possibility of being present is set (step S21TM4580). Since the area in which the value of the setting change flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting change flag is retained even when the power is turned off. Therefore, when the power is cut off while the control is in the setting change mode, the value of the setting change flag is 1 (set state) when the power is turned on next time.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command designating that the setting change mode is controlled (step S21TM4590). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has transitioned to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled in the setting change mode.

Next, the CPU 103 inputs the setting changeover switch information indicating whether the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and confirms whether the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. (Step S21TM4610).

If the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is not operated (NO in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4680. If the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and proceeds to step S21TM4680. Transition. The updated set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

Every time the clerk at the game arcade operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, the regular set value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the set value stored in the set value storage area when the setting change mode is controlled (when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off last time) is 3 If there is, the set value stored in the set value storage area is updated in the order of 3→4→5→0→1→2→3 for each setting change operation, and accordingly, the display monitor 21TM029 responds. The displayed information is updated in the order of 4→5→6→1→2→3→4.

Here, it is possible to display the current setting value (step S21TM4550), output the security signal (step S21TM4560), and send the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650), but send the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590). ) And the state in which the setting value update (step S21TM4620) cannot be executed corresponds to the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed or the setting value cannot be changed. During the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 are repeatedly executed.

In the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040 and the RAM clear flag). Remains 0).

In addition, the display of the current setting value (step S21TM4550) and the output of the security signal (step S21TM4560) can be executed, and the setting change mode command can be transmitted (step S21TM4590) and the setting value can be updated (step S21TM4620). This state corresponds to the setting change mode in which the set value can be confirmed and changed.

In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (determined YES in step S21TM4070 or step S21TM4130), and the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140). It is determined that the RAM clear flag is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150).

The setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during the setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when the setting confirmation mode command is transmitted, the CPU 103 can set the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that can identify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. The setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM4720). The setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during the setting change mode control. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits the setting change mode command, it can specify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted, and set the setting change mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. The setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM4720). Then, the setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

In step S21TM4680, CPU 103 confirms whether lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), a wait of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) is performed again, and then the processes of step S21TM4540 and subsequent steps are repeated. That is, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the control of the setting confirmation mode is continued, and if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the control of the setting change mode is continued.

If the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF in step S21TM4680 (YES in step S21TM4680), the CPU 103 ends the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and sets 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM4710). Since the predetermined time is set as the value of the security signal timer, the security signal is continuously output until the value of the security signal timer becomes 0 ms from the predetermined time in the information output process when the process shifts to the normal game process thereafter. Will be done. For example, when the game control timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is decremented by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped when the value reaches 0 ms. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms regardless of whether the setting change mode is ended or the setting confirmation mode is ended.

That is, as shown in FIG. 9-9(1), the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4560), and the setting change mode and the setting confirmation are confirmed. Corresponding to the end of control of any of the modes, the value of the security signal timer is set so that the security signal is continuously output until at least 1 sec has elapsed from the end of the control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Set (step S21TM4710).

Here, the process of starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 is performed regardless of whether it is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (which mode is controlled. It is executed as a common process (without (without). Further, the processing for setting the remaining output period of the security signal in step S21TM4710 is also performed regardless of whether the control is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (determine which mode is controlled. It is executed as a common process. In this way, the security signal output control is simplified by sharing the security signal output start control and output end control between the setting change mode control and the setting confirmation mode control. The control load can be reduced.

Also, output of the security signal is started in response to the start of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and is output in response to the end of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By stopping, it is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that the gaming machine may have been controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Here, in step S21TM4710 immediately after the control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, a common value (1000 ms) is set for the security signal when the setting change mode is controlled and the setting confirmation mode is controlled. The timer is set. However, if both the output start control and the output end control of the security signal are shared between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting change mode is controlled, which mode is set on the external device side. It becomes difficult to know if it was controlled.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-9(2), when the setting change mode is controlled, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the security signal is temporarily sent in step S21TM4710. After setting 1000 ms as the value of the timer, based on the judgment of NO in step S21TM4770 described later, in step S21TM1465 after clearing the RAM, reset (overwrite) 30000 ms as the value of the security signal timer. There is. That is, after the remaining output period of the security signal is once set to 1 sec, the remaining output period of the security signal is reset (overwritten) to 30 sec.

When the above signal output control is performed, the final output stop timing of the security signal is as shown in FIG. 9-9(2), when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the setting confirmation mode ends. 1 sec has passed, and when the setting change mode has been controlled, 30 sec has passed from the end of the setting change mode.

Specifically, when it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode (when the RAM clear is not performed and the value of the security signal timer is not changed from 1 second), the game control timer interrupt after the interrupt permission is given. In the process (for example, the information output process), the security signal is continuously output until the value of the security signal timer changes from 1000 ms to 0 ms, and the setting change mode is controlled (when the RAM clear is performed, When the value of the security signal timer is changed from 1 second to 30 seconds), the value of the security signal timer is changed from 30000 ms to 0 ms in the game control timer interrupt process (for example, information output process) after the interrupt permission. The security signal will continue to be output until. In addition, when it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, when it is controlled to the setting change mode, the value of the security signal timer is a predetermined time (1000 ms or 30000 ms) at the timing before shifting to the game control timer interrupt process. ) To 0 ms, the security signal may be continuously output, and the game control timer interrupt process may be performed after the security signal is output.

As described above, the security signal is continuously output for at least 1 sec depending on whether the control of the setting confirmation mode is finished or the control of the setting change mode is finished, and the control is changed to the setting change mode. In this case, the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds elapse after the control of the setting change mode ends. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the output period of the security signal different between the case of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode and the case of being controlled in the setting change mode, while making the output control of the security signal common.

As a result, in the external device, it is possible to grasp whether the initialization processing is executed and the setting confirmation mode is controlled or the initialization processing is executed and the setting change mode is controlled. .. For example, if the output period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, it is possible to specify that the setting confirmation mode has been controlled without executing the initialization process, and if the output period of the security signal is 30 seconds or more, the initial state can be specified. It is possible to presume that the conversion processing has been executed and the setting change mode may have been controlled.

The security signal is also output when a game stop target error such as a magnetic abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. The security signal in this case is continuously output until the power of the game machine is turned off. Further, the CPU 103 sets the abnormality detection flag in the backup area of the RAM 102 (however, the area cleared by the initialization process) based on the abnormality detected by the abnormality detection sensor. Then, it is assumed that the security signal is output for 4 minutes based on the abnormality detection flag being set when the power is restored.

Here, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is restored, the RAM clear is not executed, and therefore the value of the abnormality detection flag remains set without being initialized in the signal output process. It is possible to continuously output the security signal for 4 minutes after the power is turned on. That is, it is possible to prevent the output period of the security signal from being limited to the period from the end of the control of the setting confirmation mode to the lapse of 1 second. On the other hand, if the setting change mode is controlled when the power is restored, the RAM clear will be executed, so the error detection flag will be cleared in the subsequent signal output processing (power failure occurs). At some point, it is unclear whether or not an abnormality has been detected), and as a result, the security signal output period is the period from the end of the setting change mode until 30 seconds elapse (depending on the execution of RAM clear). Period).

In the example shown in step S21TM4710 of FIG. 9-7, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and is first set after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. The value of the security signal timer set to 1 may be at least a period during which the output of the security signal can be recognized by the external device side, for example, 50 ms or more. That is, a common 50 ms may be set as the value of the security signal timer when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

After the processing of step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting change flag (step S21TM4720). Here, when the power is cut off after the setting change flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting change flag is not set when the power is restored (NO in step S21TM4030). Become.

Next, the CPU 103 erases the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the set value (any of 0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area is set in the set command, and the set command is transmitted (step S21TM4760). Even when the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are not controlled when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 is executed and the setting command is transmitted.

Here, the player usually recognizes the range of setting values as 1 to 6, and the value specified by the setting command (the value stored in the setting value storage area) is directly displayed as an image on the CPU 120 side for effect control. If it is displayed on the display device 5, the player may erroneously understand the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the CPU 120 side for effect control, a value obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) designated by the setting command is recognized as the setting value (1 to 6), and the setting value 1 to 6 is set. The effect that suggests the set value is executed in the range.

Not limited to such a form, the CPU 103 sets a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area to the setting command, and effects control It may be transmitted to the CPU 120 for use. As a result, the range of the setting value designated by the setting command becomes 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. On the CPU 120 side for effect control, the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is displayed on the image display device 5 as it is, or an effect that suggests the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is executed. By doing so, the set value can be appropriately notified or suggested. Further, it becomes unnecessary for the effect control CPU 120 side to perform addition processing for the set value designated by the received setting command, and the control load on the effect control CPU 120 side can be reduced.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. Further, it is possible to suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value designated by the setting command. For example, the setting value can be suggested to the player by changing the mode of the ending effect that is executed when the jackpot gaming state ends, according to the specified setting value.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

Here, when the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770), the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), and the set value is a normal value (step S21TM4010). It is determined to be YES in S21TM4020, the power is not cut off during the setting change (NO in step S21TM4030), and the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is OFF (NO in step S21TM4040). ), it is sufficient to execute the processing at the time of power interruption recovery without clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes the process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal when the power is turned on, and after the interrupt permission, the game control timer interrupt process (special (Including pattern process processing, etc.). That is, when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or when the control of the setting confirmation mode is ended, the CPU 103 determines that the RAM clear flag is 0, Without executing the clear, the backup command is transmitted as a command at the time of power-off recovery, and the normal game process is started.

In the production control CPU 120, based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of restoration), restoration from power failure is performed based on the data at the time of power supply stop (RAM clear is not performed. Be recognized). When the production control CPU 120 receives the backup command, the production device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the frame LED 9 has been restored from the power interruption based on the data when the power supply was stopped. It is possible to notify that (RAM clear is not performed).

On the other hand, when the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770), it means that the RAM clear is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150, and it is determined to execute the RAM clear. Therefore, it is sufficient to execute the processing at the time of power-on accompanied by RAM clear.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 executes the processing of setting 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer and the processing when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal at power-on. , After the interruption permission, the game control timer interruption processing (including special symbol process processing, etc.) may be performed.

As shown in FIG. 9-8, the CPU 103 performs the RAM clear processing based on the RAM clear flag being 1 (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear processing, the data (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time saving flag, reserved memory, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped, which is stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102, is cleared and the initial value is set. However, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clearing process. Further, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the serial ratio, the winning combination, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated for each set value. The value is not changed before the RAM clear process. Then, the character "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 to notify that the game state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). By the RAM clearing process, predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for normal symbol determination) is initialized to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. Further, the predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the normal symbol per determination random number) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 102.

The reason why the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is not cleared in this RAM clearing process is as follows: (a) If the setting change mode is not controlled, a normal value is set in the setting value storage area when the power is turned on. If it is stored (YES in step S21TM4020), and (b) the setting change mode is controlled, the value of the setting value storage area is set to 0 (step S21TM4520) or the setting change mode is in progress. This is because the normal value is stored by the operation (step S21TM4610 and step S21TM4620). Furthermore, after the RAM clearing process, the setting change mode cannot be controlled and there is no opportunity to change the value stored in the setting value storage area.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the pointer to the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization setting table in the work area (step S21TM1440). By the process of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a normal symbol per determination random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag such as a flag for selectively performing processing according to the control state. The initial value is set.

After executing steps S21TM1430 and S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads out the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In the game control timer interrupt process, which will be described later, the jackpot determination in the special symbol process process is executed based on the setting value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command that specifies that the initialization process has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode ends) (step S21TM1460). In the production control CPU 120, the initialization processing is performed based on the reception of the initialization command (the RAM is cleared without recovery from the power interruption based on the data when the power supply is stopped). Be recognized). When the production control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, the production device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the frame LED 9 has initialized the game state and the like (data when power supply is stopped). Based on the above, it is possible to notify that the RAM clear has been performed without recovery from power failure.

Next, the CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). As a result, the value (1 second) of the security signal timer set in step S21TM4710 after the end of the setting change mode is changed (overwritten) to the value (30 seconds) corresponding to the execution of the RAM clear. become. When the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, step S21TM4710 is not executed (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer). Value), the value of the security signal timer is set to 30 seconds corresponding to the execution of the RAM clear. On the other hand, when the RAM clear is not executed (including the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled), the process of step S21TM1465 is not executed, so the value of the security signal timer is 1 second set in step S21TM4710. There is.

Since the value of the security signal timer is set in this step S21TM1465 or the above-mentioned step S21TM4710, a security signal is output in the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt permission (information output process), After that, each time the game control timer interrupt process is executed by the interrupt permission, the value of the security signal timer is decremented by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped at the timing when the value of the security signal timer becomes 0. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 executes the setting process of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, the connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037. Further, the communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the gaming control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to be executable.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). The CPU 103, for example, executes a process in accordance with a random number circuit setting program to set the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result.

Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is taken every 2 ms.

Next, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the display random number updating process (step S21TM1520) and the initial value random number updating process (step S21TM1530). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S21TM1510), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt enabled state is set. It is set (step S21TM1540). As a result, the process shifts to the normal game process capable of executing the game control timer interrupt process. In the present embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when not a big hit and a random number for determining whether to reach when not a big hit, for display The random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random numbers. In this embodiment, the random number for the initial value is the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for deciding whether or not to win the normal symbol (normal symbol per-determination random number generation counter). It is a random number to do. A game control process for controlling the progress of a game to be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game display device, the variable winning ball device, the ball payout device, and other game devices provided in the game machine by itself. In the process to perform, or the process of transmitting a command signal to control other microcomputers, also referred to as the game device control process), the count value of the random number per ordinary symbol is one round (ordinary random number for per symbol determination) When the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values has been increased), the initial value is set to the counter.

In this example, when it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES), the CPU 103 determines whether both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. Without confirming (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process shifts to the power-off recovery process, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the RAM clear flag is set in step S21TM4770. When it is determined to be 0 (YES), the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state (depending on the state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. ), and the process at the time of power failure recovery may be performed.

Further, in this example, when it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the CPU 103 determines whether the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed. Without confirming (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process shifts to the process when the power is turned on (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)). Not limited to this, when it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state (the gaming machine frame. 3 or depending on the state of the glass door frame 3a), the process may be shifted to the process when the power is turned on (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)).

As described above, the clerk or the like of the game hall puts the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. In addition to being able to control, it is possible to initialize the game state and the like (execute RAM clear). Further, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, it is possible to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting confirmation mode, and also the gaming state and the like. Can be prevented from being initialized (the step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140 is judged to be NO and the RAM clear flag is not set to 1). In this way, the clerk at the game arcade can select whether to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and also select whether or not to initialize the gaming state or the like. There is.

As mentioned above, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, it means that the setting value was unstable because it was controlled to the setting change mode when the power was cut off. There is a possibility that the set value that the game hall is trying to confirm is not stored in the set value storage area. In the example shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 determines that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), and does not shift to the normal game processing, and the game is stopped (step). S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 are controlled so that a security signal is output in response to the control in the game stopped state (step S21TM4220).

With such a configuration, the game is prevented from being started (the game control timer interrupt process is executed) in the state where the set value is unstable, and the power is supplied when the power is turned on. It is possible to notify the external device that it was in the setting change mode when the disconnection occurred.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 sets the condition for shifting to the setting change mode (YES in step S21TM4030) based on that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). When all of the steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 are YES), the set value abnormality error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190) and the display monitor in the game stopped state (loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220). An error display for displaying the letter "E" is displayed on 21TM029 (step S21TM4210).

In the example shown in FIG. 9-10, the 7-segment displays 21TM029A to 21TM029D forming the display monitor 21TM029 display the letter “E” respectively, so that the clerk at the amusement hall has an abnormality (in the setting change mode). There is a possibility that the power supply may have been cut off under control). In addition, the production control CPU 120, which has received the setting value error command, causes the image display device 5 to display a message “Please turn on the power again to switch to the setting change mode after the power is turned off”. After turning the power off (power switch 21TM055 is OFF), the store clerk, etc., shifts to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (power switch 21TM055 is ON), and changes the set value. Perform a notification to urge (confirm the set value).

In this example, (a) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and when the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is It is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140). If YES), the control is changed to the setting change mode. As a result, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: “E” display on the display monitor 21TM029) is not executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side (“power is turned on again after power off”). Please move to the setting change mode”).

Here, in the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590), the image display device 5 has been controlled to the setting change mode, that is, the setting change operation (setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052). ), it is possible to notify that the set value can be changed. For example, a message "in the setting change mode" or a message "Please perform the setting change operation to change the set value" can be displayed on the image display device 5. With this, the clerk at the amusement arcade can understand that the setting change mode is controlled, and by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the set value stored in the set value storage area can be set. By changing the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state after changing the preset set value, the set value can be confirmed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game processing.

On the other hand, (b) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is not satisfied, that is, among the above (i) to (iii) If any of the conditions is not satisfied, the setting change mode is not controlled, and the game is stopped (the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) after the setting value error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190). .. As a result, an error display (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) on the main board 11 side is executed, and a message display on the effect control board 12 side ("Power is turned on again after power is turned off." To change to the setting change mode").

In this way, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: “E” display on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side (“power is turned on again after power off”). Please change to the setting change mode”) is also performed, and as a state of the gaming machine, even if the power is cut off during the setting change mode, the condition for changing to the setting change mode after the power is restored is It will be notified that it is not established. In this case, the clerk at the game hall understands that the game is not controlled in the setting change mode and is in the game stopped state (it is necessary to turn on the power again to control the setting change mode). It is possible. Therefore, after once turning off the power, the power is turned on again by operating so that all the transition conditions (i) to (iii) to the setting change mode are satisfied. Then, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to the planned setting value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off. By switching to the state, the set value can be fixed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game processing.

Thus, when the power is cut off in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified when the power is restored.

Here, when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied when the power is restored (a), an error is displayed on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: “E” is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029). This automatically shifts to the setting change mode without prompting the user to avoid unnecessary error display and promptly change the setting value appropriately.

On the other hand, when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied when the power is restored (b), it is not possible to shift to the setting change mode when the power is restored although the power is cut off during the setting change mode. Since it is in the state, it is forcibly controlled to the game stopped state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), and the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on display monitor 21TM029). Will be done. As a result, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in an unstable state where the set value is not fixed, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

When the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for transitioning to the setting change mode are all satisfied, and the transition condition (i ) To (iii) are not satisfied, different commands may be transmitted as commands indicating that the set value may be abnormal.

For example, when the transition condition is satisfied, it is a command indicating that the set value may be abnormal and the mode has been changed to the setting change mode (or the condition for the transition is satisfied). The CPU 120 for effect control, which has transmitted the command indicating that the command has been received, displays the message "The setting value may be abnormal" and the message "It is automatically controlled in the setting change mode" It is preferable to display it on the device 5. On the other hand, when the transition condition is not satisfied, it is preferable to transmit the set value abnormality error command in step S21TM4190 as described above.

After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished and the process is shifted to the normal game process, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is operated when both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. In response to the change (from the OFF state to the ON state), the lock control command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120, and (2) the setting changeover switch (clear switch). ) In response to the operation of 21TM052 (from the OFF state to the ON state), the setting control switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120.

Then, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) is controlled in both the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and/or the setting change switch operation command. Even if there is not, it is possible to specify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed, and notify that effect. For example, on the basis of the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes the abnormal operation warning notification for displaying the characters "The operation of the lock switch has been detected." Further, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification displaying the character "Operation of the setting changeover switch is detected." is executed. As a result, the clerk of the amusement hall clearly understands that the operation for changing the set value has been performed despite being controlled by neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode, and thus illegal It is possible to check whether or not

Not limited to such a form, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is operated after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the process moves to the normal game process, and The lock switch operation command and the setting change switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. In this way, during the period when the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value is not checked. This makes it possible to reduce the control burden on the game control microcomputer 100.

(Modification of power-on process)
In the example shown in FIG. 9-6, when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120). ), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140). Only when it is confirmed that the RAM clear flag is set, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150), and the mode is changed to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570).

Not limited to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 9-11, when the setting change flag is set at power-on (YES in step S21TM4030), the three conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied. The RAM clear flag may be set to 1 (step S21TM4150) and the mode may be changed to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570) without checking whether or not the condition is satisfied.

In the processing shown in FIG. 9-11, when the data check result in the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the setting value is not a regular value (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change flag is set. If YES (YES in step S21TM4030), the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without determining whether the conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied, and the setting is changed. The process is controlled (NO in step S21TM4570) and is not controlled in the game stopped state (process equivalent to the loop process of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), which is different from the process shown in FIG. 9-6. The other parts are the same as the processes shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8.

Even in this case, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 and the mode is changed to the setting change mode based on the setting change flag being set when the power is turned on. It is possible to properly determine the state of the gaming machine when the power is cut off during the change.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-11, when the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON. Is set, and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, the setting change mode is controlled based on the three conditions being satisfied (NO in step S21TM4570). However, when the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) to (iii) are set. Regardless of whether or not the three conditions are satisfied, the setting change mode is forcibly controlled.

As described above, when the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode, the three conditions (i) to (iii) are based on the setting change flag being set when the power is restored. By automatically controlling to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not is satisfied, it is possible to improve workability for fixing the set value.

Here, if the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (ii) even if the condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130) is not satisfied, the setting is performed. It will be controlled in the change mode. As a result, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the OFF state. (Step S21TM4610 to step S21TM4620 in FIG. 9-7).

As described above, the condition for ending the setting change mode is to switch the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state (determine YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state, the store clerk of the game arcade who has performed the setting value change operation once confirms the set value and ends the setting change mode. After switching to the ON state, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (YES is determined in step S21TM4680).

In this way, the condition for starting the control of the setting change mode depending on whether the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) or the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). While making different, the conditions for ending the control of the setting change mode (operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state) are made common to clarify the condition for ending the control of the setting change mode, It is arranged to appropriately shift to the normal game processing.

Here, if the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030) and the setting change mode is controlled, a notification prompting the lock switch 21TM051 to be turned on may be issued. good. For example, when the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150 and transmits the setting value error command (in step S21TM4190 described above). Performing the corresponding processing), the CPU 120 for effect control, which has received the setting value abnormality error command (step S21TM4110), says, "Please turn on the lock switch once and then turn it off after changing the setting value." The message may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In the processing shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8 and 9-11, it is impossible to shift to the normal game processing when the setting change flag is set. Therefore, when the gaming machine maker sets the flag during setting change in advance before shipping the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installation in the gaming hall), the gaming hall then goes through the setting change mode. Unless the setting value is changed and the setting change mode is terminated, the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be performed. Accordingly, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game arcade, it is possible to reliably control the setting change mode to perform the setting change operation and to take a measure to fix the set value.

(Setting value storage control in case of power failure during setting value change)
Next, the set value storage control when the power is cut off while changing the set value will be described with reference to FIGS. In the example shown in FIG. 9-7, in the setting change mode, the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated to change the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area.

First, regarding the control in the case where a power-off occurs before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the setting change mode is finished) by changing the setting value in the setting change mode, FIG. This will be described using -12(1).

As shown in the order 1, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to be controlled to the setting change mode. In this example, “0” is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on. Next, as shown in order 2, with the start of the setting change mode, the set value “0” stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and the read set value is set to 1 "1" that is obtained by adding is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

Next, as shown in order 3, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is “0” based on the first operation of the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052. Is changed from “1” to “1”, and “2” obtained by adding 1 to the changed setting value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state. Furthermore, as shown in order 4, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is "1" based on the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. Is changed from “2” to “2”, and “3” obtained by adding 1 to the changed setting value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

Next, as shown in order 5, in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the power is cut off while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state, that is, before the operation for ending the setting change mode is performed. At this time, the setting value storage area is in a state where the setting value “2” after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is stored. In the power-off state, the setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is retained as it is.

Next, as shown in order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to control the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, “2” is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. The set value “2” is the value stored in the set value storage area when the power supply was cut off in the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 7, with the start of the setting change mode, the setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and 1 is added to the read setting value. "3", which is obtained by adding "," is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

Since the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on in the order 6, when the control shown in FIG. 9-11 is applied, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (or cleared). Even if the switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), the setting change mode is automatically controlled. Therefore, the lock switch 21TM051 in the order 6 and the order 7 may be in the OFF state.

In this way, when the setting value is changed in the setting change mode and the power is cut off without the lock switch 21TM051 being turned off (without terminating the setting change mode), when the power is restored. The set value after the change in the previous setting change mode is held in the set value storage area. Therefore, when the power is restored, the preset setting value may have already been set, and in this case, the clerk at the amusement arcade terminates the setting change mode without performing a new operation to change the setting value. Since it is only necessary to shift the game machine to the normal game processing, workability can be improved.

Next, regarding the control in the case where a power-off occurs after the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the setting change mode ends) by changing the set value in the setting change mode, This will be described with reference to FIG.

The order 1 to the order 4 are the same as the example shown in FIG. Next, as shown in order 5, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, so that the setting change mode ends. As a result, the set value “2” after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is performed is determined as the final set value. At this time, “2” is stored as the set value in the set value storage area, and “3” obtained by adding 1 to the confirmed set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

After that, as shown in order 6, it is assumed that the power switch 21TM055 is turned off, and the power supply is stopped. In this power-off state, the setting value "2" stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is retained as it is.

Next, as shown in order 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to be controlled to the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, “2” is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. This set value “2” is the value that was finally stored in the set value storage area at the end of the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 8, with the start of the setting change mode, the setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and the read setting value is set to 1 "3", which is obtained by adding "," is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

As shown in FIGS. 9-12 (1) and (2), when the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode, and when the power supply is stopped after the control in the setting change mode is completed. In either case, when the power is restored, the set value after being changed according to the setting change operation in the previous setting change mode, that is, the set value stored in the set value storage area immediately before the power is cut off, , Valid setting values (setting values stored in the setting storage area when power is restored).

It is not limited to the storage control of the set values shown in FIGS. That is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is copied to the setting information temporary storage area when the setting change mode is controlled, and the setting change switch (clear switch) is set when the setting change mode is controlled. When the 21TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed without changing the setting value in the setting value storage area, and the operation for ending the setting change mode (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. The setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored in the setting value storage area (overwritten) to confirm the setting value based on the operation of switching from the state to the OFF state). May be. In this case, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the set value (0 to 5) stored in the setting information temporary storage area, and the setting information temporary storage area The set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 also changes in response to the change of the set value stored in.

With this configuration, even if the setting change mode is controlled when the power is turned on and the setting change operation is performed (when the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed), the setting is changed. When the power is cut off without completing the operation for ending the change mode (without switching the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state), the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is set to the power supply. It has not been changed since it was turned on (before the setting change operation was performed in the setting change mode). That is, in the power supply stopped state, the set value stored in the set value storage area at the previous power-on is still held. Therefore, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display section 21TM029A) when being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 at the previous power-on. It becomes a value according to the set value that was used.

In this way, it is possible to appropriately determine the set value when the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode. Further, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state where the setting change mode has not ended, the change of the set value can be restricted.

For the control related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode shown in the above embodiment, a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, and for a gaming machine having a different jackpot probability depending on the setting values. Although applicable, the present invention is not limited to this, and although a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, the jackpot probability is common regardless of the setting values (for example, for all of the setting values 0 to 5). It is also applicable to a gaming machine (the jackpot probability is 1/300).

In addition, the present invention disclosed in the following is disclosed in the characteristic part 21TM.

As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-500506 (paragraph 0102), there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board. Regarding the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when it is necessary to grasp the control state related to the setting on the external device side when changing the setting value or the like. However, even if the signal output technology of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-500506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, it is difficult for the external device side to grasp this. is there. The invention relating to means O1 to means O4 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately notifying a control state related to setting to the outside of the gaming machine.

The game machine of means O1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (6 steps of different set values 0 to 5 with different ranges for big hit determination random numbers) ,
Setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value,
Setting confirmation mode control means capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the setting value (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650),
Specific signal output means (a game control microcomputer 100 that outputs a security signal in step S21TM4560) that outputs a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start of control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. ,
And a setting means (a game control microcomputer 100 for setting the value of the security signal timer) for setting a value (value of the security signal timer) relating to the period during which the specific signal is output,
The setting means can set a common predetermined value when the setting change mode is controlled and when the setting confirmation mode is controlled (step S21TM4710 sets 1 second as the value of the security signal timer). ),
The specific signal output means outputs the specific signal at least until a period corresponding to the predetermined value elapses in response to the end of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (in the setting confirmation mode). Upon completion, the security signal is continuously output until one second has passed from the end of the setting confirmation mode, and at the end of the setting change mode, the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds have elapsed from the end of the setting change mode. Do)
It is characterized by
According to this, the state of the gaming machine related to the setting can be appropriately notified to the external device.

The game machine of means O2 is
A gaming machine of means O1,
Equipped with initialization means for initializing the game state (game control microcomputer 100 for executing RAM clear (step S21TM1410) based on the RAM clear flag being set in step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150),
The initialization means initializes the game state in accordance with the control of the setting change mode (when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode is controlled),
The setting means can set a specific value corresponding to a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value after setting the predetermined value (after setting 1 second as a value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710). (When the RAM clear is executed, 30 seconds can be set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465),
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal in response to the end of the control of the setting change mode until the period corresponding to the specific value elapses (from the end of the setting change mode with the end of the setting change mode The security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds have passed)
It is characterized by
According to this, the specific signal is output at least during the period corresponding to the predetermined value regardless of whether the control in the setting change mode is ended or the control in the setting confirmation mode is ended. When the mode is controlled, the specific signal is output for a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. Therefore, the setting process by the setting unit is made common and different output is made in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to set the period.

The game machine of means O3 is
A gaming machine of means O1 or means O2,
In the setting change mode, when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (detection that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680) In the specific information storage means (in the backup area of the RAM 102) for storing the specific information (setting change flag), the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode ends. Based on that, the game control microcomputer 100) for clearing the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 is provided,
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored). In this case), the game is stopped and a specific signal is output (the processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off based on the condition for shifting to the setting change mode not being satisfied). Is possible.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped during the control of the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the external device when the power supply is restarted.

The game machine of means O4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means O1 to means O3,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (game control microcomputer 100 for executing game control timer interrupt processing),
And a production control means (CPU 120 for production control) for controlling execution of production,
The game control means,
Display means (display monitor 21TM029),
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing the processing of step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620),
In the setting change mode, power is not supplied to the gaming machine without performing a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (without detecting an operation of turning off the lock switch 21TM051 in step S21TM4680). Specific information storage means for storing specific information when stopped (in the backup area of the RAM 102, the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on step S21TM4720, the game control microcomputer 100) for clearing the setting change flag, and
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored). In this case, it is possible to execute an error notification on the display means and to send an error command to the effect control means (a set value abnormality error command is sent at step S21TM4190, and a display monitor is displayed at the error display at step S21TM4210). It is possible to display the letter "E" on 21TM029),
In response to the reception of the error command, the effect control means notifies the user of an operation for changing the set value (the image display device 5 is set to "return power on after power off to enter setting change mode". Please transfer it" message is displayed)
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to appropriately inform the store clerk of the game arcade about the state of the gaming machine and to prompt the operation for changing the set value.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the setting value. The invention according to means P1 to means P4 is made in view of the above situation, and a gaming machine that appropriately notifies the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set value. To provide.

The game machine of means P1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (6 steps of different set values 0 to 5 with different ranges for big hit determination random numbers) ,
Setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value,
Specific information storage means for storing specific information capable of specifying that the setting change mode has been controlled (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode ends. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) which clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the value of the setting change flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102),
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at power restoration). In this case), an error notification means capable of executing error notification (a game control microcomputer 100 for displaying an error in step S21TM4210 when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied) is further provided. ..
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified.

The game machine of means P2 is
A gaming machine of the means P1,
The setting change mode control means is such that the setting change condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting It is possible to control the setting change mode based on the changeover switch) 21TM052 being in the ON state),
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at power restoration). In this case, it is possible to control to the setting change mode without executing the error notification based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied (at the time of power-on, in step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, step S21TM4140). Based on the determination of YES, the process proceeds to the setting change mode without proceeding to the loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220).
It is characterized by
According to this, when the condition for controlling the setting change mode is satisfied, the setting change mode is controlled without executing the error notification, and unnecessary error notification is avoided and the set value is appropriately set. Can prompt change.

The game machine of means P3 is
A gaming machine having means P1 or means P2,
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored). In this case, it is possible to execute the error notification and put the game in a stopped state (when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied when the power is turned on (one of steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140). If NO is determined in step ), the process proceeds to the loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 without transitioning to the setting change mode).
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in the state where the set value is unstable, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

The game machine of means P4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means P1 to means P3,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (game control microcomputer 100 for executing game control timer interrupt processing),
And a production control means (CPU 120 for production control) for controlling execution of production,
The game control means,
Display means (display monitor 21TM029),
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing the processing of step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620),
And the specific information storage means,
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored). In this case, it is possible to execute the error notification on the display means and to send an error command to the effect control means (a setting value abnormality error command is sent at step S21TM4190, and is displayed in the error display at step S21TM4210). It is possible to display the letter "E" on the monitor 21TM029),
In response to the reception of the error command, the effect control means notifies the user of an operation for changing the set value (the image display device 5 is set to "return power on after power off to enter setting change mode". Please transfer it" message is displayed)
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to appropriately inform the store clerk of the game arcade about the state of the gaming machine and to prompt the operation for changing the set value.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In the gaming machine as described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to properly determine the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the setting value. The inventions relating to the means Q1 to the means Q5 have been made in view of the above situation, and provide a gaming machine that appropriately determines the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set value. To do.

The gaming machine of means Q1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (6 steps of different set values 0 to 5 with different ranges for big hit determination random numbers) ,
Setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value,
Specific information storage means for storing specific information capable of specifying that the setting change mode has been controlled (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode ends. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) which clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the value of the setting change flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102),
The setting change mode control means, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is started (setting change flag in step S21TM4030 at power restoration). When it is determined that it is set), control to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (Setting switch) Automatically controls the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting change mode that the 21TM052 is ON is satisfied.)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode accompanied by the initialization of the game state, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately determined.
It should be noted that the gaming machine of the means Q1 initializes the gaming state corresponding to the control of the setting change mode (for example, RAM is set based on the RAM clear flag being set in step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150). The game control microcomputer 100 for executing clear (step S21TM1410) may be further provided.

The gaming machine of means Q2 is
A gaming machine of means Q1,
The setting change mode control means is based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied when the specific information is not stored in the specific information storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is started. When the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting change flag is not set when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. Yes, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode ends because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state). If the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, the setting change condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied. Control to the setting change mode (when the setting change flag is set at power-on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied) It automatically controls to the setting change mode).
According to this, when the power is cut off during the control of the setting change mode, the setting information is stored in the setting change mode even when the setting change condition is not satisfied, because the specific information is stored when the power is restored. Since it is controlled, workability can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Q3 is
A gaming machine of means Q1 or means Q2,
The setting change mode control means, when the power supply to the game machine is started, the transition operation (when the power is turned on, the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the game machine frame 3 Is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (Clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, so the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends. Is executed), and the condition for transitioning to the setting change mode is satisfied), it is possible to control the setting change mode, and when the setting change mode is controlled. It is possible to terminate the setting change mode based on a specific operation (confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680),
The specific information storage means stores the specific information when being controlled to the setting change mode (sets a setting change flag at the timing of step S21TM4580 when control of the setting change mode is started), and performs the specific operation. Based on the above, the specific information is erased when the setting change mode ends (the setting change flag is cleared at the timing of step S21TM4720 when the control of the setting change mode ends),
The setting change mode control means, when power supply to the gaming machine is started, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, regardless of whether or not the shift operation is performed, When the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether or not the condition for changing to the setting change mode is satisfied, The setting change mode is automatically controlled), and the setting change mode is ended based on the specific operation (the setting change mode is ended based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). Let)
It is characterized by
According to this, the condition for ending the control of the setting change mode can be appropriately determined.

The game machine of means Q4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means Q1 to the means Q3,
A setting value storage means (setting value storage area of the RAM 102 for storing the setting values) for storing the setting values (six stages of setting values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination),
It is possible to execute a control (a big hit determination process in a special symbol process process, etc.) according to the set value stored in the set value storage means,
The set value stored in the set value storage means is changed based on the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in step S21TM4610). Change the setting value stored in the setting value storage area),
The setting change mode control means ends the setting change mode based on a specific operation when the setting change mode is controlled (in step S21TM4680, it is confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off). End the setting change mode based on
The set value storage means is changed by the change operation in the setting change mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation when controlled in the setting change mode. The set value after the setting is continuously stored (the set value storage area is formed in the backup area of the RAM 102, and when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode, the set value storage area is stored. Since the set value stored in is changed, the set value after being changed by the change operation is retained even if the power is cut off in the setting change mode.)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the power supply is restarted, the set value after being changed by the change operation in the setting change mode before the power failure occurs is stored in the set value storage means, and the set value corresponding to the set value is stored. Workability can be improved because control is executed.

The game machine of means Q5
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means Q1 to the means Q3,
A setting value storage means (setting value storage area of the RAM 102 for storing the setting values) for storing the setting values (six stages of setting values 0 to 5 with different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination),
It is possible to execute a control (a big hit determination process in a special symbol process process, etc.) according to the set value stored in the set value storage means,
The setting change mode control means stores the change operation when being controlled in the setting change mode and the setting value storage area when the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode. Change only the set value stored in the setting information temporary storage area, not the existing set value) and change the set value stored in the set value storage means based on the specific operation after the change operation. The setting change mode is ended (the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area at that time is stored in the setting value storage area based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in the setting change mode. To confirm it as a valid setting value and end the setting change mode),
The set value storage means performs the change operation in the setting change mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation when controlled in the setting change mode. The set value before being stored is stored (even if the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode, unless the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, the set value stored in the set value storage area itself is stored. Is not changed, so if the power is cut off in the setting change mode, the set value before being controlled in the setting change mode is retained.)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state where the setting change mode has not ended, the change of the set value can be limited.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 052IW)
Next, the characteristic part 052IW will be described. First, the game state in the characteristic unit 052IW will be described. First, the game state in the present characteristic unit 052IW has a normal state (low probability/non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) that is more likely to be a small hit than the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state, and in this characteristic part 052IW, the gaming state is a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state: normal state). In the case of being controlled, in the case of being controlled to the low probability and the first KT state (low probability/first KT state), and in the case of being controlled to the high probability and the first KT state (high probability/first KT state). In some cases, the probability is high and the second KT state is controlled (high probability/second KT state).

As will be described later, in the first KT state among the KT states, although a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is easily opened, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long, and the small hit. Even if occurs, there are very few cases where a game ball is won in the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about 100 balls per 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, it is controlled to a state in which a small hit is likely to occur, and is controlled to a high base state so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a long time. As will be described later, the second KT state among the KT states is such that the opening time of the upstream side variable winning ball device 6B is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is placed in the downstream special variable winning ball device 17. Easy to win. Specifically, in the second KT state, it is controlled to a state in which a small hit is likely to occur and is also controlled to a low base state to shorten the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B.

Further, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state). Specifically, in the characteristic portion 052IW, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state at the time of a normal drawing is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. And, while the proportion determined as a small hit when the first special symbol changes is low, the proportion determined as a small hit becomes high when the second special symbol changes (however, it will be described later. Therefore, the KT state is set to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, a small hit is frequently generated mainly by changing the second special symbol, which is a game state advantageous to the player.

It should be noted that the configuration for setting the KT state in the gaming state in which a small hit is more likely than in the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state is the same as in the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes. By configuring the variation time of the variation pattern to be selected in the KT state to be shorter than in the normal state, the KT state has a higher rate of variation times for a certain period of time than the normal state, and the KT state is in the normal state. It may be a game state in which a small hit is more likely to occur.

In addition, the feature portion 052IW is configured such that the time required for the game ball to reach the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passage gate 41 is 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation positions of the passage gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, and a group of nails forming a downflow path of the game ball. As will be described later in detail, in the characteristic portion 052IW, the variable winning ball device 6B can be controlled to be in an open state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. In the first KT state, which will be described later, the game ball passes. The time from the passage of the gate 41 until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passage gate 41. Since it is shorter than the required time of 0.6 seconds, when one gaming ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state. The game balls can be won as they are in the variable winning ball device 6B.

(Special variable winning ball device)
FIG. 10-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the special variable winning ball device 7 in the characteristic portion 052IW. As shown in FIG. 10-1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a plate-shaped bottom member 052IW108 formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game balls flow, and in the jackpot gaming state, the bottom member 052IW108 is provided. By moving the bottom member 052IW108 backward toward the rear from the closed state in which the forward movement is performed toward the front, the special winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the first count switch 23.

In this characteristic part 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-1, the game ball that has won the special winning opening is further guided to a guide path 052IW100 provided on the right side of the special variable winning ball device 7. The guide route 052IW100 is further branched into two routes 052IW102 and 103, and the game ball guided to the guide route 052IW100 is guided to the left route 052IW102 or the right route 052IW103. When guided to the left side route 052IW102, the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 and is detected by the V area switch 052IW106. When guided to the right path 052IW103, the game ball enters the discharge area 052IW105 and is detected by the discharge area switch 052IW107.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, a V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is provided near the entrance of the left path 052IW102, and when the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is in the open state, a game led to the guide path 052IW100. The sphere can enter the left path 052IW102 and enter the V area 052IW104. When the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is in the closed state, the game ball guided to the guide path 052IW100 enters the right path 052IW103 and is discharged from the discharge area 052IW105 to the back side of the game area.

The V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is controlled from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 052IW109 by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103).

Further, in the present feature section 052IW, when the big hit game is controlled, the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game and is detected by the V area switch 052IW106. Controlled to a probable state.

In addition, the total number of the game balls detected by the V area switch 052IW106 and the discharge area switch 052IW107 during one round is equal to the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. It should be. Therefore, the total number of the game balls detected by the V area switch 052IW106 and the discharge area switch 052IW107 during one round does not match the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. In this case, it may be configured to determine that there is a big winning opening winning/discharging mismatch error and notify the error. In this case, since it takes a certain amount of time for the game balls won immediately before the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed to reach the V area 052IW104 and the discharge area 052IW105, the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed. If the number of game balls does not match before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after that, it may be configured to determine that there is a big winning opening winning/discharging mismatch error.

(Configuration of control board)
FIG. 10-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like in the characteristic unit 052IW. In the present characteristic part 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-2, the switch circuit 110 includes a gate switch 21, a starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), a count switch (first counting switch). 23 and the second count switch 24)), the detection signals from the V area switch 052IW106 and the discharge area switch 052IW107 are fetched and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

Further, in the present characteristic part 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-2, the solenoid circuit 111 sends the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric auditors or the special winning opening door. In addition to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening, the signal is transmitted to the solenoid 052IW109 for the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101.

(Big hit probability, small hit probability)
10-3 and 10-4 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the big hit probability and the small hit probability for each set value. Of these, FIG. 10-3 shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Moreover, FIG. 10-4 has shown the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of a 2nd special symbol is performed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, the present example shows a case in which the setting can be changed in six stages of setting values “1” to “6”. Note that the setting is not limited to the case where the setting can be changed in 6 steps, and for example, the setting can be changed in 2 to 5 steps or the setting can be changed in 7 steps or more.

First, with reference to FIG. 10-3, the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 10-3(A), in the non-probability change state (low probability state), the setting value “1” is the lowest with the jackpot probability “205/65536”, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the set value “6” is the largest jackpot probability “247/65536”. High, it is the most advantageous setting for the player. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 10-3(B), in the probability variation state (high-probability state), the winning probability of the jackpot is 10 times larger than that in the non-probability variation state (low-probability state). When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is "2050/65536", which is the lowest, and is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the set value “6” is the highest jackpot probability “2470/65536”. High, it is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIGS. The small hit probability is constant as “6298/65536” regardless of whether it is a state) or a probability change state (high probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for the small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is also common to the non-probability variation state and the probability variation state. Even when the big hit probability is made different according to the set value, while the small hit probability is constant, as shown in FIGS. By making the setting values different from "1" to "6", the number of determination values for each setting value may be matched.

Next, with reference to FIG. 10-4, the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 10-4(A), in the non-probable variation state (low probability state), the setting value "1" is the lowest with the jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the set value “6” is the largest jackpot probability “247/65536”. High, it is the most advantageous setting for the player. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 10-4(B), in the probability variation state (high-probability state), the winning probability of the jackpot is 10 times larger than that in the non-probability variation state (low-probability state). When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is "2050/65536", which is the lowest, and is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the set value “6” is the highest jackpot probability “2470/65536”. High, it is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, with respect to the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 10-4(A) and (B), regardless of whether the setting value is “1” to “6”, the uncertain variation state (low probability The small hit probability is constant as “62986/65536” regardless of whether it is a state) or a probability variation state (high probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for the small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is also common to the non-probability variation state and the probability variation state. However, in the present example, in the case of the variable display of the second special symbol (see FIG. 10-4), in comparison with the case of performing the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 10-3), a small hit The winning probability is about 10 times (that is, the number of judgment values for the small hit determination when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. More than the number of judgment values for judgment). Even when the big hit probability is made different according to the set value, while the small hit probability is made constant, as shown in FIGS. By making the setting values different from "1" to "6", the number of determination values for each setting value may be matched.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, the determination value corresponding to the deviation is included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values “1” to “6” (FIG. 10). -3 and FIG. 10-4, there is no set value at which the outlier probability becomes 0). The determination value corresponding to the deviation is different according to the set value (depending on which of the set values "1" to "6" as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). , The outliers are different).

Note that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this example, and may be configured such that there is a case where the deviation probability is 0 (that is, a set value that does not include the determination value corresponding to the deviation). For example, at the setting value “6” having the highest advantage (the highest jackpot probability), the deviation probability becomes 0, and the determination value corresponding to the deviation may not be included.

Further, the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this example, and for example, there may be a case where the small hit probability is 0 (that is, a judgment value that does not include the judgment value corresponding to the small hit). For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed (FIG. 10-3), the small hit probability is uniformly set to 0, and the determination value for the small hit may not be included. Good.

In addition, in FIG. 10-3(A), (B) and FIG. 10-4(A), (B), the small hit probability is the same in the probability variation state (high probability state) and the non-determination variation state (low probability state). Although the probability of deviation is different, the probability of big hit in the probability change state (high-probability state) is higher than that in the non-probability change state (low-probability state). The probability of deviation may be reduced and the probability of deviation may be matched. Furthermore, even if the set values are different values of "1" and "2", respectively, the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be matched. As a result, in a gaming machine in which the number of steps that can be substantially set is less than six, or in a gaming machine in which there is no difference in advantage due to the setting change function, a type of gaming machine having a six-step setting change function and a hardware/software configuration The manufacturing cost can be reduced.

(Big hit type determination table)
FIGS. 10-5(A) and 10(B) are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the jackpot type is "2R normal jackpot", "2R certainty variation jackpot", "based on a random number for hit type determination. It is a table referred to in order to determine either "6R regular big hit", "6R certainty big hit", or "10R certainty big hit".

As shown in FIG. 10-5(A), in the characteristic part 052IW, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", when performing variable display of the first special symbol, The probability of 9% is determined as "10R probability variation jackpot", the probability of 56% is determined as "6R probability variation jackpot", and the probability of 35% is determined as "6R regular jackpot". Further, as shown in FIG. 10-5(B), in the characteristic portion 052IW, regardless of which of the setting values “1” to “6”, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Has a probability of 10%, is determined to be a “10R probability variation jackpot”, has a probability of 50% to be determined to be a “6R probability variation jackpot”, has a probability of 5% to be determined to be a “2R probability variation jackpot”, and has a probability of 35% to be determined “ 2R normal big hit” is decided.

"10R probability variation big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state of 16 rounds and is shifted to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. Further, the "6R probability variation big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state of 6 rounds and is shifted to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. Further, the "2R probability variable big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state of two rounds and is shifted to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state.

The "6R normal big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state for 6 rounds and is shifted to a low probability state after the end of the big hit game state. Further, the "2R normal big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state of two rounds and is controlled to a low probability state after the end of the big hit game state.

In this characteristic part 052IW, in the case of "10R certainty variation big hit", "6R certainty variation big hit", and "6R regular big hit", a predetermined period (30 seconds in this example) passes in each round of the big hit game. The special winning opening is controlled to be open until a certain number of game balls (10 in this example) are won, and it is possible to win a maximum of 10 big winning openings in each round. On the other hand, in the case of "2R probability variation big hit" and "2R normal big hit", the big winning opening is controlled to be open only for a short period (1.8 seconds in this example) in each round of the big hit game. The number of prizes that can be won in each round is about two to three.

Further, in this characteristic portion 052IW, when the big hit game is finished, it is controlled to any of the first KT state, the second KT state or the non-KT state according to the game state before the big hit game and the big hit type. How to change the game state after the big hit game will be described later (see FIG. 10-29).

(Small hit type judgment table)
10-6(A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The small hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit pattern, the small hit type is "small hit A", "small hit B" based on the random number for the small hit determination. , Or "Small hits C".

As shown in FIG. 10-6(A), in the characteristic part 052IW, regardless of whether the setting value is "1" to "6", when performing variable display of the first special symbol, With 100% probability, it is decided as "Small hit A". Further, as shown in FIG. 10-6(B), in the characteristic part 052IW, regardless of which of the setting values "1" to "6", the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Is determined to be a “small hit B” with a probability of 70%, and is determined to be a “small hit C” with a probability of 30%.

In this example, as will be described later, in the case of "small hit A", the special winning opening is opened for only a very short 0.2 seconds during the small hit game (see FIGS. 10-12), and the small hit game You can hardly expect to win a game ball to the special prize hole. Also, in the case of "small hit B", the special winning opening is opened for 0.8 seconds during the small hit game (see Fig. 10-13), and the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening during the small hit game. Can be expected to some extent. Also, in the case of "small hit C", the special winning opening is opened for 1.8 seconds during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-14), and the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening during the small hit game. Can be most expected.

(Variation pattern table)
FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9 are explanatory views showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol used in the characteristic part 052IW. The EXT shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9, nine types of first variation patterns #01 to #09 for the first special symbol and the decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the decorative symbol. 34 types of #01 to #34 are used. Hereinafter, for example, the variation pattern #n (n=01 to 09 or 01 to 34) means both the first variation pattern #n and the second variation pattern #n.

When performing the variable display of the first special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the first special symbol for non-KT time shown in FIG. 10-7(A) The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-7(A), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns #01 to #06.

When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, in the KT state (low probability/first KT state, high probability/first KT state, high probability/second KT state), in FIG. 10-7 (B) The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for KT shown is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-7(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns #07 to #09.

When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state), the variation pattern for the second special symbol for non-KT time shown in FIG. 10-8C. The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8(C), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns #01 to #03. Specifically, when it is determined to be off, the second variation pattern #01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Further, when it is determined that the small hit, the second variation pattern #02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. In addition, the second variation pattern #03 is determined even when it is determined to be a big hit, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain long period of 5 minutes.

In this characteristic part 052IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs even in the non-KT state, a situation can be expected in which a certain amount of prize balls can be expected due to the winning of the game ball into the special winning opening. Will end up. Therefore, in the characteristic part 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8(C), even if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, the variable time is extremely lengthened and the frequency of execution of the variable display is increased. On the contrary, the frequency of the small hits is reduced to prevent the situation where the small hits are aimed at to obtain a prize ball even in the non-KT state. In the characteristic part 052IW, the “frequency of occurrence of small hits” is, for example, the occurrence rate of small hits per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, small hits per unit time. Is higher than in the normal state.

In this characteristic part 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8(C), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, the variation time is obtained even in the case of a big hit. By making the length relatively long to 5 minutes, it is possible to prevent the act of unreasonably aiming at the prize ball due to winning in the special winning opening during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to take a long time to digest the first reserved memory as compared with the case of a small hit, so that the variation time is shorter than that in the case of a small hit. There is.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, when the low probability/first KT state, the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability/first KT state is ended. A variation pattern table is selected according to the number of variations since then. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is executed, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability/first KT and the first variation shown in FIG. 10-8D is selected and varied. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8(D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the low probability/first KT state, one of the second variation patterns #04 to #06. Is decided.

As shown in FIG. 10-8(D), when it is determined that there is a deviation as the first variation of the low probability/first KT state, the variation time is shortened to 5 seconds and the second variation pattern #04 of the shortened variation is set. It is determined. Further, when it is determined that the small hit is the first change of the low probability/first KT state, the second change pattern #05 (the second start winning opening is opened) is a relatively long change time of 7 seconds for the small hit. (Variation pattern for preparation). As described above, in the characteristic part 052IW, when the first KT state is controlled, although the frequency of small hits increases, the variable winning ball device 6B is actually opened to increase the opening time of the special winning ball. The special winning opening in the ball device 17 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in the state immediately after shifting to the low probability/first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball is immediately generated. If the device 17 is controlled to be in the open state, a considerable number of game balls may win the special winning opening. Therefore, in the characteristic portion 052IW, in the first variation of the first KT state, by securing a variation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 17 to the open state after a sufficient time has passed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member are allowed to enter the special winning opening, It prevents the situation where a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the 1KT state. In addition, when it is determined as a big hit as the first variation of the low probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #06 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for 2 minutes.

In the case of executing the variable display of 2 to 49 fluctuations after finishing the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit, which triggered the low probability/first KT state, in the case of executing the variable display of 2 to 49 fluctuations, FIG. The low probability/first KT time shown in E) and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the 2nd to 49th fluctuations are selected and the fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8(E), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2-49th variation of the low probability/first KT state, the second variation patterns #07 to #13 It is decided to either. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-8(E), when it is determined that the low probability/the second KT state of the 2nd to 49th variation of the first KT state is a deviation, the second variation pattern # of the shortened variation having a short variation time of 5 seconds # 07 or a second fluctuation pattern #08 of a shortened fluctuation in which the fluctuation time is shorter than 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the low-probability/first KT state is the second to 49th variation and the deviation, the second variation pattern #09 with reach may be determined. Further, when it is determined as the small hit as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations of the low probability/first KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds and the second fluctuation pattern #10 of the shortened fluctuation or the fluctuation time is as short as 1 second. The second variation pattern #11 of the shortened variation may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined as the small hit as the 2-49th variation of the low probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #12 with reach may be determined. The second fluctuation patterns #07 and #10 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when the second reserved memory is not stored, and the second fluctuation patterns #08 and #11 include one or more second reserved memories. This is a variation pattern that can be selected only when As a result, the storage capacity is quickly consumed and the operating rate is increased. When it is determined that the big hit is the 2-49th variation of the low probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #13 with reach is determined.

Also, after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability/first KT state, the fluctuation display of the 50th change (that is, the low probability/final change in the first KT state) is executed. If yes, the low probability/first KT time and the 50th variation second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-8(F) are selected, and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8(F), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed as the 50th variation of the low probability/first KT state, one of the second variation patterns #14 to #16. Is decided.

In the characteristic portion 052IW, when the low probability/first KT state is controlled, for example, a character display such as “during chance time” is displayed on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 10-8(F), when it is decided that the 50th variation of the low probability/first KT state is a deviation or a small hit, a character display such as "end of chance time!!" is displayed on the image display device 5. The second variation pattern #14 or the second variation pattern #15 accompanied by the end display for performing is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-8(F), when it is determined that the 50th variation of the low probability/first KT state is a big hit, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as “end of chance time!!”. The second variation pattern #16 with a predetermined revival display after the end display to be performed is determined.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-7, when it is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first variation pattern #07 with a variation time of 10 seconds is displayed. Is configured to determine. This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately in the change display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the change time of the big hit change of the first special symbol is set to a long change time, Since the variation of the second special symbol executed during the big hit variation of the first special symbol is configured to be a forced outfall, the forced outfall occurs frequently even though the second KT state and the player is a small hit. You will not be able to receive any profit from. Therefore, in this characteristic part 052IW, by changing the variation time of the big hit variation of the first special symbol to a short variation time, the big hit game state based on the variation of the first special symbol is frequently generated before the frequent forced deviation occurs. It is configured.

Unlike the characteristic part 052IW, even when the variation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot variation of the first special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol is not forced to fall off (for example, the first When the second special symbol is changing when the special symbol big hit symbol is stopped, the variation time of the first special symbol big hit in the KT state if it is a game machine of the second special symbol forced disengagement) May be a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately in the change display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the change time of the big hit is the same short change time as the deviation, the player You will not be able to receive any profit from the small hit. Therefore, if the variation time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the KT state is a long variation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, a sufficient time that at least a plurality of small hits can occur. (For example, 1 minute) is ensured.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / first KT state, the variation after the jackpot game based on the 6R certainty variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state The variation pattern table is selected according to the number of times. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is executed, the high probability/first KT time shown in FIG. 10-9(G) and the second special symbol variation pattern table for the first variation are selected and varied. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-9(G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the high probability/first KT state, one of the second variation patterns #17 to #21. Is decided.

As in the case of the first change in the low probability/first KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-9(G), the change time is also determined when the deviation is determined as the first change in the high probability/first KT state. The second variation pattern #17 with a shortened variation as short as 5 seconds may be determined. On the other hand, even when it is determined that the first variation of the high probability/first KT state is the deviation, the second variation pattern #18 with reach may be determined. Also, when the small hit is determined as the first variation of the high probability/first KT state, the variation pattern for the second starting winning opening opening preparation (second variation pattern #19) may be determined. On the other hand, even when the small hit is determined as the first variation of the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #20 with reach may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-9(G), when it is determined that the big variation is the first variation of the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #21 with reach is determined.

Further, if the variation display after the second variation is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R certainty variation jackpot that has triggered the high probability/first KT state, the variation shown in FIG. The probability/first KT time and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the second fluctuation and thereafter are selected and the fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-9(H), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second variation after the high probability/first KT state, any of the second variation patterns #22 to #28. Will be decided.

As shown in FIG. 10-9(H), as in the case of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations of the low probability/first KT state, when it is determined that there is a deviation after the second fluctuation of the high probability/first KT state, In some cases, the second variation pattern #22 with a shortened variation with a variation time of 5 seconds or the second variation pattern #23 with a shortened variation with a variation time of 1 second is shorter. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a deviation after the second variation of the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #24 with reach may be determined. Further, when it is determined that the small hit is the second variation of the high probability/first KT state and thereafter, the variation time is shortened to 5 seconds and the second variation pattern #25 of the variation or the variation time is shortened to 1 second. The second fluctuation pattern #26 of fluctuation may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined as the small hit after the second variation of the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #27 with reach may be determined. The second variation patterns #22 and #25 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second pending storage is not stored, and the second variation patterns #23 and #26 are one or more second pending storages stored. This is a variation pattern that can be selected only when As a result, the storage capacity is quickly consumed and the operating rate is increased. In addition, when it is determined that the big hit is the second variation after the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #28 with reach is determined.

When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, if the high probability / second KT state, the high probability / second KT variation pattern table for the second KT time shown in FIG. 10-9 (I) The variation pattern is selected and determined. As shown in FIG. 10-9(I), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/second KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns #29 to #34. ..

As shown in FIG. 10-9(I), when it is determined that there is a deviation in the high probability/second KT state, the variation time is determined to be the second variation pattern #29 with a short variation of 1.5 seconds. In some cases, the second fluctuation pattern #30 of normal fluctuation in which the fluctuation time is 5 seconds may be determined. On the other hand, when the high probability/second KT state is determined to be a deviation, the second variation pattern #31 with reach may be determined. In addition, when it is determined as a small hit in the high probability/second KT state, when the variation time is determined as the second variation pattern #32 with a short variation time of 1.5 seconds, or when the variation time is usually 5 seconds. The second fluctuation pattern #33 of fluctuation may be determined. In addition, when it is determined that the big hit in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #34 with reach is determined.

When determining the variation pattern, more specifically, depending on which variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is to be executed, the current game state, and the variable display result. Using the fluctuation pattern table, the lottery process is performed based on the random number for the fluctuation pattern determination, and the fluctuation pattern is determined. FIG. 10-10 is for determining the variation pattern when the variable display result is a small hit in the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for high probability/second KT time shown in FIG. 10-9(I). It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern table for small hits.

As shown in FIG. 10-10, in this characteristic part 052IW, when performing variable display of the second special symbol during the high probability/second KT state, when performing variable display that is a small hit, Regardless of which of the set values is "1" to "6", the second variation pattern #32 is determined with a probability of 70% and the second variation pattern #33 with a probability of 30%. Therefore, in this example, in the case of the second KT state, there is a high probability that the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation of 1.5 seconds will be selected.

In addition, in FIG. 10-10, as an example, the variation pattern table when executing the small hit variation of the second special symbol during the high probability/second KT state is shown, but in FIG. 10-7 to FIG. 10-9. The other variation pattern tables shown are similarly configured, and each variation pattern is determined with the same probability regardless of which of the set values is "1" to "6".

In the examples shown in FIGS. 10-8 to 10-10, the shortening fluctuation of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the case of the first KT state, and the shortening fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is high in the case of the second KT state. However, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a shortening fluctuation of 5 seconds or 1 second may be executed in the low probability state, and a shortening fluctuation of 1.5 seconds may be executed in the high probability state.

(Opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7)
Next, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 will be described. FIG. 10-11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7. First, using FIG. 10-11 (1), a special variable winning ball when being controlled in a jackpot game based on 10R certainty variation jackpot, 6R certainty variation jackpot, and 2R certainty variation jackpot (hereinafter also simply referred to as "determination variation jackpot") The opening pattern of the device 7 will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-11(1), when the first round of the big hit game is started, the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is in the open state. Controlled by. When the game ball wins while the special winning opening is open, it is detected by the first count switch 23.

In the big hit game based on the probability variation big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-11(1), when the winning of the second game ball to the special winning opening is detected in the first round, the solenoid 052IW109 is driven, and V The area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to an open state, and the game ball can enter the V area 052IW104. Then, in the first round, when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning holes are detected, as shown in FIG. When the variable winning a prize ball device 7 (the special winning opening) is controlled to the closed state again and the special winning opening is controlled to the closed state, the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is also controlled to the closed state.

When the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 and is detected by the V area switch 052IW106 within the predetermined detection effective period, the gaming state is controlled to the probable state after the jackpot game is over. As shown in FIG. 10-11(1), in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, the predetermined detection effective period is started at the timing when the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to be in the open state, and the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is It is a period until a predetermined period (500 ms in this example) elapses after the closed state is controlled again.

Next, using FIG. 10-11 (2), the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened when the big hit game is controlled based on the 6R normal big hit and the 2R normal big hit (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “normal big hit”). The pattern will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-11(2), when the first round of the big hit game is started, the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is driven, and the special variable winning prize ball device 7 (big winning opening) is in the open state. Controlled by. When the game ball wins while the special winning opening is open, it is detected by the first count switch 23.

In the big hit game based on the normal big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-11(2), when the winning of the first game ball to the special winning opening is detected in the first round, the solenoid 052IW109 is driven, and V The area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to be in an open state for an extremely short period (0.02 seconds in this example). Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning holes are detected in the first round, as shown in FIG. The variable winning a prize ball device 7 (the special winning opening) is controlled to the closed state again, and the special winning opening is controlled to the closed state.

As shown in FIG. 10-11(2), in the big hit game based on the normal big hit, a predetermined detection effective period is after an extremely short opening period (0.02 seconds in this example) of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101, It is a period until a predetermined period (500 ms in this example) elapses.

As shown in FIG. 10-11(1), in the big hit game based on the probability variation big hit, the opening period of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is long. Therefore, the game ball is likely to enter the V area 052IW104 during the predetermined detection effective period, and is likely to be controlled to a positive change state after the end of the big hit game. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-11(2), in the big hit game based on the normal big hit, the opening period of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is extremely short. Therefore, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the V area 052IW104 substantially during a predetermined detection effective period, and it is extremely rare that the game ball is controlled to be in the probable state after the big hit game. Therefore, in the present example, in the big hit game based on the probability variation big hit, the game balls enter the V area 052IW104 at a higher rate during the big hit game than in the big hit game based on the normal big hit.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be described. FIGS. 10-12 to 10-14 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state. Of these, FIGS. 10-12 show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of the small hit A. 10 to 13 show open patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit B. 10-14 show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit C. Further, FIGS. 10-12(1) to 10-14(1) respectively show open patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state, and FIG. 10-12(2). 10-14(2) respectively show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state.

First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12(1) to 10-14(1). As shown in FIGS. 10-12(1) to 10-14(1), when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 is normally displayed. The variable display of the symbols is executed, and when it is determined to be a normal symbol, the hit symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20, and when it is determined to be out, the offset symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20. To be done. In this characteristic part 052IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12(1) to 10-14(1), the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 0.2 seconds, and the symbol determination for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the off symbol is determined. The time is set to 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 10-12(1) to 10-14(1), after the symbol fixing time of 0.2 seconds elapses, the second starting winning opening is opened. After the pre-processing time of 0.1 seconds has passed, the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second start winning hole.

When the game ball is won in the second start winning port while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is determined to be a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. When the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, if the small hit is A, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds. In the case of small hit B, as shown in FIG. 10-13(1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and in the case of small hit C, FIG. As shown in -14(1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening (however, in the case of a small hit A. , Because the special variable winning ball device 17 opens only for an extremely short 0.2 seconds, almost no winning can be expected. However, in the first KT state, the opening time of the downstream special variable winning ball device 17 is as short as 0.2 seconds, 0.8 seconds or 1.8 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-12(1). On the other hand, the open time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare that a game ball is won at the special winning opening (for example, about 1 ball for every 100 variable displays).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIGS. 10-12(1) to 10-14(1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is completed, the next variable winning ball device 6B can be opened. After the lapse of at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the following variation time of the ordinary symbol of 0.2 seconds, symbol determination time of 0.2 seconds, and second starting winning opening opening pretreatment time of 0.1 seconds is there. Therefore, in the characteristic portion 052IW, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as the interval period after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 052IW, in the first KT state, after the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in an open state. Normally after 0.5 seconds which is the total of the variation time of the symbol 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time 0.2 seconds and the second starting winning opening opening pre-processing time 0.1 seconds, the game ball is The time required to reach the variable winning ball apparatus 6B after passing through the passage gate 41 is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. In this way, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in an open state in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, Normally, the variable winning ball device 6B is already opened because it is shorter than the time it takes for the gaming ball to reach the variable winning ball device 6B after the gaming ball passes through the passing gate 41 in a state where the symbols are not changed. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B while being controlled to the state. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbols are not changed are easy to win in the variable winning ball device 6B.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12(2) to 10-14(2). As shown in FIGS. 10-12(2) to 10-14(2), when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 is normally displayed. The variable display of the symbols is executed, and when it is determined to be a normal symbol, the hit symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20, and when it is determined to be out, the offset symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20. To be done. In this characteristic part 052IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12(2) to 10-14(2), the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 1.0 second, and the symbol determination for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the deviating symbol is determined. The time is set to 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 10-12(2) to 10-14(2), the second starting winning opening is opened after the symbol fixing time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed. After the pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds has passed, the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is opened for 0.2 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning port.

When the game ball is won in the second start winning port while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is determined to be a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, in the case of the small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-12 (2). In the case of small hit B, as shown in FIG. 10-13(2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and in the case of small hit C, FIG. As shown in -14(2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extremely short at 0.2 seconds. Further, in the characteristic part 052IW, in the second KT state, at least 3.8 seconds as an interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened (ordinary symbol variation time 1.0 seconds + symbol determination time 0). A relatively long period of 2 seconds + the time before the second start winning opening opening process is 2.6 seconds) is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIGS. 10-12(2) to 10-14(2), the open time of the upstream variable winning ball apparatus 6B is short and the interval period (closed period) is long. , Compared with the first KT state, the game ball easily enters the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. However, in the case of the small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 opens only for an extremely short 0.2 seconds, so that the winning of the game ball into the special winning opening can hardly be expected even in the second KT state.

In the second KT state, the game balls are likely to enter the special winning opening and the award balls are easily obtained. Therefore, in this example, it is also called "small hit RUSH". In the second KT state, "small hit RUSH" Characters such as “” are displayed.

In this example, the opening time of the special variable winning a prize ball device 17 (special winning opening) is made different depending on whether the small hit type is a small hit A to C, but such a mode I can't stop. For example, the number of times the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened may be varied depending on whether the small hit type is one of the small hits A to C. In this case, for example, in the case of the small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened only once during the small hit game, whereas in the case of the small hit B or the small hit C, during the small hit game. The special variable winning ball device 17 may be configured to be opened 2 to 11 times. Also, for example, even if the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is somewhat short, by opening the special variable winning ball device 17 for 0.4 seconds four times, the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) ) May be provided with a small hit type in which a game ball can be won to some extent, and various modes are conceivable. Further, in this example, the case where the small hit types are three kinds of small hits A to C is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, it is configured to provide four or more small hit types. Good.

Further, in the characteristic portion 052IW, in the second KT state, after the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in an open state. It is after the total of 3.8 seconds which is the total of the variation time of the normal symbol of 1.0 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds and the second starting winning opening opening pretreatment time of 2.6 seconds, and the game ball is The time required from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is about 0.6 seconds. In this way, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in an open state in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, Normally, the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state because it is longer than the time it takes for the gaming ball to reach the variable winning ball device 6B after the gaming ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbols are not changed. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B before being controlled to. Therefore, in the second KT state, the game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbols are not changed are difficult to win in the variable winning ball device 6B.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, the process of executing the variable display of the normal symbols and controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is a normal symbol process process by the game controlling microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103). This is performed by executing (see step S26). Further, the game control microcomputer 100, in the normal symbol process process of step S26, whether the game state is a probability change state (high probability state), whether in the non-KT state, the first KT state or the second KT state. Regardless of whether there is a big hit game state or not, it is determined with the same probability (for example, 10% or 100%) whether or not to be a normal hit.

In the characteristic part 052IW, in the first KT state and the second KT state, the variation time of the normal symbol and the symbol determination time are the same at 0.2 seconds each, and the second starting winning opening opening pre-processing time is the second. A case has been shown in which the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning a prize ball device 6B is made different by shortening it to 0.1 seconds in the 1KT state and lengthening it to 2.6 seconds in the second KT state. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be different by changing the variation time and the symbol determination time between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the second start winning opening opening processing time after closing the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be controllable, and if the second starting winning opening opening processing time is different between the first KT state and the second KT state. The variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to have a different closing period (interval period). In particular, if the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state is shortened by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress the winning of the special winning opening in the first KT state. ..

As will be described later, in the characteristic part 052IW, in the first KT state, by controlling the high base state by setting the high base flag indicating the high base state, the characteristics shown in FIGS. As shown in 10-14 (1), the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be opened for a long time. In the second KT state, the variable baseball apparatus 6B is opened by controlling the low base state without setting the high base flag, as shown in FIGS. 10-12(2) to 10-14(2). It is controlled to shorten the time.

It should be noted that, for example, a special flag (open extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, FIGS. 10-12(1) to 10- The variable winning ball device 6B as shown in FIG. 14(1) is controlled by the first opening pattern (long opening) that opens for a long time, and if the special flag is not set, FIG. 10-12(2) to FIG. 10-14. The variable winning ball device 6B shown in (2) may be configured to be controlled by a second opening pattern (short opening) that opens for a short time. That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and in other states including the big hit game state, the special flag may not be set.

Further, even in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be shortened when the low-probability/last variation display in the first KT state is executed. For example, in the shortened variation period of the special symbol of 50 times of the low probability/first KT state, the special flag may be erased in accordance with the 49th variation stop of the special symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the long open state of the variable winning ball device 6B when performing the left-handed notification after the low probability/first KT state ends. be able to.

As described above, in the case of configuring the variable winning ball device 6B using the opening control flag (special flag) of the variable winning ball device 6B, a flag for shortening fluctuation of the variable display of the special symbol is further used. The variable display of the special symbol may be controlled in this case, and in this case, the special flag and the flag for shortening variation may be separately managed and controlled.

Further, the variable winning ball device 6B may be short-circuited and opened during the low probability/non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the probability of opening the variable winning ball device 6B is high in the low probability/non-KT state (left hitting state), only a few game balls are fired and operated. Thus, it is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 6B from winning, and it is possible to prevent the right hitting operation from being performed during the low probability/non-KT state.

In the characteristic part 052IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 to 10-14, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, in the case where the variable display of the second special symbol having a relatively long variation time is executed in the first KT state, the variable winning ball is in a state in which the normal symbol is in a fluctuation stop and the normal symbol is not stored. This is because the device 6B is in a closed state, and it is possible to capture the target of the variation stop timing of the second special symbol (in the case of a small hit, if the variation time of the normal symbol is long, the passage gate) The variable winning ball device 6B does not open until the game ball that has passed through 41 reaches the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the winning of the special winning opening becomes possible). On the other hand, in this characteristic part 052IW, by shortening the variation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened before the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 6B. Since it is set to be started, it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the firing operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the variable display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

(Direction control command)
10-15 and 10-16 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIG. 10-15, commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H), 8011 (H) to 8032 (H) are decorations that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in correspondence with the variable display of special symbols. It is a production control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of a symbol. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H), the image display device 5 starts variable display of decorative symbols. Control.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (deletion designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is set to be off. Command 9002 (H) is a production control command (display result 2 designation command (10R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 10R probability variation big hit. .. Command 9003 (H) is a production control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 6R probability variation jackpot. .. Command 9004 (H) is a production control command (display result 4 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 6R normal jackpot. .. Command 9005 (H) is a production control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 2R probability variation big hit. .. Command 9006 (H) is a production control command (display result 6 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 2R normal jackpot. .. Command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this characteristic part 052IW, since the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the variation pattern command, the display control instruction command received by the production control CPU 120 immediately before the first variation pattern command is It is possible to determine that it is a display result designation command for the first special symbol, and the display result designation command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be a display result designation command for the second special symbol, so the display result Although the designation command can be used for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the display result designation command for the first special symbol and the display result designation command for the second special symbol may be different.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 does not send the display result designation command, but responds to each of the 10R probability variation big hit, 6R probability variation big hit, 6R normal big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, 2R normal big hit, small hit, and outlier. The variation pattern command may be defined, and the effect control CPU 120 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative pattern based on the received variation pattern command.

Command 9C00 (H) is a production control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) that specifies that the right-handed indicator 26 has finished lighting. The command 9C01(H) is a production control command (right-handed lighting start designation command) that specifies that the right-handed indicator 26 has started lighting.

Command A000 (H) is a production control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. Command A001 (H) is a production control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

Command A002 (H) is a production control command (first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify to forcibly stop the variable display of the first special symbol. Command A003 (H) is a production control command (second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify to forcibly stop the variable display of the second special symbol.

Command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is a production control command sent from the big hit game start to the big hit game end. Of these, B000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designating command) that designates the start of a big hit game. B001 (H) is a production control command (big hit end designation command: ending designation command) for designating the end of the big hit game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is a production control command (small hit end designation command) that specifies the end of the small hit game.

Command B1XX (H) is a production control command (a special winning opening open display command) that specifies the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX(H) is a production control command (display command after opening the special winning opening) that specifies display after the round during the big hit game (display of interval between rounds).

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening winning designation command) that specifies that the game ball has won in the special winning opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) that specifies that the game ball has won in the special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start winning award designation command) indicating that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start winning award designation command) indicating that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. It should be noted that a command indicating the first reserved memory number may be transmitted as the first valid start winning award designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved memory number may be transmitted as the second valid start winning award designation command. Then, the first effective start prize designation command and the second effective start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

Command C801 (H) is a production control command (gate passage designation command) that designates that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

Command D000 (H) is a production control command (first customer) that specifies that it is in the first customer waiting state (the state in which the first special symbol is not changed and the first reserved memory is not stored). Waiting demo display designation command). Command D001 (H) is a production control command (second customer) that specifies that it is in the second customer waiting state (the state in which the second special symbol is not changed and the second hold memory is not stored). Waiting demo display designation command). The first customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. Further, the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

The command E000(H) is a production control command (low probability/non-KT background designating command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the low probability/non-KT state. Command E001 (H) is a production control command (low probability/first KT background designating command) that designates background display when the gaming state is low probability/first KT state. Command E002 (H) is a production control command (high accuracy/first KT background designating command) that designates background display when the gaming state is high probability/first KT state. The command E003 (H) is a production control command (high-accuracy/second KT background designating command) that designates background display when the game state is high probability/second KT state.

Command E1XX (H) is a production control command (setting value command) that specifies the setting value that is currently set. The set value is set to "XX". For example, when the set value is set to "1", the command E101(H) is transmitted as the set value command. Further, for example, when the set value is set to “6”, the command E106(H) is transmitted as the set value command.

When the effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the effect control command described above from the game control microcomputer 100 installed on the main board 11, 10-15 and the display state of the image display device 5 are changed according to the contents shown in FIG. 10-16, and the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice control board 13. In addition, production control commands other than the production control commands shown in FIGS. 10-15 and 10-16 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. For example, a more detailed production control command regarding a big hit game and a production control command indicating a game state (for example, a production control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

(First special symbol normal processing)
10-17 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process process. The state where the first special symbol normal process is executed is a case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is the value indicating step S110A. The case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A is a state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed on the first special symbol display device 4A.

In the first special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103), first, the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal processing (step S120). It is confirmed whether or not (step 052IWS50A). The case where the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to small hit. It is a case where the value does not indicate the ending process (step S128), and it is neither during the big hit game (opening the special variable winning ball device 7 a predetermined number of times) nor during the small hit game (opening the special variable winning ball device 17). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step 052IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is confirmed. If the first number of reserved memories is 0, the first customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS52A).

If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number=1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, and the RAM 102. In the first random number buffer area (step 052IWS53A), decrement the value of the first reserved storage number by 1 (subtract the count value of the first reserved storage number counter by 1), and shift the contents of each storage area. (Step 052IWS54A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the first reserved storage number=n− Stored in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved storage numbers are always consistent with the order of the first reserved storage numbers=1, 2, 3, 4. It is like this. That is, in this example, the contents of the storage areas are shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so that the order in which the random number values are extracted can be specified. In this example, the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the first reserved storage number and the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The extraction order is also saved so that it can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 052IWS55A). In this example, the setting value command is transmitted every time the variable display is started by executing the processing of step 052IWS55A, but the setting change processing (processing for changing the setting value) is performed when the power is turned on. The set value command is also sent when is executed.

Note that the timing for transmitting the set value command is not limited to that shown in this example, and for example, the set value command may be configured to be transmitted at each end of the variable display, or the set value command may be transmitted during the variable display. It may be configured to do so.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS56A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag and the high base flag are off, the low probability/non-KT state determination command is determined, and the low probability/non-KT background designation command is issued, and the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on. In some cases, the low probability/first KT state is determined, and the low probability/first KT background designation command is set. When the certainty variation flag is on and the high base flag is on, it is high probability/first KT state. If the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off, the high probability/second KT background designating command is determined to be the high probability/second KT state, and the high probability/second KT background designating command is determined. Send.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the big hit of the second special symbol is changing (step 052IWS57A). Specifically, when the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is based on the variable display of the second special symbol is set, it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is changing. When it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is fluctuating, the processing proceeds to step 052IWS69A without performing the processing after step 052IWS58A. As a result, when the variation of the first special symbol is started during the variation of the big hit of the second special symbol, it is forcibly deviated regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above. For example, in step 052IWS57A, when the big hit of the second special symbol is fluctuating, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of sync with the random number for hit determination is performed, and by shifting to step 052IWS59A, the start winning is achieved. It may be forcibly disregarded regardless of which random number for hit determination has been acquired.

Further, for example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is changing in step 052IWS57A, a random number value (fixed value) that is a deviation is set as the hit determination random number without performing the processing in steps 052IWS58A to S63A, and the small value is set. By making the hit determination, the hit determination may be forcibly disregarded regardless of which random number for the hit determination was obtained at the time of winning the start prize.

When the big hit of the second special symbol is not changing, the game controlling microcomputer 100 reads the hit judging random number from the first random number storing buffer (step 052IWS58A), and executes the big hit judging module (step 052IWS59A). The big hit determination module is a program that decides to make a big hit if the random number for hit determination coincides with a predetermined big hit determination value. When it is determined to be a big hit (step 052IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the variable display of the first special symbol (step 052IWS61A). .. Then, based on the hit type determination random number, it is determined whether the big hit type is a 10R certainty big hit, a 6R certainty big hit, or a 6R normal big hit (step 052IWS62A), and the big hit type is stored (step 052IWS63A), step 052IWS69A. Move to.

If the big hit is not made in step 052IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 052IWS64A). The small hitting determination module is a program that decides to make a small hit if the random number for hitting determination (may be a random number for small hitting determination) matches a predetermined small hitting determination value. When it is determined to be a small hit (step 052IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first small hit flag indicating that the small hit will be made based on the variable display of the first special symbol ( Step 052IWS66A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the random number for judging the hit type (step 052IWS67A), and stores the small hit type (step 052IWS68A). In this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined to be small hit A (see FIG. 10-6(A)). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS69A.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state is "0" (step 052IWS69A), and if it is "0", step 052IWS75A. Move to. If the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, if it is in the low probability/first KT state, the gaming control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step 052IWS70A), It is determined whether or not it has become "0" (step 052IWS71A). When the value of the high base number counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 052IWS75A. When the value of the high base number counter becomes “0”, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step 052IWS72A), and shortens the variable display of the special symbol. The special figure time saving flag indicating that control is in progress is reset (step 052IWS73A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is extended to the end of variation (step 052IWS74A). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS75A.

In this characteristic part 052IW, as will be described later, the high base flag is set and the number of executions of the variable display in the high base state is managed, because it is a low probability at the end of the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit. / This is a case where the display is controlled to a high base state (low probability/first KT state) and variable display is executed 50 times. In the case of the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), when the 50th variation display is started, it is determined as Y in steps 052IWS71A and S71B, and the high base flag is set in steps 052IWS72A and S72B. At the same time as being reset, the special figure time saving flag is also reset in steps 052IWS73A and S73B, and the low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is entered.

In addition, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is for continuing the right hitting state by continuing the right hitting notification, and the variation reduction common to the first KT state, although the high base state has ended as the gaming state. It is a flag for setting the state and making it a production background common to the first KT state.

In this example, by performing the processing of step 052IWS74A or the processing of step 052IWS74B described later, the high base state due to the start of variation of either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol. When the final variation (in this example, the 50th variation display) is started, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set and the variation shortened state is extended. In this case, when the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set, the variation display of the first special symbol or the variation display of the second special symbol (in this example, the 50th variation display) is ended. Or, in response to the start of the variable display of the other special symbol (in this example, the 51st variable display), the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is reset, and the extension of the variation reduction state is completed. Is desirable.

Then, in step 052IWS75A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step 052IWS75A). Although illustration is omitted, the symbol to be stopped is determined immediately before step 052IWS75A.

In addition, in step 052IWS59A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probability variation big hit determination table or the probability variation big hit determination table in consideration of the game state.

(First fluctuation pattern setting process)
10-18 is a flowchart showing a first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether or not the special symbol time saving flag indicating that the variation display of the special symbol is being shortened is set. It is confirmed (step 052IWS1700A). In this example, the special symbol time saving flag is set and the shortening control of the variable display of the special symbol is performed, which makes it advantageous to execute the variable display of the second special symbol (Fig. 10-7). (See FIGS. 10-9)) Since a small hit is likely to occur, the KT state is controlled. If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 is a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern, which is not shown in FIG. 10-7(A). The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for KT time is selected (step 052IWS1701A). If the special figure time saving flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100, as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern, KT shown in FIG. The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for time is selected (step 052IWS1702A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100, based on the variation pattern table determined in step 052IWS1701A, S1702A and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer, Which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 10-7 is to be determined (step 052IWS1703A). In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the variation pattern. Further, after determining the variation time, the variation pattern in which the determined variation time is set may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1704A).

In addition, when the variation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step 052IWS1703A, the gaming control microcomputer 100 sets variation time data indicating the determined variation time in the first variation time timer and the variation time. While starting the measurement of (step 052IWS1705A), the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is started (step 052IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step 052IWS1707A).

(First special symbol variation process) FIG. 10-19 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 052IWS1120A). The case where the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to small hit. It is a case where the value does not indicate the ending process (step S128), and it is neither during the big hit game (opening the special variable winning ball device 7 a predetermined number of times) nor during the small hit game (opening the special variable winning ball device 17). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not yet transmitted, and the big hit type. Based on the determination result, one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 3 designation command, display result 4 designation command, display result 7 designation command) is sent to the production control CPU 120. Control is performed to transmit the data (step 052IWS1121A).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first variation time timer (step 052IWS1122A), and when the first variation time timer times out (step 052IWS1123A), performs control to transmit the first symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 ( Step 052IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 052IWS1130A).

When the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS1125A). Whether or not the big hit symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process, It can be determined by checking whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is to be set on the basis of the variable display of the second special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS1126A). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process. , It can be determined by checking whether or not the second small hit flag that indicates a small hit is set on the basis of the variable display of the second special symbol. If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the process is ended as it is.

If the small-hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol that is being executed is a big hit (step 052IWS1127A). .. Whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit can be determined by, for example, checking whether or not the first big hit flag is set. If the variation display of the first special symbol that is being executed is not a big hit, the process is ended as it is.

If the variation display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether the big hit type is a 10R certainty variation big hit or a 6R certainty variation big hit (step 052IWS1128A). Whether or not it is the 10R certainty variation big hit or the 6R certainty variation big hit can be determined, for example, by checking the big hit type stored in step 052IWS63A. If it is the 10R probability variation big hit or the 6R probability variation big hit, the processing is ended as it is.

In the case where the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (Y in step 052IWS1125A), or when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 052IWS1126A), it is either 10R probability big hit or 6R probability variable big hit. Not accompanied (that is, 6R normal big hit) When the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed (Y in step 052IWS1127A, N in step 052IWS1128A), the CPU 103 causes the production control CPU 120 to the first compulsory symbol. Control to transmit the confirmation designation command is performed (step 052IWS1129A). In this case, if the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 052IWS1130A).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS1125A to S1129A, in this characteristic part 052IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit or while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, it is a small hit. If it is in the case of the normal big hit (in this example, 6R normal big hit) variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped, and the first special symbol And the second special symbol is designed to prevent a big hit and a small hit from occurring at the same time. In this case, on the production control CPU 120 side, when the variable display of the first special symbol is forced out, the variation of the decorative symbol is based on the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 052IWS1129A. As a display result, it is controlled so as to forcibly discontinue display of the symbol.

In this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the probability variation big hit (in this example, 10R probability variation big hit or 6R probability variation big hit) When the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the first special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see Y of step 052IWS1128A), but in this case, the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. Based on the small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step S126), and the small hit game is started. Therefore, after the next timer interruption, it is determined as N in step 052IWS1120A, the processing of steps 052IWS1121A to S1130A is skipped, and the first fluctuation time timer of step 052IWS1122A is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol which is a sure variation big hit is being executed, during the small hit game, the first variation time timer Is suspended and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is a small hit while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol that is out or a small hit is being displayed. In some cases, the first special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see N in step 052IWS1127A). Therefore, when the variable display of the second special symbol is a small hit, even when the variable display of the first special symbol that is a deviation or a small hit is being executed, the first variation during the small hit game. The update of the time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small hit game is finished, the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

(First special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-20 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol stop process. In the first special symbol stop process, first, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 052IWS2010A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that has been set (step 052IWS2011A). In addition, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 052IWS2012A) and also controls to send a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2013A).

In this example, the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) is provided on the right side of the game area. Therefore, when the game state is controlled to the KT state, the person who has made a right-handing operation. Is advantageous to the player, and the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on. Therefore, in this example, the right-handed indicator 26 is lit during the low probability/first KT state, but the processing of steps 052IWS69A to S74A and S69B to S74B is executed, so that the 50th variation display is displayed. The low-probability/first KT state is ended when starting, and the normal state (non-KT state) is entered, and at the same time, the processing of steps 052IWS2010A to S2013A and S2010B to S2013B is executed to end the 50th variation display. The right-handed indicator 26 is turned off at the time of performing.

Then, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS2014A). In this case, if the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 052IWS1129A of the first special symbol fluctuation processing, regardless of the determination result at the start of fluctuation, forced as the stop symbol of the first special symbol. The outlying design is displayed by derivation.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step 052IWS2015A). When the first big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the big hit start flag indicating that the big hit is started (step 052IWS2016A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first big hit flag (step 052IWS2017A).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 052IWS2018A) and also controls to send a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2019A). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027A.

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS2018A and S2019A, in the present example, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on when a big hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area in this example, it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the big hit game. And the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.

In the present example, after the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the big hit game is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, so the right hit is made at the timing when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41. The display 26 may be configured to start lighting.

When the first big hit flag is not set (N in step 052IWS2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether the first small hit flag is set (step 052IWS2020A). When the first small hit flag is set, control for transmitting a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 is performed (step 052IWS2021A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first small hit flag (step 052IWS2022A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pretreatment (step 052IWS2026A). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027A.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, so it is originally advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the small hit game. However, as already explained, when the small hit in the variable display of the first special symbol is only the small hit type is the small hit A, the prize of the game ball to the special winning opening can hardly be expected. Therefore, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the right-handed indicator 26 is not lit and the right-handed lighting start designation command is not transmitted.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step 052IWS2027A).

In addition, in this example, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed with the first special symbol, it is configured to be able to execute a right hitting notification that prompts the player to shoot a game ball to the right of the game area. There is. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed with the first special symbol, as a right hit notification, it is possible to execute a launch promotion alert that prompts the player to launch a game ball aiming at the passage gate 41. May be.

In addition, in the state where the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, the right-handing notification and the launch promotion information are not executed, and in that state, the right-handing notification and the launch promotion information when the game ball wins the first start winning opening. (In this case, because it is in the gate passage waiting state, even if the game ball wins the first starting winning opening, the variable display of the first special symbol is not immediately started, and the first reserved memory is stored) You may comprise.

On the contrary, when the passage of the game ball at the passage gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state), the degree of recognition is low (for example, sound output of small volume or small screen display). Thus, it may be configured to perform a left-hand hit notification that prompts the player to shoot a game ball to the left of the game area. On the other hand, in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state), when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening or the special winning opening is detected, a mode in which the degree of recognition is high (for example, a large volume sound output or The left-handed notification may be performed by a large screen display). With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the launch. In particular, with the above configuration, for the player who accidentally shoots the game ball to the right of the game area, while performing a slight left-handing notification while the recognition degree to the surroundings of the game machine is low. For a player who intentionally performs a right-handed operation, left-handed notification may be performed in a mode in which the degree of recognition of the surroundings of the gaming machine is high. With such a configuration, the player who intentionally performs the right-handing operation can be urged by the clerk of the game store to return to the left-handing operation.

Further, in the above case, the left-handed notification may be performed when the number of game balls detected at the passage gate 41, the second starting winning opening, and the special winning opening reaches a certain number. In addition, in the passage gate 41, when a game ball is detected a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), a left-hand hit notification is given, and the second start winning opening and the special winning opening are more than a predetermined number. Even if a small number of game balls (for example, one) or more are detected, left-handed notification may be performed.

Although the characteristic part 052IW displays a demo when a specific condition is satisfied, when the demo is displayed in a normal state, the passage gate 41, the second start winning opening or the special winning opening is displayed. When the winning of the game ball is detected, the execution of the demonstration display that has been executed may be ended and the left-handed notification may be performed.

(Second special symbol normal processing)
10-21 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol normal process in the second special symbol process process. The state in which the second special symbol normal process is executed is a case where the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal process. In addition, when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, there is a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is not performed in the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the second special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103), first, the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal processing (step S120). It is confirmed whether or not (step 052IWS50B). The case where the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to small hit. It is a case where the value does not indicate the ending process (step S128), and it is neither during the big hit game (opening the special variable winning ball device 7 a predetermined number of times) nor during the small hit game (opening the special variable winning ball device 17). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step 052IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is confirmed. If the number of second reserved memories is 0, a second customer waiting demonstration display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS52B).

If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM102, and the RAM102. In the second random number buffer area (step 052IWS53B), decrement the value of the second reserved storage number by 1 (subtract the count value of the second reserved storage number counter by 1), and shift the contents of each storage area. (Step 052IWS54B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the second reserved storage number=n−. Stored in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective second reserved storage numbers are extracted always matches the order of the second reserved storage numbers=1, 2, 3, 4. It is like this. That is, in this example, the contents of the storage areas are shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so that the order in which the random number values are extracted can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 052IWS55B). In this example, the setting value command is transmitted every time the variable display is started by executing the process of step 052IWS55B. However, the setting changing process (the process of changing the setting value) is performed when the power is turned on. The set value command is also sent when is executed.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS56B). Note that the specific method of transmitting the background designating command is the same as the processing shown in step 052IWS56A of the first special symbol normal processing.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the big hit of the first special symbol is changing (step 052IWS57B). Specifically, it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is changing when the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set based on the variable display of the first special symbol. When it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is fluctuating, the process proceeds to step 052IWS69B without performing the processing from step 052IWS58B. As a result, when the variation of the second special symbol is started during the variation of the big hit of the first special symbol, it is forcibly disengaged regardless of whether or not the big hit determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above. For example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step 052IWS57B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment as a random number for hitting determination is performed, and the process proceeds to step 052IWS59B, so that at the time of starting winning It may be forcibly deviated regardless of whether the random number for hit determination has been acquired.

In addition, for example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step 052IWS57B, without performing the processing of step 052IWS58B to S63B, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment for the hit determination random number is set and set to a small value. By making the hit determination, the hit determination may be forcibly disregarded regardless of which random number for the hit determination was obtained at the time of winning the start prize.

When the big hit of the first special symbol is not changing, the game controlling microcomputer 100 reads the hit judging random number from the second random number storage buffer (step 052IWS58B), and executes the big hit judging module (step 052IWS59B). The big hit determination module is a program that decides to make a big hit if the random number for hit determination coincides with a predetermined big hit determination value. When it is determined to be a big hit (step 052IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol (step 052IWS61B). .. Then, it is determined whether the big hit type is a 10R sure change big hit, a 6R sure change big hit, a 2R probability change big hit, or a 2R normal big hit based on the hit type determination random number (step 052IWS62B), and the big hit type is stored (step 052IWS63B). ), and proceeds to step 052IWS69B.

If the big hit is not made in step 052IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 052IWS64B). The small hitting determination module is a program that decides to make a small hit if the random number for hitting determination (may be a random number for small hitting determination) matches a predetermined small hitting determination value. When it is determined to be a small hit (step 052IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that a small hit will be made based on the variable display of the second special symbol ( Step 052IWS66B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 judges the small hit type based on the random number for judging the hit type (step 052IWS67B), and stores the small hit type (step 052IWS68B). In this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined to be the small hit B or the small hit C (see FIG. 10-6(B)). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS69B.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step 052IWS69B), and if it is "0", shifts to step 052IWS75B. When the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, when it is in the low probability/first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step 052IWS70B), It is determined whether or not it has become "0" (step 052IWS71B). When the value of the high base number counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 052IWS75B. When the value of the high base number counter becomes “0”, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step 052IWS72B), and shortens the variable display of the special symbol. The special figure time saving flag indicating that control is in progress is reset (step 052IWS73B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) (step 052IWS74B). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS75B.

Then, in step 052IWS75B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step 052IWS75B). Although illustration is omitted, the symbol to be stopped is determined just before step 052IWS75B.

In addition, in step 052IWS59B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probability variation big hit determination table or the probability variation big hit determination table in consideration of the game state.

The second variation pattern setting process is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) shown in FIGS. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 10-18, the second variation pattern process is explained by replacing “first” with “second”. However, in the second variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first performs the same process as in step 052IWS1700A and confirms whether the special figure time saving flag is set. If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 is a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern, which is not shown in FIG. The variation pattern table for the second special symbol for KT is selected. If the special figure time saving flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 changes depending on whether or not the probability variation flag and the high base flag are set, and the number of variations. As the variation pattern table for determining the pattern, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for any of the KTs shown in FIGS. 10-8(D) to 10-9(I) is selected. For example, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability/first KT state), if it is the first variation, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10-8(D). The second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-8(E) is selected for the 2nd to 49th variation, and the second variation shown in FIG. 10-8(F) is selected for the 50th variation. Select the variable pattern table for special symbols. Further, for example, if both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are on (high probability/first KT state), if it is the first variation, variation for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10-9(G). The pattern table is selected, and if it is the second variation or later, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10-9(H) is selected. Further, for example, if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off (high probability/second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-9(I) is selected.

(Second special symbol variation process)
10-22 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol variation process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 052IWS1120B). The case where the value of the accessory control process flag is the value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to small hit. It is a case where the value does not indicate the ending process (step S128), and it is neither during the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor during the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not yet transmitted, and the big hit type. Any of the display result specification commands (display result 1 specification command, display result 2 specification command, display result 3 specification command, display result 5 specification command, display result 6 specification command, display result 7 specification command) based on the determination result. Is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1121B).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second variable time timer (step 052IWS1122B), and when the second variable time timer times out (step 052IWS1123B), performs control to transmit the second symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 ( Step 052IWS1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 052IWS1130B).

When the second variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS1125B). Whether or not the big hit symbols are derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process, It can be determined by checking whether or not the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is to be set based on the variable display of the first special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS1126B). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process. , It can be determined by checking whether or not the first small hit flag that indicates a small hit is set on the basis of the variable display of the first special symbol. If the small-hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the process is ended as it is.

If the small-hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol that is being executed is a big-hit (step 052IWS1127B). .. Whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol that is being executed is a big hit can be determined by, for example, checking whether or not the second big hit flag is set. If the variable display of the second special symbol that is being executed is not a big hit, the process is ended as it is.

If the variation display of the second special symbol that is being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether the big hit type is a 10R certainty change big hit, a 6R certainty change big hit, or a 2R certainty change big hit (step 052IWS1128B). .. Whether it is the 10R certainty variation big hit, the 6R certainty variation big hit, or the 2R certainty variation big hit can be determined, for example, by checking the big hit type stored in step 052IWS63B. If it is the 10R certainty variation big hit, the 6R certainty variation big hit, or the 2R certainty variation big hit, the processing is finished as it is.

When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (Y in step 052IWS1125B), or when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 052IWS1126B), 10R certainty variation big hit, 6R certainty variation big hit, and When the variable display of the second special symbol that is neither a 2R certainty variation big hit (that is, a 2R normal big hit) is being executed (Y in step 052IWS1127B, N in step 052IWS1128B), the CPU 103 controls the effect control CPU 120. The control for transmitting the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is performed (step 052IWS1129B). In this case, if the second big hit flag and the second small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the second big hit flag and the second small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 052IWS1130B).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS1125B to S1129B, in this characteristic portion 052IW, when the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit or while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, it is a small hit. If it is normal big hit (in this example, 2R normal big hit) and the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped, and the first special symbol. And the second special symbol is designed to prevent a big hit and a small hit from occurring at the same time. In this case, on the CPU 120 side for effect control, when the variable display of the second special symbol is forced out, the variation of the decorative symbol is based on the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 052IWS1129B. As a display result, it is controlled so as to forcibly discontinue display of the symbol.

In this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the probability variation big hit (in this example, 10R probability variation big hit, 6R probability variation big hit, Or 2R certainty variation big hit) When the variation display of the second special symbol is being executed, the second special symbol variation process is ended as it is (see Y in step 052IWS1128B), but in this case, the first special symbol. Based on the fact that the variable display of the symbol is a small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step S126), and the small hit game is started. Therefore, after the next timer interruption, it is determined as N in step 052IWS1120B, the processing of steps 052IWS1121B to S1130B is skipped, and the second fluctuation time timer of step 052IWS1122B is not updated. Therefore, when the variable display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variable display of the second special symbol that is a sure change big hit is being executed, during the small hit game, the second variable time timer Is suspended and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to the value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted.

In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, in the variable display of the second special symbol that is out or a small hit. In some cases, the second special symbol variation process is ended as it is (see N in step 052IWS1127B). Therefore, in the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variable display of the second special symbol that is a deviation or a small hit is being executed, during the small hit game, the second variation The update of the time timer is interrupted, the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small hit game is finished, the update of the second variable time timer is restarted.

With the above configuration, the remaining second reserved memory can be consumed in the normal state after the end of the first KT state (after the end of the time saving state), and a big hit occurs at an unintended timing when the player is absent. Can be suppressed.

In addition, it is configured to provide a variable winning ball device for the first special symbol below the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning opening), and a winning ball device for the second special symbol on the right side of the game area ( In a gaming machine configured to be provided with a starting winning opening which is not a variable winning ball device) and which is configured to shift to a normal state via the time saving state of the first special symbol after the end of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) As described above, the configuration in which the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed may be applied. In this case, because the variation efficiency of the first special symbol is high, the frequency of small hits based on the variation display of the first special symbol is also high, but the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed accordingly. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the variable display of the second special symbol based on the second reserved memory in the normal state by increasing the frequency of playing, and further suppress the occurrence of a big hit at an unintended timing when the player is absent. You can

(Second special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-23 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol stop process. In the second special symbol stop process, first, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 052IWS2010B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that has been set (step 052IWS2011B). Further, the CPU 103 performs control for ending the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 052IWS2012B) and also controls for transmitting a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2013B).

Next, the CPU 103 causes the stop symbol of the second special symbol to be derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS2014B). In this case, if the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 052IWS1129B of the second special symbol variation processing, regardless of the determination result at the start of variation, it is forced as the stop symbol of the second special symbol. The outlying design is displayed by derivation.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second jackpot flag is set (step 052IWS2015B). When the second big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the big hit start flag (step 052IWS2016B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second big hit flag (step 052IWS2017B).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 052IWS2018B) and also controls to send a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2019B). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027B.

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS2018B and S2019B, in this example, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on when a big hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area in this example, it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the big hit game. And the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.

When the second big hit flag is not set (N in step 052IWS2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second small hit flag is set (step 052IWS2020B). When the second small hit flag is set, control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2021B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second small hit flag (step 052IWS2022B).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special drawing time saving flag is set (step 052IWS2023B). If the special drawing time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 052IWS2024B), and right with respect to the effect control CPU 120. The control for transmitting the striking and lighting start designation command is performed (step 052IWS2025B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step 052IWS2026B). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027B.

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS2024B and S2025B, in this example, when the small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol is a small hit, lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is started. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area in the present example, it is better for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the small hit game. Advantageously, the right-handed indicator 26 is illuminated.

However, in this example, even if the small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol, the right-handed indicator 26 should already be lit when in the KT state. Therefore, in this example, by performing the determination process of step 052IWS2023B, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol during the KT state, the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is started overlappingly. Also, the process of transmitting the right-handed lighting start designation command is not performed.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step 052IWS2027B).

(Normal processing for accessory control)
FIG. 10-24 is a flowchart showing the accessory control normal processing (step S120) in the accessory control process processing. In the accessory control normal process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the big hit start flag is set (step 052IWS2101). If the big hit start flag is not set, the process is terminated.

If the big hit start flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the big hit start flag (step 052IWS2102). Next, the CPU 103 sets a big winning opening pre-opening timer (step 052IWS2103), sets round 1 opening pattern data according to the big hit type (step 052IWS2104), and sets "1" to a round number counter indicating the number of big hits. Is set (step 052IWS2105).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the gate passage waiting process (step 052IWS2106).

(Gate passage waiting processing)
FIG. 10-25 is a flowchart showing a gate passage waiting process (step S121) in the accessory control process process. In the gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input (step 052IWS2501). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has not been input, the processing ends. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103 resets the probability variation flag, the high base flag, and the special drawing time saving flag if set, and clears the value of the high base number counter to 0 ( Step 052 IWS2502). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a big hit start designation command (step 052IWS2503), and sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the big hit opening preprocessing (step 052IWS2504).

In this characteristic part 052IW, by executing the gate passage waiting process, when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the second special symbol, the big hit game is not started immediately, but the passage gate 41 is played. It is configured to shift to the big hit game on condition that the ball passes and is detected by the gate switch 21.

(Processing during big hit opening)
FIG. 10-26 is a flowchart showing the big hit open process (step S123) in the accessory control process process. In the big hit opening process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the first count switch 23 is in the on state (step 052IWS2401). If the first count switch 23 is in the ON state, that is, if the game balls that have won the special winning opening are detected, the CPU 103 counts the number of game balls that have won in the special winning opening. The counter value is incremented by 1 (step 052IWS2402). Then, the CPU 103 controls to send a special winning opening winning designation command to the effect controlling CPU 120 (step 052IWS2403).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the V area switch 052IW106 is in the ON state (step 052IWS2404). If the V area switch 052IW106 is turned on, that is, if a game ball that has entered the V area 052IW104 is detected, the CPU 103 sets a V winning flag indicating that the game ball has entered the V area 052IW104. (Step 052IWS2405).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the winning number counter is 10 (step 052IWS2406). If the value of the winning number counter is 10, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2409. If the value of the winning number counter is not 10, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning opening (step 052IWS2407), and the opening time timer after subtraction has timed out. It is confirmed whether or not (step 052IWS2408). If the open time timer has not timed out, the process is terminated.

When the value of the winning number counter is 10 (Y in step 052IWS2406) or when the open time timer times out (Y in step 052IWS2408), the CPU 103 drives the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door. The game is stopped, and the special winning opening is controlled to be closed (step 052IWS2409). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a display command after opening the special winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2410). Further, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the round number counter (step 052IWS2411).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the big hit opening post-processing (step 052IWS2412).

(Big hit end processing)
FIG. 10-27 is a flowchart showing the big hit ending process (step S125) in the accessory control process process. In the big hit ending process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step 052IWS2200), and if the big hit end display timer is set, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 052IWS2202. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 corresponds to the display time corresponding to the time when the big hit end display timer is performing the big hit end display on the image display device 5 (big hit end display time). A value is set (step 052IWS2201), and the process ends.

In step 052IWS2202, the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 052IWS2202). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the big hit end display time has elapsed (step 052IWS2203). If not, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has passed (Y in step 052IWS2203), the CPU 103 checks whether or not the V winning flag is set (step 052IWS2204). If the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 clears the V winning flag (step 052IWS2205), sets the probability variation flag, and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step 052IWS2206).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of the jackpot that has ended this time is the 10R certainty variation jackpot or the 2R certainty variation jackpot (step 052IWS2207). Whether or not it is the 10R certainty variation big hit or the 2R certainty variation big hit can be determined by, for example, confirming the big hit type stored in step 052IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing or step 052IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If the 10R probability variation big hit or the 2R probability variation big hit, the CPU 103 sets the special figure time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 052IWS2208). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2215. In the case of 10R probability big hit or 2R probability big hit, the high base flag is not set, so if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability/low base state (high Probability/second KT state).

If neither the 10R certainty variation jackpot nor the 2R certainty variation jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of the jackpot finished this time is the 6R certainty variation jackpot (step 052IWS2209). Whether or not the 6R probability variation big hit can be determined, for example, by checking the big hit type stored in step 052IWS63A of the first special symbol normal process or step 052IWS63B of the second special symbol normal process. If the 6R probability variation big hit, the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 052IWS2210), and further sets the special figure time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 052IWS2211). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2215. Therefore, if the 6R probability variation big hit, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, it will be controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state).

In the case of a 6R probability variation big hit, only the high base flag is set and the high base number counter is not set. In this case, since the high base number counter is reset to 0 when the big hit game is started (see step 052IWS2502 of the gate passage waiting process), the value of the high base number counter remains 0. Therefore, after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot is controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and since the value of the high base number counter is 0 in the variable display thereafter, It is determined as Y in step 052IWS69A of the first special symbol normal process or step 052IWS69B of the second special symbol normal process, and the subtraction process of the high base number counter of step 052IWS70A or step 052IWS70B is not performed. Then, the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

If it is not the 6R probability variation big hit (that is, if it is the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag to shift to the high base state (step 052IWS2212), and sets the special time saving flag. And shifts to the KT state (step 052IWS2213). Further, the CPU 103 sets “50” in the high base number counter (step 052IWS2214). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2215. Therefore, in the case of 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit, it is controlled to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step 052IWS2215).

(Small hit end processing)
FIG. 10-28 is a flowchart showing a small hit ending process (step S128) in the accessory control process process. In the small hit ending process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step 052IWS2300), and when the small hit end display timer is set, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 052IWS2302. When the small hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 displays on the small hit end display timer a time corresponding to the time when the small hit end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time). A value corresponding to time is set (step 052IWS2301), and the process ends.

In step 052IWS2302, the value of the small hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 052IWS2302). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 052IWS2303). If not, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS2303), the CPU 103 checks whether or not the special drawing time saving flag is set (step 052IWS2304). If the special drawing time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the right-handed indicator 26 is on (step 052IWS2305). If the right-handed indicator 26 is lit, the CPU 103 controls to end the right-handed indicator 26 illuminating (step 052IWS2306), and at the same time, sends a right-handed illumination end designation command to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed (step 052IWS2307).

In this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit in the non-KT state, the right hit indicator 26 is started to be turned on at the start of the small hit game (steps 052 IWS2023B to S2025B). ), by executing the processing of steps 052IWS2304 to S2307, the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 ends at the end of the small hit game.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step 052IWS2308).

(Transition of game state)
Here, the transition of the game state in the characteristic part 052IW will be described. FIG. 10-29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how to transition a game state in this characteristic unit 052IW. First, in the characteristic portion 052IW, in a low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the player performs a shooting operation (left hit) of the game ball aiming at the left side of the game area. Therefore, in the normal state, mainly the starting winning to the first starting winning opening occurs, and mainly the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Also, since the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in a low probability/low base state, mainly a 10R certainty variation big hit, a 6R certainty variation big hit, or a 6R normal big hit occurs.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, if the 10R probability variation big hit occurs in the low probability/low base state, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability/after the big hit game ends. The state shifts to the low base state (high probability/second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW 104 during the big hit game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, when the 6R probability variation big hit occurs in the low probability/low base state, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability/high base state (high probability/high probability/ The high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2206 and S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW 104 during the big hit game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, when the 6R normal big hit occurs in the low probability/low base state, after the big hit game is over, the state shifts to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) and the next big hit occurs. The low-probability/high-base state is maintained until the variable display of 50 times is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

In the case where the player has transitioned to the KT state (high probability/high base state, low probability/high base state, high probability/low base state), the player aims at the right side of the game area in this feature 052IW. And perform a game ball firing operation (right hit). Therefore, in the KT state, mainly the starting winning to the second starting winning opening occurs, and mainly the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Further, since the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when the big hit occurs in the KT state, mainly 10R certainty big hit, 6R certainty big jackpot, 2R certainty big jackpot, or 2R normal big hit occurs.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R certainty variation jackpot or a 2R certainty variation jackpot occurs in a high-probability/high-base state (high-probability/first KT state), a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game. Then, after the jackpot game is over, the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) is entered, and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW 104 during the big hit game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, in the case of a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), if a 6R certainty variation big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability after the big hit game ends. /High base state (high probability/first KT state) is maintained, and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2206 and S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW 104 during the big hit game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of being a 6R certainty variation jackpot is 50% in total (see FIG. 10-5 ), so once a high probability/high In the base state, the high probability/high base state is looped at a rate of 50%. Also, when a 2R normal big hit occurs in a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), it shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) after the end of the big hit game. , The low probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the variable display of 50 times is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R certainty variation jackpot or a 2R certainty variation jackpot occurs in a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game. Then, after the jackpot game is over, the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) is entered, and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW 104 during the big hit game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, when the 6R probability variation big hit occurs in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability after the big hit game ends. /High base state (high probability/first KT state) is maintained, and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2206 and S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW 104 during the big hit game, the high probability state may not be controlled. Also, when a 2R normal big hit occurs in a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), it shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) after the jackpot game is over. , The low probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the variable display of 50 times is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214). In this characteristic part 052IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of being a 2R normal jackpot is 35% (see FIGS. 10-5(D) and (E)), Once the low probability/high base state is reached, the low probability/high base state is looped at a rate of 35%. After the 6R normal big hit and the 2R normal big hit occur and the low probability/high base state is reached, the next big hit does not occur and the variable display of 50 times is finished, the result is shown in FIG. As shown, a low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is entered (see steps 052IWS69A to S73A, S69B to S73B).

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R certainty variation jackpot or a 2R certainty variation jackpot occurs in a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), a game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game. Then, after the jackpot game is over, the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) is entered, and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW 104 during the big hit game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of being 10R certainty variation big hit or 2R certainty variation big hit is 15 % (See FIGS. 10-5(D) and (E)), once the high probability/low base state is reached, the high probability/low base state loops at a rate of 15%. In addition, when the 6R certainty variation big hit occurs in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability after the big hit game ends. /High base state (high probability/first KT state) is maintained, and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2206 and S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 052IW 104 during the big hit game, the high probability state may not be controlled. Also, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high-probability/low-base state (high-probability/second KT state), it shifts to a low-probability/high-base state (low-probability/first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the variable display of 50 times is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

In addition, in FIG. 10-29, the low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) describes the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, but the variation of the second special symbol at a low rate. It is possible that the display may be performed. In this case, when the 10R probability variation big hit or the 2R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) is entered. become. In addition, when the 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state will shift to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). Also, when a 2R normal big hit occurs, it shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and the low probability/high until the next big hit occurs or the 50 times of variable display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol at a low rate. May be performed. In this case, if the 10R probability variable big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state will shift to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). In addition, when the 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state will shift to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, when the 6R normal big hit occurs, it shifts to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and the low probability/high until the next big hit occurs or 50 times of variable display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol at a low rate. May be performed. In this case, if the 10R probability variable big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state will shift to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). In addition, when the 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state will shift to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, when the 6R normal big hit occurs, it shifts to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and the low probability/high until the next big hit occurs or 50 times of variable display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol at a low rate. May be performed. In this case, if the 10R probability variable big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state will shift to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). In addition, when the 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state will shift to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, when the 6R normal big hit occurs, it shifts to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and the low probability/high until the next big hit occurs or 50 times of variable display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

(Normal pattern process processing)
Next, the normal symbol process process (step S29) executed by the game control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 10-30 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol process process. In the normal symbol process processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) detects that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 and the gate switch 21 has been turned on (step 052IWS5111), The control for transmitting the gate passage designation command to the effect control CPU 120 is performed (step 052IWS5112). Then, the CPU 103 executes a gate switch passage process (step 052IWS5113).

In this characteristic part 052IW, when the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected by executing the processing of steps 052IWS5111-S5113, a gate passage designation command is transmitted. In addition, in this characteristic portion 052IW, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate and also plays a role of an operating area, but is it in a gate passage waiting state after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed and before the big hit game is started? The gate passage designation command is transmitted regardless of whether or not the command is passed.

Then, the CPU 103 executes any one of the processes shown in steps 052IWS5100 to S5104 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, regardless of whether it is in a gate passage waiting state or not, when the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected in step 052IWS5111, the gate switch passage processing of step 052IWS5113 is executed. Normally, variable display of symbols is executed, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, only when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 when not in the gate passage waiting state, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, and in the state of waiting for the gate passage even if the game ball passes the passage gate 41 The variable display may be configured not to be executed.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 052IW, the passage gate 41 is normally used as a combined use gate of the starting region and the operating region, but the special symbol process process (see steps S25A and S25B) is usually within the timer interrupt process. Since it is executed before the symbol process process (see step S26), after the detection process of the passage of the game ball of the passage gate 41 as the operation region is performed, the passage of the game ball of the passage gate 41 as the normal starting region is performed. Detection processing is performed. Therefore, the processing for starting the big hit game can be executed quickly.

Gate switch passage processing (step 052IWS5113): The CPU 103 causes the count value (gate passage memory number) of the gate passage memory counter (counter for counting the number of game balls passing through the passage gate 41) to be the maximum value (in this example, " 4”) has been reached. If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage memory counter is incremented by one. It should be noted that the LED of the universal figure reservation display 25C is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 103 performs a process of extracting the value of the random number for normal symbol determination and storing it in the storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of gate passage memories.

Normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100): CPU103 is a state in which the fluctuation of the normal symbol can be started (for example, if the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value indicating step 052IWS5100, specifically, the regular symbol) If the variable display of the normal symbol is not displayed on the display device 20, and the variable winning ball device 6B is not opened or closed based on the fact that the normal symbol display device 20 hits and displays the symbol), the gate passage memory is stored. Check the value of the number. Specifically, the count value of the gate passage memory number counter is confirmed. If the gate passing memory number is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not to make a stop symbol of a normal symbol a hit symbol). Then, the variable time of the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically "1") indicating the normal symbol variation process (step 052IWS5101).

Normal symbol variation process (step 052IWS5101): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out. If it has, the normal symbol process timer sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time, and starts the timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “2”) indicating the normal symbol stop process (step 052IWS5102).

Normal symbol stop process (step 052IWS5102): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, confirms whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if it is a deviating symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically "0") indicating the normal symbol normal process (step 052IWS5100). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the normal symbol process timer is set to the time before the normal electric accessory release, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “3”) indicating the normal electric auditors product opening preprocessing (step 052IWS5103).

Normal electric accessory release pre-processing (step 052IWS5103): CPU103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal electric auditors product operating time in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer To start opening the variable winning ball device 6B. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "4") indicating the normal electric auditors product operating process (step 052IWS5104).

Normal electric auditors product operation process (step 052IWS5104): The CPU 103 measures the normal symbol process timer, and when the normal symbol process timer times out, closes the variable winning ball device 6B. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal process (step 052IWS5100).

(Normal design normal processing)
FIG. 10-31 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol normal process (step 052IWS5100). In the normal symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gate passage memory number is 0 by confirming the count value of the gate passage memory number counter (step 052IWS5121). If the number of stored gate passages is 0 (Y in step 052IWS5121), the process ends. If the gate passing memory number is not 0 (N in step 052IWS5121), the CPU 103 reads the normal symbol per determination random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passing memory number=1 (step 052IWS5122). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the gate passage storage number counter by 1 and shifts the content of each storage area (step 052IWS5123). That is, the random number per ordinary symbol stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passage memory=n (n=2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passage memory=n-1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the normal symbol-per-judgment random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the number of gate passing memories is always the order of the number of gate passing memories=1, 2, 3, 4 and It is supposed to match.

Next, the CPU 103 uses a normal symbol determination table for determining whether or not to make a normal symbol, and performs a lottery process based on a random number (ordinary symbol per determination random number value) to determine whether or not to make a normal symbol. It is determined (step 052IWS5127). In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, in step 052IWS5127, the CPU 103 uniformly sets 99/100 regardless of whether the state is the probable variation state, the KT state, or the high base state. It is decided to be a normal symbol with probability.

In step 052IWS5127, if the read random number for normal symbol hit determination is within the hit range (if hit), the CPU 103 sets a hit symbol as a display result (step 052IWS5128), and proceeds to step 052IWS5130. Further, in step 052IWS5127, when the read random number per normal symbol for judgment is not within the hit range (when it is out), the CPU 103 sets the out symbol as the display result (step 052IWS5129), and proceeds to step 052IWS5130.

In step 052IWS5130, if the high base flag is set, the CPU 103 sets 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol process timer (Y in step 052IWS5130, S5131). If the high base flag is not set, that is, if it is the normal state or the second KT state, 1.0 second is set as the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol process timer (N in step 052IWS5130, S5132).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically, "1") indicating the normal symbol variation process (step 052IWS5101) (step 052IWS5133).

(Normal symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-32 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol stop processing (step 052IWS5102). In the normal symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step 052IWS3701). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 052IWS3702). Normally, if the symbol process timer has not timed out (step 052IWS3702, N), the process is terminated.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS3702), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (hit in step 052IWS5127). It is confirmed (whether or not it is determined) (step 052IWS3703). Whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol is set by, for example, setting a normal symbol hit determination flag when it is determined to be a hit in step 052IWS5127, and whether or not the flag is set is confirmed. You can

When it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not a hit symbol but a deviating symbol (N in step 052IWS3703), the CPU 103 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value indicating normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100) ( Specifically, it is updated to "0" (step 052IWS3708).

In step 052IWS3703, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (Y in step 052IWS3703), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 052IWS3704), and if it is set, That is, in the case of the first KT state, 0.1 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step 052IWS3706). Moreover, when the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 2.6 seconds is set to the normal symbol process timer as the time before the opening of the normal electric accessory (step 052IWS3705). ..

Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically “3”) corresponding to the normal electric auditors product opening preprocessing (step 052IWS5103) (step 052IWS3707).

(Ordinary electric accessory release pretreatment)
FIG. 10-33 is a flowchart showing the normal electric auditors product opening preprocessing (step 052IWS5103). In the normal electric accessory release pre-processing, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step 052IWS3801). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 052IWS3802). Normally, if the symbol process timer has not timed out (step 052IWS3802, N), the processing is ended as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the time before the opening of the normal electric auditors product has passed (Y in step 052IWS3802), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 052IWS3803). If it is set, that is, if it is in the first KT state, 5.5 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step 052IWS3805). Moreover, when the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory release time (step 052IWS3804).

As described above, in the characteristic part 052IW, the normal electric auditors product opening time is set to 5.5 seconds in the first KT state, and the normal electric auditors object opening time is set to 0.2 seconds in the normal state or the second KT state. By doing so, the first KT state is a state in which it is easier to make a start winning in the second start winning opening than in the normal state or the second KT state. Therefore, the first KT state is configured so that the game ball does not easily reach the special variable winning ball device 17 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 6B than the normal state or the second KT state.

The control method for facilitating the starting winning in the second starting winning opening when the gaming state is the first KT state is not limited to that shown by the characteristic portion 052IW. For example, in the case of the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened a large number of times as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state (for example, in the normal state or the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B). 6B may be set as the number of times of opening 6B, whereas in the first KT state, the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 6B may be set as 2). By doing so, in the case of the first KT state, by increasing the number of times of opening the variable winning ball device 6B, it is possible to facilitate the starting winning in the second starting winning opening.

Further, for example, in the case of the first KT state, as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state, the control for increasing the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B and the variable winning ball device 6B. May be executed in combination with a control for increasing the number of times of release of the.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B to the open state (step 052IWS3806). Specifically, the solenoid 81 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 6B.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, "4") corresponding to the normal electric auditors product operating process (step 052IWS5104) (step 052IWS3807).

(Command analysis process)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. 10-34 to 10-37 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis processing, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 052IWS611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the received command from the command reception buffer (step 052IWS612). When read, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 052IWS613). The reason why +2 is performed is that two bytes (one command) are read.

If the received effect control command is the set value command (step 052IWS614), the effect control CPU 0120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step). 052IWS615).

If the received effect control command is the variation pattern command (step 052IWS616), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 052IWS617). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 052IWS618).

If the received effect control command is the display result specification command (step 052IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 052IWS620). ).

If the received production control command is any symbol confirmation designation command (first symbol confirmation designation command, second symbol confirmation designation command, first forced symbol confirmation designation command, second forced symbol confirmation designation command) (step 052IWS621) ), the effect control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag according to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 052IWS622). For example, when the first symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation designation command is received, the second confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first compulsory confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the second forced confirmation command reception flag is set.

If the received production control command is the big hit start designation command (step 052IWS623), the production control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 052IWS624). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a big hit start designation command reception flag (step 052IWS625).

If the received effect control command is the big hit end designation command (step 052IWS626), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the display of the right hit display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 052IWS627). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a big hit end designation command reception flag (step 052IWS628).

In this example, the right hit display is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the big hit game by executing the processing of steps 052IWS624 and S627.

It should be noted that, for example, it may be configured to execute the set value suggesting effect that suggests the current set value by changing the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display that is displayed during the big hit game. For example, when right-handed display is started in step 052IWS624, normally, right-handed display of a white display color is started, whereas when it is decided to execute the set value suggestive effect, the set value is “1”. If the set value is “2”, the right-handed display of the blue display color is started at a relatively high rate. If the set value is “2”, the right-handed display of the green display color is started at a relatively high rate. When the set value is "3", the right-handed display of the yellow display color is started at a relatively high rate, and when the set value is "4", the right display of the orange display color is started at a relatively high rate. When the set value is "5", the hitting display is started, and when the set value is "5", the right hitting display of the red display color is started. When the set value is "6", the hitting display is started at a relatively high rate. The right-handed display of the rainbow display color may be started.

Further, for example, the right hit display is continuously executed even during the KT state after the big hit game is finished, and the display mode (for example, display color) of the right hit display is changed and set at the timing of the big hit game end. You may comprise so that value suggestion production may be performed.

Further, for example, when the variable display is completed 50 times in the low-probability/first KT state and the display shifts to the normal state (low-probability/low-base state), the left-handed display is started, and the left-handed display is performed. The display mode (for example, display color) of the display may be changed to execute the set value suggestion effect. In this way, when the control of the game state is switched in some form, the set value suggestion effect may be configured to be executable.

If the received effect control command is the small hit start designation command (step 052IWS629), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit start designation command reception flag (step 052IWS630).

If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step 052IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 sets a small hit end designation command reception flag (step 052IWS632).

If the received production control command is the big winning opening open display command (step 052IWS633), the production control CPU 120 counts the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening during the big hit game round. The value of the counter is reset (cleared to 0) (step 052IWS634). Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control sets a big winning opening opening flag that specifies that the big winning opening is being opened (that is, a round period during a big hit game) (step 052IWS635).

In this example, the processing of step 052IWS634 is executed, so that the value of the winning number counter is cleared to 0 at the timing of receiving the special winning opening opening display command (the timing of starting the round), which is extremely rare. Even when an over-winning is detected during the interval period after the end of the round period, the value is counted in the winning number counter.

If the received effect control command is a display command after opening the special winning opening (step 052IWS636), the CPU 120 for effect control sets a flag after opening the special winning opening that specifies the interval period after opening the special winning opening. (Step 052IWS637).

If the received production control command is a right-handed lighting start designation command (step 052IWS638), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start lighting the right-handed notification LED 37 (step 052IWS639).

If the received production control command is a right-handed lighting end designation command (step 052IWS640), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed notification LED 37 (step 052IWS641).

If the received production control command is a low-accuracy/non-KT background designating command (step 052IWS642), the production control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the low probability/non-KT state (for example, The display is controlled with a blue background image) (step 052IWS643). Further, the effect control CPU 120, if set, resets the first KT state flag indicating the first KT state (step 052IWS644). Also, the effect control CPU 120 counts the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning the special winning opening and the special winning opening during the big hit game and the high probability/second KT state. If the ball number counter is set, the value of the prize ball number counter is reset (cleared to 0) (step 052IWS645).

In this example, during the big hit game (excluding 2R certainty variation big hit and big hit game based on 2R normal big hit), the game ball is won in the big winning opening, or the special winning opening is played during the high probability/second KT state. The value of the prize ball number counter is cumulatively updated when a ball is won (see steps 052IWS660 and S667), but the game state is low probability by executing the processing of step 052IWS645/ The value of the prize ball number counter is cleared to 0 when the variable display is completed 50 times after the high base state (low probability/first KT state) and the low probability/low base state is entered.

If the received effect control command is the low-accuracy/first KT background designating command (step 052IWS646), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 to the low probability/background image corresponding to the first KT state (for example, The display is controlled with a green background image) (step 052IWS647). Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the first KT state flag (step 052IWS648), and if set, sets the high probability state flag indicating the high probability state and the second probability indicating the second KT state. The 2KT status flag is reset (step 052IWS649).

If the received production control command is the high-accuracy/first KT background designating command (step 052IWS650), the production control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 to the background image corresponding to the high probability/first KT state (for example, The display is controlled with a yellow background image) (step 052IWS651). Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the high-probability state flag and the first KT state flag (step 052IWS652), and resets the second KT state flag if set (step 052IWS653).

If the received production control command is the high-accuracy/second KT background designating command (step 052IWS654), the production control CPU 120 sets the background image on the image display device 5 to the high probability/background image corresponding to the second KT state (for example, The display is controlled with a red background image) (step 052IWS655). Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the high-probability state flag and the second KT state flag (step 052IWS656) and, if set, resets the first KT state flag (step 052IWS657).

If the received effect control command is a special winning opening winning award designation command (step 052IWS658), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is a big hit game based on 10R certainty jackpot, 6R certainty jackpot, or 6R normal jackpot. (Step 052IWS659). Whether or not the big hit game based on the 10R sure-change big hit, the 6R sure-change big hit, or the 6R normal big hit is being played, for example, when the value of the effect control process flag is the big hit medium effect processing (step S176) to the ending effect processing (step S177). ) Is displayed, and whether the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area is a display result 2 specification command to a display result 4 specification command It can be determined by

During the big hit game based on the 10R sure change big hit, the 6R sure change big hit, or the 6R normal big hit, the effect control CPU 120 adds 15 to the value of the prize ball number counter (step 052IWS660). Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates the prize ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition (step 052IWS661). The prize ball number display is a display of the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning in the special winning opening and the special winning opening during the big hit game and the high probability/second KT state.

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS 658 to S 661, in the present example, a prize ball is generated on the basis of the fact that the winning at the special winning opening occurs during the big hit game based on the 10R certainty jackpot, the 6R certainty jackpot, or the 6R regular jackpot. The value of the number counter and the prize ball number display are updated. On the other hand, even during the big hit game, if a winning in the special winning opening occurs during the big hit game based on the 2R probability variation big hit or the 2R normal big hit, the value of the prize ball number counter is not updated, and the prize ball The number display is not updated either.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes an over-winning suggestion effect process for determining and executing an over-winning suggestion effect (step 052IWS662). Note that the "over-winning suggestion effect" is an effect that is executed at a timing when an over-winning to the special winning opening occurs and suggests the currently set value.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize sphere number display suggestion effect process for determining and executing the prize sphere number indication suggestion effect (step 052IWS663). Note that the "award ball number indication suggestion effect" is a predetermined cumulative number of award balls paid out based on the fact that the player has won a special winning opening or a special winning opening during a big hit game or a high probability/second KT state. This is an effect that is executed at a timing when the number (456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, 2666) in this example is reached and suggests the currently set value.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize sphere number emphasis effect process for determining and executing the prize sphere number emphasis effect (step 052IWS664). The "award ball number emphasizing effect" is the cumulative number of award balls paid out based on the fact that the player has won the special winning opening or the special winning opening during the big hit game or the high probability/second KT state. (In this example, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000) is the effect to be highlighted.

If the received effect control command is the special winning award winning designation command (step 052IWS665), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS666). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, in the high probability/second KT state), the effect control CPU 120 adds 10 to the value of the prize ball number counter (step 052IWS667). Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates the award ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the award ball number counter after the addition (step 052IWS668).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS665 to S668, in the present example, the value of the prize ball number counter and the prize balls are determined based on the fact that a small hit occurs during the high probability/second KT state and a prize is won in the special winning opening. The number display is updated. On the other hand, even in the KT state, if a special prize is won during the high probability/first KT state or the low probability/first KT state, the value of the prize ball number counter is not updated, The prize ball count display is also not updated (however, the value of the prize ball count counter is not updated, and is not performed until the value of the prize ball count counter is reset).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a small hit prize suggestive effect process for determining and executing a small hit prize suggestive effect (step 052IWS669). The “small hit winning suggestion effect” is an effect that is executed at the timing when a small hit occurs in the high probability/second KT state and a special winning opening is won, and suggests the currently set setting value. ..

Next, the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step 052IWS663 and executes the award ball number display suggesting effect process (step 052IWS663). Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes prize ball number emphasis effect processing (step 052IWS664).

If the received effect control command is any other command, the effect control CPU 120 executes a process of storing the received effect control command or setting a flag according to the received effect control command (step 052IWS670). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS611.

(Suggestive production process when winning over)
FIG. 10-38 is a flowchart of the over-winning suggestion production process (step 052IWS662). In the over-winning time suggestion effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first adds 1 to the value of the prize number counter (step 052IWS301). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the value of the winning number counter after addition is 11 or more (step 052IWS302). If the value of the winning number counter is 11 or more (that is, if an over-winning to the special winning opening has occurred), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence and type of the over-winning suggested effect. Using the over-winning suggestion effect determination table, a lottery process is performed based on a random number to determine the presence and type of the over-winning suggestion effect (step 052IWS303).

FIG. 10-39 is an illustration of a specific example of the over-winning suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-39, in the over-winning suggestion effect determination table, there is no over-winning suggestion effect, over-winning suggestion effect A, over-winning suggestion effect B, over-winning suggestion effect C, and over-winning suggestion. A determination value is assigned to each of the suggestion effect D, the over-winning suggestion effect E, and the over-winning suggestion effect F.

As shown in FIG. 10-39, in this example, when a game ball is won in the special winning opening, a prize display (in this example, “+15” in the normal display color (white in this example)) is displayed on the image display device 5. Character display) is displayed, and the normal winning sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-39, when the “over prize winning suggestion effect A” is executed, the winning display is displayed in the blue display color on the image display device 5 and the speaker 8L is displayed. , 8R outputs a winning sound of a sound A different from the normal sound. Further, when the “over-winning suggestion effect B” is executed, the winning display is displayed in the green display color on the image display device 5 and the sound B different from the normal sound is won from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output. Further, when the “over prize winning suggestive effect C” is executed, the winning display is displayed in the image display device 5 in a yellow display color, and the sound C different from the normal sound is won from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output. When the “over-winning suggestion effect D” is executed, the winning display is displayed in the orange display color on the image display device 5 and the sound D different from the normal sound is won from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output. Further, when the “over-winning suggestion effect E” is executed, the winning display is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5 and the sound E different from the normal sound is won from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output. When the “over-winning suggestion effect F” is executed, the winning display is displayed in the rainbow display color on the image display device 5 and the sound F different from the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output.

As shown in FIG. 10-39, different determination values are assigned to the over-winning suggestion determination table depending on which of the set values “1” to “6” the current set value is. In step 052IWS303, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the stored contents of the setting value storage area (see step 052IWS615) and identifies the current setting value. Then, the presence or absence and the type of the over-winning suggestion effect are determined based on the determination value corresponding to the specified setting value.

As shown in FIG. 10-39, in the present example, when the set value is “1”, the rate at which execution of the over-winning suggestion effect A is determined is relatively high. Further, in the present example, when the set value is "2", the rate at which execution of the over-winning suggestion effect B is determined is relatively high. In addition, in the present example, when the set value is “3”, the rate at which execution of the over-winning suggestion effect C is determined is relatively high. In addition, in the present example, when the set value is "4", the rate at which the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect D is determined is relatively high. Further, in the present example, when the set value is "5", the rate at which execution of the over-winning suggestion effect E is determined is relatively high. In addition, in the present example, when the set value is “6”, the rate at which execution of the over-winning suggestion effect F is determined is relatively high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-39, in the present example, when the setting value is “1”, the proportion of determining the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect, which is the sum of the over-winning suggestion effects A to F, is: 10%+8%+7%+5%+5%+5%=40%, 45% when the setting value is “2”, 50% when the setting value is “3”, and the setting value When it is “4”, it is 55%, when it is the setting value “5”, it is 60%, and when it is the setting value “6”, it is 65%. As described above, in this example, the over-winning occurs relatively rarely, and therefore, the ratio of determining the execution of the over-winning suggesting effect is relatively high as compared with the small hit winning suggesting effect described later. There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect is decided in step 052IWS303 (step 052IWS304). If the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect has been determined, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to display a prize display according to the determined over-winning suggestion effect type on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS305). .. For example, when it is determined to execute the over-winning suggestion effect A, the image display device 5 controls to display the winning display in the blue display color. Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls the speakers 8L and 8R to output winning sounds according to the determined type of over-winning time suggestive effect (step 052IWS306). For example, when it is determined to execute the over-winning suggestion effect A, control is performed to output the winning sound of the sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, when the value of the winning number counter is 10 or less (N in step 052IWS302) or when it is determined that there is no over-winning suggestion effect (N in step 052IWS304), the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to operate. In, the control for displaying the winning display in the normal display color (white in this example) is performed (step 052IWS307). Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to output a winning sound of a normal sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 052IWS308).

(Small prize winning suggestion processing)
FIG. 10-40 is a flow chart showing a small hit award winning suggestion effect process (step 052IWS669). In the small hitting prize suggestive effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first performs a lottery process based on a random number using a small hitting prize suggestive effect determination table for determining the presence and type of the small hit prize suggestive effect. Then, the presence/absence and the kind of the small hit winning suggestion effect are determined (step 052IWS321).

FIG. 10-41 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the suggestion determination table upon winning the small hit prize. As shown in FIG. 10-41, in the small hit winning suggestive effect determination table, there is no small hit winning suggestive effect, small hit winning suggestive effect A, small hit winning suggestive effect B, small hit winning suggestive effect. A determination value is assigned to each of C, a small hit winning suggestion effect D, a small hit winning suggestion effect E, and a small hit winning suggestion effect F.

As shown in FIG. 10-41, in this example, when a game ball is won in the special winning opening, a prize display is displayed in the image display device 5 in a normal display color (white in this example) (“+10” in this example). Character display) is displayed, and the normal winning sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-41, when the “small hit winning suggestion effect A” is executed, the winning display is displayed in the blue display color on the image display device 5 and the speaker is displayed. The winning sound of the sound A different from the normal sound is output from 8L and 8R. When the “small hit prize suggestion effect B” is executed, the prize display is displayed in the green display color on the image display device 5 and the sound B different from the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. Further, when the “small hit winning suggestion effect C” is executed, the winning display is displayed in a yellow display color on the image display device 5 and the sound C different from the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. When the “small hit prize suggestion effect D” is executed, the prize display is displayed in the orange display color on the image display device 5 and the sound D different from the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. Further, when the “small hit winning suggestion effect E” is executed, the winning display is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5 and the sound E different from the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. Further, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect F" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the rainbow display color on the image display device 5 and the sound F different from the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound of is output.

As shown in FIG. 10-41, different determination values are assigned to the small hit winning suggestion effect determination table depending on which of the set values “1” to “6” the current set value is. .. In step 052IWS321, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615) and specifies the current set value. Then, based on the determination value corresponding to the specified setting value, the presence or absence and the type of the small hit winning suggestion effect are determined.

As shown in FIG. 10-41, in the present example, when the setting value is “1”, the rate at which the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect A is determined is relatively high. In addition, in the present example, when the set value is "2", the proportion of the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect B being determined is relatively high. In addition, in the present example, when the set value is "3", the rate at which the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect C is determined is relatively high. In addition, in the present example, when the set value is "4", the percentage of the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect D determined is relatively high. Further, in the present example, when the setting value is "5", the proportion of the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect E determined is relatively high. Further, in the present example, when the set value is "6", the proportion of the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect F determined is relatively high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-41, in the present example, when the setting value is “1”, the proportion of determining the execution of the small hitting prize suggestive effect which is the sum of the small hit prize suggesting effects A to F Is 2%+1%+1%+1%=5%, 6% when the set value is “2”, 7% when the set value is “3”, and the set value is “4”. Is 8%, is 9% when the set value is “5”, and is 10% when the set value is “6”. As described above, in this example, as compared with the above-described over-winning time suggestive effect, the rate of determining the execution of the small hit winning time suggestive effect is relatively low.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect has been determined in step 052IWS321 (step 052IWS322). If the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect has been determined, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display a prize display according to the determined type of the small hit prize suggesting effect (step). 052IWS323). For example, when it is determined to execute the small hit winning suggestion effect A, the image display device 5 is controlled to display the winning display in a blue display color. Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls the speakers 8L and 8R to output the winning sound according to the determined type of the small hit winning suggestion effect (step 052IWS324). For example, if the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect A is decided, control is performed to output the winning sound of the sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no suggestion effect at the time of small hit winning (N in step 052IWS322), the effect control CPU 120 displays the prize display in the normal display color (white in this example) on the image display device 5. Control is performed (step 052IWS325). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to output the normal winning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 052IWS326).

The reliability of the set value suggestion may be different between when the over-winning suggestion effect is executed and when the small hit winning suggestion effect is executed. For example, the over-winning suggestion effect F can be executed with any of the setting values “1” to “6”, but is executed at a relatively high rate when the setting value is “6”, while the small hit. It may be configured to determine that the set value is “6” if the winning suggestion effect F is executed. On the other hand, on the contrary, for example, the small hit winning suggestion effect F can be executed with any of the set values "1" to "6", but is executed at a relatively high rate when the set value is "6". On the other hand, when the over-winning suggestion effect F is executed, the setting value “6” may be determined.

In this example, the over-winning suggestion effect and the small hit winning suggestion effect cause the display mode of the prize display (in this example, the display color) to be different from the normal one, and output a different winning sound from the normal one. Although the case is shown where it is executed according to an aspect, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, by making only one of the display mode (display color in this example) of the prize display and the winning sound different from the normal mode, the over-winning suggestion effect or the small hit winning suggestion effect is executed. It may be configured as follows. In addition, for example, by displaying the effect display at the timing of the occurrence of over-winning or the occurrence of winning in the special winning opening, or by changing the display color of the lamp or LED, suggestive effects at the time of over-winning and small hit prizes The time suggestion effect may be configured to be executed.

(Awards ball number indication suggestion processing)
FIG. 10-42 is a flowchart showing the prize sphere number display suggesting effect process (step 052IWS663). In the prize sphere number display suggesting effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the value of the prize sphere number counter reaches 456 first (step 052IWS341). In this example, if a game ball is won in the special winning opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15. Therefore, in step 052IWS341, the effect control is performed. If the value of the prize ball number counter is 465, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 456 first.

If the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 456 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current setting value is equal to or more than the setting value “4” (step 052IWS342). It should be noted that whether or not the current set value is equal to or larger than the set value “4” can be specifically determined by confirming the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is equal to or more than the set value “4”, the effect control CPU 120 uses the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion effect, and the lottery based on the random number. Processing is performed to determine the presence/absence of the prize ball number display suggestive effect A (step 052IWS343). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

FIG. 10-43 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the award ball display indication effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-43, in the present example, when the prize ball number display suggesting effect A is executed, a character display such as “456 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is It is suggested that the setting value is “4” or more. As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestive effect A is determined with a probability of 3%. In this example, since the prize sphere number display suggestive effect A is executed only when the set value is equal to or more than the set value “4”, if the prize sphere number suggestive effect A is executed, at least the set value “4” is set. It will be decided that it is above.

If the value of the prize ball counter does not reach 456 first (N in step 052IWS341), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter first reaches 555 ( Step 052IWS 344). In this example, if a game ball is won in the special winning opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15. Therefore, in step 052IWS344, the effect control is performed. If the value of the prize ball number counter is 555, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball number counter has reached 555 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 555 for the first time, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is equal to or more than the set value “5” (step 052IWS345). It should be noted that whether or not the current set value is equal to or larger than the set value “5” can be specifically determined by checking the storage content of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is greater than or equal to the set value “5”, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the award ball display indication effect determination table, and determines whether or not there is an award ball display indication effect B. Is determined (step 052IWS346). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggesting effect B is executed, a character display such as “555 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is It is suggested that the set value is “5” or more. As shown in FIG. 10-43, in the present example, the execution of the award ball number display suggestive effect B is determined with a probability of 2%. In the present example, the prize sphere number display suggestive effect B is executed only when the set value is equal to or more than the set value “5”, so if the prize sphere number display suggestive effect B is executed, at least the set value “5” is set. It will be decided that it is above.

If the value of the prize ball counter does not reach 555 first (N in step 052IWS344), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the value of the prize ball counter first reaches 666 ( Step 052IWS347). In this example, if a game ball is won in the special winning opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is incremented by 15. Therefore, in step 052IWS347, the effect control is performed. If the value of the prize ball counter is 675, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 666 first.

If the value of the award ball number counter reaches 666 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current setting value is the setting value “6” (step 052IWS348). Whether or not the current set value is the set value “6” can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is the set value “6”, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the award ball display indication effect determination table, and determines whether or not the award ball number indication effect C is present. It is determined (step 052IWS349). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggesting effect C is executed, a character display such as “666 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is It is suggested that the setting value is “6”. As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is determined with a probability of 1%. In this example, since the prize sphere number display suggestive effect C is executed only when the set value is the set value "6", if the prize sphere number indication suggestive effect C is executed, the set value is "6". It will be confirmed that there is.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 666 first (N in step 052IWS347), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter first reaches 2456 ( Step 052IWS350). In this example, 15 prize balls are obtained if a game ball is won in the special winning opening during the big hit game, and 10 prize balls if a game ball is won in the special winning opening during the high probability/second KT state. Since the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15 or 10, the effect control CPU 120 determines in step 052IWS350 if the prize ball number counter value is 2460 or 2465. It is determined that the value of the number counter reaches 2456 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2456 for the first time, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current setting value is the setting value “4” or more (step 052IWS351). It should be noted that whether or not the current set value is equal to or larger than the set value “4” can be specifically determined by confirming the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is greater than or equal to the set value “4”, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number by using the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table and determines whether or not the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is present. Is determined (step 052IWS352). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggesting effect D is executed, a character display such as “2456 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is It is suggested that the setting value is “4” or more. As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestive effect D is determined with a probability of 5%. In this example, since the prize sphere number display suggestive effect D is executed only when the set value is equal to or more than the set value “4”, if the prize sphere number suggestive effect D is executed, the set value “4” is set. It is confirmed that the above is done.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2456 first (N in step 052IWS350), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter first reaches 2555 ( Step 052IWS 353). In this example, 15 prize balls are obtained if a game ball is won in the special winning opening during the big hit game, and 10 prize balls if a game ball is won in the special winning opening during the high probability/second KT state. Is obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is incremented by 15 or 10, so in step 052IWS353, if the value of the prize ball counter is 2555 or 2560, the effect control CPU 120 determines if the prize ball is 2555 or 2560. It is determined that the value of the number counter reaches 2555 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter has reached 2555 for the first time, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is equal to or more than the set value “5” (step 052IWS354). It should be noted that whether or not the current set value is equal to or larger than the set value “5” can be specifically determined by checking the storage content of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is greater than or equal to the set value “5”, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number by using the prize ball number indication suggestion effect determination table and determines whether or not the prize ball number indication suggestion effect E exists. Is determined (step 052IWS355). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestive effect E is executed, a character display such as “2555 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is It is suggested that the set value is “5” or more. As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, the execution of the award ball number display suggestive effect E is determined with a probability of 3%. In this example, since the prize sphere number display suggestive effect E is executed only when the set value is equal to or more than the set value “5”, if the prize sphere number suggestive effect E is executed, the set value “5” is set. It is confirmed that the above is done.

If the value of the prize ball number counter does not reach 2555 first (N in step 052IWS353), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter first reaches 2666 ( Step 052IWS356). In this example, 15 prize balls are obtained if a game ball is won in the special winning opening during the big hit game, and 10 prize balls if a game ball is won in the special winning opening during the high probability/second KT state. Is obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15 or 10, so in step 052IWS356, if the value of the prize ball number counter is 2670 or 2675, the prize control CPU 120 It is determined that the value of the number counter reaches 2666 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2666 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is the set value “6” (step 052IWS357). Whether or not the current set value is the set value “6” can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "6", the effect control CPU 120 performs lottery processing based on a random number by using the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table and determines whether or not the prize ball number suggestion effect F is present. It is determined (step 052IWS358). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, when the award ball number display suggesting effect F is executed, a character display such as “2666 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is It is suggested that the setting value is “6”. As shown in FIG. 10-43, in this example, the execution of the award ball number display suggestive effect F is determined with a probability of 2%. In this example, since the prize sphere number display suggestive effect F is executed only when the set value is the set value “6”, if the prize sphere number indication suggestive effect F is executed, the set value is “6”. It will be confirmed that there is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it has been decided to execute the award number indication suggestion effect in steps 052IWS343, S346, S349, S352, S355, S358 (step 052IWS359). If the execution of the prize sphere number display suggesting effect has been decided, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to execute the decided type of prize sphere number indicating suggestion effect (step 052IWS360). For example, when it is determined to execute the award ball number display suggesting effect A, the image display device 5 is controlled to display a character display such as “456 OVER”.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-43, when viewing the prize ball number indication suggestive effects A to C executed during the big hit game, the period during the big hit game becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the execution probability of the award ball number indication suggestion effect decreases to 3%, 2%, and 1%, while the setting value “4” or more is determined, the setting value “5” or more is determined, and the setting value “ 6” Accuracy of confirmation and suggestion of set value is increasing. Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 10-43, when viewed in the prize ball number display suggestive effects D to F executed during the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH), the small hit RUSH is As the number of award balls increases and the number of award balls increases, the probability of executing the award ball number indication suggestion effect decreases to 5%, 3%, and 2%, while the set value "4" or more is confirmed and the set value is set. The accuracy of “5” or more confirmed and the set value “6” confirmed and the suggestion of the set value is increasing.

In addition to the aspect shown in this example, for example, as the period during a big hit game or the period during a small hit RUSH becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases, the probability of execution of the prize ball number indication suggestive effect becomes higher. It may be configured to go. Further, for example, as the period during the big hit game or the period during the small hit RUSH becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases, the accuracy of suggesting the set value may be lowered.

Further, in the present example, as shown in FIG. 10-43, the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to C executed during the period of the big hit game and the prize ball number display suggestion executed during the period of the small hit RUSH. Although the case where the execution probabilities of the prize sphere number display suggesting effect are different from the effects D to F is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and is configured to execute the prize sphere number suggesting effect with the same execution probability. May be.

(Awards ball number emphasis production process)
FIG. 10-44 is a flowchart showing the prize ball number enhancement effect process (step 052IWS664). In the prize ball number enhancement effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter reaches the threshold value for each 1000 (1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000 in the present example). Is confirmed (step 052IWS371). In this example, if a game ball is won in the special winning opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball number counter is incremented by 15. Therefore, in step 052IWS371, the effect control is performed. For example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 1000 or 1005, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 1000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 2000 or 2005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 2000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 3000 or 3005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 3000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 4000 or 4005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 4000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 5000 or 5005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 5000 first.

If the value of the prize ball number counter reaches the threshold value for each 1000, the effect control CPU 120 uses the prize ball number emphasis effect determination table for determining the presence or absence of the prize ball number emphasis effect, and uses the random number. A lottery process based on the above is performed to determine the presence or absence of the award ball number emphasis effect (step 052IWS372).

FIG. 10-45 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the award ball number emphasis effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-45, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 1000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect A is determined with a probability of 50%. When the award ball number enhancement effect A is executed, a character display such as “1000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect B is determined with a probability of 60%. When the prize ball number enhancement effect B is executed, a character display such as “2000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 3000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect C is determined with a probability of 70%. When the prize ball number enhancement effect C is executed, a character display such as “3000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, in the present example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 4000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect D is determined with a probability of 80%. When the prize ball number emphasis effect D is executed, a character display such as “4000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in the present example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 5000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect E is determined with a probability of 90%. When the prize ball number emphasis effect E is executed, a character display such as “5000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the award ball number emphasis effect is determined in step 052IWS372 (step 052IWS373). If the execution of the prize sphere emphasis effect has been determined, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to execute the determined type of prize sphere emphasis effect in the image display device 5 (step 052IWS374). For example, when it is determined to execute the prize ball number emphasizing effect A, the image display device 5 is controlled to display a character display such as “1000 OVER”.

In addition, in this example, the case where the award ball number emphasizing effect is configured to be executable when the number of award balls reaches 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, and 5000 has been described. It is not limited to the mode. For example, it is not always necessary to execute the prize ball number emphasizing effect in all of these cases, and the prize ball number emphasizing effect can be executed when the number of prize balls reaches 1000, 2000, and 3000. You may comprise. Further, for example, even when the number of prize balls reaches 6000 or 7,000, the prize ball number enhancing effect may be configured to be executable, and various modes are possible.

As shown in FIGS. 10-44 and 10-45, the award ball number emphasis effect is different from the award ball number display suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 10-42 and 10-43 and is unrelated to the current setting value. Is the effect that is decided and executed. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to such an aspect, and for example, by changing the display mode of the prize sphere number emphasis effect, the prize sphere number emphasis effect may be configured to be executable in a mode that suggests the current set value. For example, the present setting value may be suggested by displaying a character display such as "1000 OVER" or "2000 OVER" in a display color different from usual.

(Variable display start wait processing)
FIG. 10-46 is a flowchart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170). In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command is received (step 052IWS811). Whether or not the variation pattern command is received is determined by, for example, in the command analysis process (step S75), when the variation pattern command is received, a variation pattern command reception flag indicating that the variation pattern command is received is set. In step 052IWS811, whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set may be confirmed.

If the variation pattern command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS812). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is a non-KT state), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the variable display of the first special symbol. Is confirmed (step 052IWS813). Whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the first variation pattern #01 to #09. It can be determined by confirming that. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol is executed (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed), the process is ended as it is. When performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 052IWS815).

If the 1st KT state flag or the 2nd KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is the KT state), the CPU 120 for effect control confirms whether or not it is the time to execute the variable display of the second special symbol. (Step 052IWS814). Whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the second variation patterns #01 to #34. It can be determined by confirming that. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol is executed (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed), the process is ended as it is. When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the CPU 120 for effect control updates the value of the effect control process flag to the value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 052IWS815).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS812 to S815, in the characteristic portion 052IW, in the non-KT state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the image display device 5 in correspondence with the variable display of the first special symbol. Is executed, in the case of the KT state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. In other words, even when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is in the KT state, and even when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, it is in the non-KT state. , The variable display of the decorative pattern is not executed.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 10-47 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed (step 052IWS920). Whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is executed is, for example, the variation pattern command stored in the variation pattern command storage area specifies the first variation pattern #01 to #09. It can be determined by checking whether or not there is. When performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current variable display is a small hit (step 052IWS921). Whether or not the variable display this time is a small hit is confirmed by, for example, whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 7 designation command. It can be determined by If it is a small hit variation, the CPU 120 for effect control determines a non-reach outlier design as a stop design of the decorative design (step 052IWS922).

As described above, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the small hit occurs, there is only a small hit A and the game ball to the special winning opening during the small hit game. Can hardly be expected to win. Therefore, by executing the processing of steps 052IWS920 to S922, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, the non-reach miss symbol is forcibly displayed as a stop. This prevents players from having excessive expectations.

When performing a variable display of the second special symbol (N in step 052IWS920), or if it is not a small hit variation (N in step 052IWS921), the effect control CPU 120, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the variable display result. Is determined (step 052IWS923). In step 052IWS923, when the display result 1 designation command is received (when it is determined that the display result 1 is out), the effect control CPU 120 has only the left out design or the left and right decorative designs in which the left middle right design pattern is completely inconsistent. Matching reach is determined and the combination of symbols is determined. Further, when the display result 2 designation command is received (when it is determined to be the 10R probability variation big hit), the combination of the symbols arranged in the symbol "7" among the odd left symbols is determined. Further, when the display result 3 designation command is received (when it is determined to be the 6R probability variation big hit), the combination of the symbols arranged in the odd-numbered symbols other than “7” is determined for the left middle right decorative symbol. Further, when the display result 5 designation command is received (when it is determined to be the 2R probability variation big hit), the combination of symbols including the special symbol (the symbol "R" in this example) as the decorative symbol in the symbol is determined. .. Further, when the display result 4 designation command or the display result 6 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a 6R normal big hit or a 2R normal big hit), a combination of symbols in which the left middle right decorative pattern is arranged in an even number pattern To decide. Further, when the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a small hit), a combination of decorative designs of the small hit design (for example, “135”) is determined.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current variation display is out of order (step 052IWS924). Whether or not the variable display this time is out of order is determined by, for example, checking whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 1 designation command. Can be determined by. If it is not a deviation variation, the process directly proceeds to step 052IWS928. If it is a deviation variation (Y in step 052IWS924), the effect control CPU 120 executes the set value suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence and type of the set value suggestion effect suggesting the currently set setting value. (Step 052IWS925).

In step 052IWS925, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the setting value stored in the setting value storage area (see step 052IWS615). Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number by using a table corresponding to the specified setting value as a setting value suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence and type of the setting value suggestion effect, and the setting is performed. Determine the presence and type of value suggestion production.

FIG. 10-48 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example of the setting value suggestive effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-48, in the set value suggestion effect determination table, there is no set value suggestion effect, set value suggestion effect A, set value suggestion effect B, set value suggestion effect C, set value suggestion effect D, and set value. A determination value is assigned to each of the suggestive effect E and the set value suggestive effect F.

The set value suggestive effect A is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. In some cases, the execution rate is highest. Further, the set value suggestive effect B is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a green display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ", the execution rate is highest. Further, the set value suggestive effect C is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a yellow display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ", the execution rate is highest. In addition, the set value suggestive effect D is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in the orange display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ", the execution rate is highest. Further, the set value suggestive effect E is, for example, an effect executed in a mode of displaying a predetermined character image in a red display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ", the execution rate is highest. The set value suggestive effect F is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in the rainbow display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. When it is “6”, the execution ratio is highest.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS926). If the second KT state flag is not set (that is, it is not the second KT state), the process directly proceeds to step 052IWS928. If the second KT state flag is set (Y in step 052IWS926), that is, if it is the second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 suggests that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) will continue. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence and type of the continuation suggestion effect is executed (step 052IWS927).

FIG. 10-49 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-49, in the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table, determination is made for no small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, and small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B, respectively. A value has been assigned. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed in a mode of displaying a predetermined effect image in a blue display color on the image display device 5. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined effect image is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 10-49, in this example, when the setting value is "1", the small hitting RUSH continuation suggesting effect has the highest execution rate, and when the setting value is "2", the small hitting RUSH continuation suggesting effect is shown. The execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is next higher when the execution ratio is next higher and the setting value is "3", and the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is when the setting value is "4". Is the next highest and the setting value is "5", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest, and the setting value is "6", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest. It's getting low.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-49, the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggesting effect A is highest when the setting value is "1", and the small hitting RUSH continuation suggesting effect B is when the setting value is "6". Has the highest execution rate.

In this example, the jackpot probability is the lowest when the setting value is "1", and the jackpot probability is the highest when the setting value is "6". However, when the setting value is "2", the jackpot is not generated. Since the second KT state may end as a trigger, the setting value “1” is the setting state in which the second KT state is most likely to continue (high continuation expectation level) and the setting value “6”. In some cases, it can be said that the second KT state is the setting state in which it is most difficult to continue (the degree of continuation expectation is low). Therefore, in this example, when the setting value is "1", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggesting effect is the highest, and when the setting value is "6", the execution ratio of the small hitting RUSH continuation suggesting effect is the lowest. Therefore, by executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, it is possible to increase the expectation for the continuation of the second KT state (small hit RUSH).

As described above, the degree of continuation expectation of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) is the degree of expectation that the control period to the second KT state will be long without a big hit.

Further, in the present example, when the setting value is "1", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest, so that the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is particularly executed, It is possible to further increase the expectation that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) will continue.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the variation pattern of the decorative pattern to be used and the set value suggestion effect or the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect based on the change pattern indicated by the received change pattern command. For, a process table corresponding to the set value suggestion effect or the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is selected (step 052IWS928).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process timer set value of the process data 1 in the process table selected in step 052IWS928 to the process timer and starts the process timer (step 052IWS929). Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display device 5, various lamps, speakers 8L, 8R) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Is executed (step 052IWS930). For example, a control signal (display control execution data) is output to the VDP in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14 in order to perform lighting/extinguishing control of various lamps. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R.

When the execution of the set value suggestion effect is determined, the step 052IWS930 and the variable display during effect process (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the set value suggestion effect selected in step 052IWS928, so that the decoration is performed. The set value suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the symbols (during the deviation).

When it is determined to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, step 052IWS930 and the variable display during effect process (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect selected in step 052IWS928. As a result, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variation display of the decorative pattern (during the variation in the second KT state).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time in the decorative symbol variation time timer to start the decorative symbol variation time timer (step 052IWS931). Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to the variable display effect process (step S172) (step 052IWS932).

(Direction processing during variable display)
FIG. 10-50 is a flowchart showing the effect display processing during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process processing. In the variable display during effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first decrements the value of the process timer by 1 (step 052IWS8101) and decrements the value of the decorative symbol variation time timer by 1 (step 052IWS8102). When the process timer times out (step 052IWS8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step 052IWS8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data and the sound number data which are set next (step 052IWS8105).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS8106). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the non-KT state), the CPU 120 for effect control has received the first symbol confirmation designation command (for example, the first 1 confirmation command reception flag is set) (step 052IWS8107). If the first symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8110).

If the first symbol confirmation designation command is not received, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received (for example, whether or not the first forced confirmation command reception flag is set). Is confirmed (step 052IWS8108). If the first compulsory symbol confirmation designating command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 052IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with a falling symbol (step 052IWS8109). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8110).

If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set in Step 052IWS8106 (that is, if it is the KT state), the effect control CPU 120 has received the second symbol confirmation designation command (for example, the first 2) Confirmation command reception flag is set) (step 052IWS8111). If the second symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8114).

If the second symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, the effect control CPU 120 has received the second forced symbol confirmation designation command (for example, whether or not the second forced confirmation command reception flag has been set). Is confirmed (step 052IWS8112). If the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 052IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with a falling symbol (step 052IWS8113). And CPU120 for production control updates the value of the production control process flag to the value according to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 052IWS8114).

If the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is not received in step 052IWS8108, or if the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is not received in step 052IWS8112, the effect control CPU 120 is a decorative symbol variation time timer. Whether or not has timed out (step 052IWS8115). If the decorative symbol variation time timer has timed out, the effect control CPU 120 switches to process data for standby effect (step 052IWS8116). Then, CPU 120 for effect control restarts the process timer (step 052IWS8117).

In the present example, as already described, when the variable display of the second special symbol is a small hit, the variation display of the first special symbol that is a deviating or a small hit, a probability big hit is being executed. In, during the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Also, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit, if the variation display of the second special symbol that is a deviation or a small hit, the probability variation big hit is being executed, during the small hit game. The update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Without receiving any symbol confirmation designation command, the decorative symbol variation time timer has timed out in step 052IWS8115, which means that the update of the first variation time timer or the second variation time timer is interrupted, and the first This is a case where the variable display of the special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed. In this case, in this example, the processing of steps 052IWS8116 and S8117 is executed to switch to the standby effect, and then the update of the first variation time timer or the second variation time timer is restarted, and finally one special The standby effect is continued until the variable display of the symbols or the second special symbols is completed. The "standby effect" is, for example, an effect in which the left, right, and right decorative patterns on the image display device 5 are temporarily stopped in a swinging or slightly varying state.

Note that, for example, in the image display device 5, for example, when the variable display of the system small symbol or the fourth symbol is also executed, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the first special time is interrupted. When the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed, the variable display of these system small symbols and the fourth symbol is also continuously executed. Then, the update of the first variation time timer or the second variation time timer is restarted, and when the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finally stopped and displayed, these system small symbols and fourth symbols The variable display is also stopped.

(Waiting process for special maps)
FIG. 10-51 and FIG. 10-52 are flowcharts showing the special figure per wait process (step S173) in the effect control process process. In the special figure hit waiting process, the production control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set (step 052IWS9701). .. If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, it moves to step 052IWS9706. In this characteristic part 052IW, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step 052IWS9705. Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when executing the big hit mid effect. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the big hit symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the stage during the big hit has not yet been performed. Without executing, the process moves to step 052IWS9706.

If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set. (Step 052IWS9702). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, it moves to step 052IWS9717. In this characteristic part 052IW, when the small hitting design is displayed as the stop design of the decorative design, the stop design display flag 2 is set in step 052IWS9716. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when executing the effect during the small hit. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small hit symbol has been fixedly displayed but the effect during the small hit has not yet been executed, so the stop symbol of the decorative symbol of step 052IWS9703 is displayed. The process moves to step 052IWS9717 without executing the process.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 120 stops the stop symbol of the left middle right decorative symbol (stopping symbol, big hit symbol) in the stop display on the image display device 5. , Small hit symbol) is confirmed and displayed (step 052IWS9703). It should be noted that when the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command or the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received and the process of replacing with a deviation symbol is executed in steps 052IWS8109 and S8113, in step 052IWS9703, the effect control CPU 120, the deviation symbol The control to confirm is displayed.

When the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (Y in step 052IWS9704), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 052IWS9705).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the big hit start designation command has been received (step 052IWS9706). When the big hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 052IWS9707).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the prize number display is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS9708). If the number of prize balls is not being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the type of big hit that has occurred this time is a 10R certainty variation big hit, a 6R certainty variation big hit, or a 6R regular big hit (step 052IWS9709). Whether or not the jackpot type is the 10R certainty variation jackpot, the 6R certainty variation jackpot, or the 6R regular jackpot is determined by, for example, whether the received display result designation command is a display result 2 designation command to a display result 4 designation command. It can be determined by checking. If it is the 10R probability variation big hit, the 6R probability variation big hit, or the 6R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying the number of prize balls on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS9710).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS9708 to S9710, in the present example, the display of the number of prize balls is started when the jackpot game based on the 10R certainty jackpot, the 6R certainty jackpot, or the 6R normal jackpot is started. On the other hand, even if it is a big hit, when the big hit game based on the 2R certainty variation big hit or the 2R normal big hit is started, the display of the number of prize balls is not started.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the effect during the big hit (step 052IWS9711). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 052IWS9712), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), the control of the rendering device (the image display device 5 as the rendering component, various lamps as the rendering component, and the speakers 8L, 8R as the rendering component) is executed (step 052IWS9713).

After that, the CPU 120 for effect control updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the effect process during big hit (step S176) (step 052IWS9714).

If the big hit symbol is not fixedly displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (N of step 052IWS9704), if the small hit symbol is definitely displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (Y of step 052IWS9715), the CPU 120 for effect control stops. The symbol display flag 2 is set (step 052IWS9716).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received (step 052IWS9717). When the small hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step 052IWS9718).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the effect during the small hit (step 052IWS9719). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value to the process timer (step 052IWS9720), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), the control of the rendering device (the image display device 5 as the rendering component, various lamps as the rendering component, and the speakers 8L and 8R as the rendering component) is executed (step 052IWS9721).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hit (step S174) (step 052IWS9722).

When the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol are not displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (that is, when the deviant symbol is displayed) (N in step 052IWS9704, and N in step 052IWS9715), the CPU 120 for effect control, effect control The value of the process flag is updated to a value according to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 052IWS9723).

(Ending production process)
FIG. 10-53 is a flowchart showing the ending effect process (step S177) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step 052IWS951). The production period measurement timer is set based on the fact that all the rounds of the big hit game have been completed in the big hit midway production process (see step S176). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step 052IWS952).

When the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step 052IWS952), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 052IWS953), and the effect device (image display device 5 according to the content of the process data n). , Game effect lamp 9, speakers 8L, 8R, etc. are controlled (step 052IWS954). For example, an effect of displaying that the jackpot is over or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

And CPU120 for production control confirms whether the process timer has timed out (step 052IWS955), and if the process timer has timed out, it switches the process data (step 052IWS956). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step 052IWS957).

When the production period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step 052IWS952), the production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the big hit game to be finished this time is a big hit game based on the 6R certainty variation big hit or the 6R normal big hit (step). 052IWS958). Whether or not the 6R probability variation big hit or the 6R normal big hit is whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 3 designation command or the display result 4 designation command, for example. It can be determined by checking. If it is the 6R probability variation big hit or the 6R normal big hit, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the display of the number of prize balls displayed on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS959).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS958 to S959, in the present example, when executing the big hit game based on the 6R certainty variation big hit or the 6R normal big hit, the number of prize balls is displayed during the big hit game, and the big hit When the game is over, the prize ball number display is erased, and the prize ball number display is not displayed during the high probability/first KT state or low probability/first KT state after the big hit game is over.

Next, the production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the big hit game to be finished this time is a big hit game based on the 2R certainty variation big hit (step 052IWS960). Whether or not the 2R probability variation big hit can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 5 designation command. If it is the 2R probability variation big hit, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the award ball number display is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS961). If the prize ball number display is not being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start displaying the prize ball number display on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS962).

By executing the processing of steps 052IWS960 to S962, in the present example, when executing the big hit game based on the 2R certainty variation big hit, the prize ball number display is not displayed during the big hit game (however, In this example, if the number of prize balls is displayed before the 2R probability variation jackpot is displayed, the number of prize balls is continuously displayed, but the display is not updated), a high probability after the jackpot game is over. / During the second KT state, the prize ball number display is displayed.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 052IWS963).

(Direction example)
Next, a description will be given of a production mode of the production executed in the present characteristic part 052IW. First, the effect mode of the set value suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 10-54 is an explanatory diagram for describing an effect mode of the set value suggestion effect. In this example, the set value suggestion effect can be executed in the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of alignment. As shown in FIG. 10-54(A), when the variable display of the left-middle-right decorative design is being performed on the image display device 5, at the execution timing of the set value suggestive effect, FIG. ) To (B3), the set value suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-54 (B1) to (B3), the set value suggestion effect is executed in a mode in which the predetermined character images 052IW001, 052IW002, 052IW003 are displayed on the image display device 5. In this case, for example, when the set value suggestive effect A is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-54 (B1), the predetermined character image 052IW001 is displayed on the image display device 5 in a blue display color. Value suggestion production is executed. Further, for example, when the set value suggesting effect C is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-54 (B2), the set value is set in a mode in which the predetermined character image 052IW002 is displayed in the yellow display color on the image display device 5. Suggestive production is executed. Further, for example, when the set value suggestive effect E is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-54 (B3), the set value is set in a mode in which the predetermined character image 052IW003 is displayed in the red display color on the image display device 5. Suggestive production is executed.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 10-54, the case of executing the set value suggestive effect A, the set value suggestive effect C, and the set value suggestive effect E is shown, but for example, when the set value suggestive effect B is executed. Indicates a predetermined character image with a green display color, a predetermined character image with an orange display color when the set value suggestion effect D is executed, and a rainbow when the set value suggestion effect F is executed. A predetermined character image is displayed in the color display color.

In this example, which set value is currently set for the player depending on whether a character image of a different display color is displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of order and the set value suggestion effect is executed. Can be expected.

Next, an effect mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 10-55 is an explanatory diagram for describing a production mode of a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production. In this example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect can be executed in the variable display of the decorative pattern which is out of the second KT state (during the small hit RUSH).

In the present example, when in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-55(A), for example, a character display 052IW004 such as “small hit RUSH” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the second KT state is displayed. It is displayed so that it is in the middle. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-55(A), when the variable display of the left-middle-right decorative design is being performed on the image display device 5 during the second KT state, the execution timing of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-55 (B1) to (B3), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-55 (B1) and (B2), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed in a mode of displaying predetermined effect images 052IW005 and 052IW006 on the image display device 5. In this example, a case where a racing car image is displayed as the predetermined effect images 052IW005 and 052IW006 is shown. In this case, for example, when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (B1), the predetermined effect image 052IW005 is displayed in the image display device 5 in a blue display color. Thus, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (B2), the predetermined effect image 052IW005 is displayed on the image display device 5 in a red display color. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed.

In this example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion is executed by executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect or while the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern which is out of the second KT state. Depending on whether or not the effect is executed, the player can be expected to continue the second KT state (small hit RUSH).

Next, the display mode of the right-handed notification will be described. FIG. 10-56 is an explanatory diagram for describing the display mode of the right-handed notification. In this example, regardless of whether it is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol or a variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit, if it is a big hit game, As shown in FIG. 10-56(1), the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) (see steps 052IWS2018A and S2018B). Further, based on the reception of the right-handing lighting start designation command, the right-handling notification LED 37 is turned on by the effect control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 10-56(1) (steps 052IWS2019A, S2019B, S639). reference). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-56(1), the production control CPU 120 displays the right-handed display 052IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 (see step 052IWS624).

Further, in this example, when the small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, during the small hit game, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (2), the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically The right-handed indicator 26 is turned on by the CPU 103) (see step 052IWS2024B). Further, based on the reception of the right-handing lighting start designation command, as shown in FIG. 10-56(2), the right-handling notification LED 37 is turned on by the production control CPU 120 (see steps 052IWS2025B and S639). .. However, unlike during the big hit game, as shown in FIG. 10-56(2), the right-handed display 052IW007 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

On the other hand, in the present example, when the small hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (3), during the small hit game, the right-handed indicator 26 is lit and right. The hitting notification LED 37 is not turned on, and the right hitting display 052IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not displayed.

Next, description will be made regarding the effect modes of the over-winning suggestion effect, the small hit winning suggestion effect, and the award ball number display suggesting effect. FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the effect modes of the over-winning suggestion effect, the small hit winning suggestion effect, and the award ball number display suggesting effect. 10-57 and 10-58, the display screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), (C),.... Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, the case where the big hit game state is controlled based on the fact that the 10R probability variation big hit has been shown.

As shown in FIG. 10-57(A), during the big hit game, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as "Big hit!" and a round number display such as "Round 2". The number of prize balls display 052IW008 is displayed. Also, when a normal winning (non-over-winning) to the special winning opening occurs during the big hit game, as shown in FIG. 10-57(B), the normal display color (white in this example) is displayed. 052IW009 (in this example, the character display of "+15") is displayed, and the winning sound of the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see steps 052IWS307 and S308).

Next, it is assumed that an over-winning occurs during the big hit game, and the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect is decided based on the occurrence of the over-winning. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-57(C), the prize display 052IW010 (in this example, the character display of “+15”) corresponding to the determined type of the over-winning suggestion effect is displayed, and the speaker 8L is displayed. , 8R outputs winning sounds according to the determined type of over-winning suggestion effect (see steps 052IWS305 and S306). For example, when the over-winning suggestion effect A is executed, the winning display of the blue display color is displayed on the image display device 5, and the winning sound of the sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, it is assumed that the number of prize balls reaches 456, and that the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is decided based on the number of prize balls reaching 456. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-57(D), the character display 052IW011 such as "456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize sphere number display suggestive effect A is executed (see step 052IWS360).

In this example, the case where the prize sphere number display suggesting effect A is executed is shown. For example, when the execution of the prize sphere number indicating suggestion effect B is decided, “555” is displayed on the image display device 5. A character display such as "OVER" is displayed, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize sphere number display suggestion effect C is determined, the character display such as “666 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize sphere number display suggestion effect C is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-58(E), when the big hit game is finished, the game state is controlled to the high probability/second KT state after the big hit game is finished. When the high probability/second KT state is controlled, as shown in FIG. 10-58(F), a character display such as “Small hits RUSH medium!” is displayed and the number of prize balls display 052IW008 continues. Will be displayed.

Next, in the high probability/second KT state, a small hit occurs and a game ball is won into the special winning opening, but if the execution of the small hit winning suggestive effect is not decided, then FIG. As shown in (F), a winning display 052IW012 (in this example, “+10” character display) is displayed in a normal display color (white in this example), and a normal sound is won from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output (see steps 052IWS325 and S326).

Next, during the high probability/second KT state, a small hit occurs and a game ball wins the special winning opening, and based on the fact that the game ball wins the special winning entrance It has been decided to execute. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-58(G), the prize display 052IW013 (in this example, the character display of “+10”) corresponding to the determined small hit winning suggestion effect is displayed and the speaker is displayed. From 8L and 8R, the winning sound according to the determined type of the small hit winning suggestion effect is output (see steps 052IWS323 and S324). For example, when the small hit winning suggestion effect A is executed, the winning display of the sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R while the winning display is displayed in the image display device 5 in the blue display color.

Next, it is assumed that the number of prize balls has reached 2666 during the high probability/second KT state, and the execution of the prize ball number display suggesting effect F has been determined based on the number of prize balls reaching 2666. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-58(H), the character display 052IW014 such as “2666 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize sphere number display suggesting effect F is executed (see step 052IWS360).

In addition, in this example, the case where the prize sphere number display suggesting effect F is executed is shown, but for example, when the execution of the prize sphere number indicating suggestion effect D is decided, “2456” is displayed on the image display device 5. A character display such as "OVER" is displayed, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize sphere number display suggesting effect E is determined, a character display such as “2555 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize sphere number display suggesting effect E is executed.

Although illustration is omitted in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, for example, the execution of the prize sphere emphasis effect A is determined based on the number of prize spheres reaching 1000. In this case, the character display such as “1000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number emphasis effect A is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize sphere emphasis effect B is determined based on the number of prize spheres reaching 2000, a character display such as “2000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasis effect B is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize sphere emphasis effect C is determined based on the number of prize balls reaching 3000, a character display such as “3000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasis effect C is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize sphere emphasis effect D is decided based on the number of prize spheres reaching 4000, a character display such as “4000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasis effect D is executed. In addition, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect E is determined based on the number of prize balls reaching 5000, a character display such as “5000 OVER” is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasizing effect E is executed.

In this example, the number of prize balls has reached 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666 (in other words, during a big hit game or a high probability/second win in the second KT state) Although the case where the prize ball number display suggestive effects A to F are executed at different selection ratios in accordance with the total of the game value given by) is shown, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, depending on the number of small hits that occur during the high probability/second KT state and the number of times that the variable display is executed during the high probability/second KT state, the prize ball number display suggestive effects A to F are selected at different selection ratios. May be configured to perform, and various aspects are possible.

Next, while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed, the control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol will be described. FIG. 10-59 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variable display when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of the one special symbol is being executed.

During the variable display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol is a certain change (in this example, 10R certain change) In the case of a big hit variation that is a big hit or 6R probability variation big hit), as shown in FIG. 10-59(A), the variation display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first variation time timer is interrupted and the variation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the first variation time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, (See Y in step 052IWS1128A).

On the other hand, if the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit variation that is a normal big hit (6R normal big hit in this example), as shown in FIG. 10-59(B), the small hit symbol is a stop display. When it is done, the variable display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a deviating symbol (step 052IWS1128A, N, see step 052IWS1129A).

In addition, during the variable display of the first special symbol that is out and small hit, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 10-59(C), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first variation time timer is interrupted and the variation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the first variation time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, Step 052 IWS1127A, N).

During the variable display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is a positive change. Big hit, 6R certainty variation big hit, or 2R certainty variation big hit) If it is a big hit variation, as shown in FIG. 10-59(D), even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the second special symbol Is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, (See Y in step 052IWS1128B).

On the other hand, when the variation display of the second special symbol is a big hit variation that is a normal big hit (2R normal big hit in this example), as shown in FIG. 10-59(E), the small hit symbol is a stop display. When it is done, the variable display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed in the off symbol (N in step 052IWS1128B, see step 052IWS1129B).

When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that is out of alignment or the small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-59(F), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, (See N in step 052IWS1127B).

The control method in the case of a small hit in the variable display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variable display of the one special symbol is not limited to the mode shown in this example. Hereinafter, a modified example of the control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed will be described.

(Modification 1)
FIG. 10-60 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first modification. 10-60, the processing of steps 052IWS1120A to S1127A is similar to those shown in FIG. 10-19, but in the first modification, the determination processing of step 052IWS1128A shown in FIG. 10-19 does not exist. ..

In Modification 1, if the variable display of the first special symbol that is being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 directly shifts to the process of step S1129A and transmits the first compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed (step 052IWS1129A). 10-60, the processing of step 052IWS1130A is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 10-19.

FIG. 10-61 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol variation process in the first modification. 10-61, the processes of steps 052IWS1120B to S1127B are similar to those shown in FIG. 10-22, but in the modified example 1, the determination process of step 052IWS1128B shown in FIG. 10-22 does not exist. ..

In the first modification, if the variable display of the second special symbol that is being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 shifts to the process of step S1129B as it is, and transmits the second compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed (step 052IWS1129B). Note that in FIG. 10-61, the process of step 052IWS1130B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-22.

FIG. 10-62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining control of variable display when a small hit occurs in variable display of the other special symbol during execution of variable display of one special symbol in the first modification.

During the variable display of the first special symbol that is a big hit, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, is the variable display of the first special symbol a big variation of a sure change big hit? Regardless of whether it is a big hit variation that is usually a big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-62(A), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol is also forced to be a deviating symbol. It is stopped and displayed (N in step 052IWS1127A, see step 052IWS1129A).

On the other hand, during the variable display of the first special symbol that is out of place or a small hit, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 10-62(B), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first variation time timer is interrupted and the variation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the first variation time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, Step 052 IWS1127A, N).

During the variable display of the second special symbol that is a big hit, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, is the variable display of the second special symbol a big change of a big hit? Regardless of whether it is a big hit variation that is usually a big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-62(C), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the second special symbol is also forced to be a deviating symbol. It is stopped and displayed (N in step 052IWS1127B, see step 052IWS1129B).

On the other hand, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that is out of alignment or the small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-62(D), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, (See N in step 052IWS1127B).

(Modification 2)
FIG. 10-63 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the second modification. 10-63, the processes of steps 052IWS1120A to S1126A are similar to those shown in FIG. 10-19. Instead, it includes the processing of step 052IWS1127C.

In the modified example 2, if the variable display of the first special symbol that is being executed is a big hit, the process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the variation display of the first special symbol that is being executed is not a big hit, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129A). Note that in FIG. 10-63, the process of step 052IWS1130A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-19.

FIG. 10-64 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol variation process in Modification 2. 10-64, the processes of steps 052IWS1120B to S1126B are similar to those shown in FIG. 10-22. However, in the modified example 2, the determination process of steps 052IWS1127B and S1128B shown in FIG. 10-22 is performed. Instead, it includes the processing of step 052IWS1127D.

In the second modification, if the variable display of the second special symbol that is being executed is a big hit, the process ends. On the other hand, if the variable display of the second special symbol that is being executed is not a big hit, the CPU 103 controls to send the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129B). 10-64, the process of step 052IWS1130B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-22.

FIG. 10-65 is an explanatory diagram for explaining control of variable display when a small hit occurs in variable display of the other special symbol during execution of variable display of one special symbol in Modification 2.

During the variable display of the first special symbol that is a big hit, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, is the variable display of the first special symbol a big variation of a sure change big hit? Regardless of whether it is a big hit variation that is usually a big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-65(A), the variation display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first variation time timer is interrupted and the variation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the first variation time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, (See Y in step 052IWS1127C).

On the other hand, during the variable display of the first special symbol that is out or a small hit, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 10-65(B), When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed in the off symbol (step 052IWS1127C, N, see step 052IWS1129A).

During the variable display of the second special symbol that is a big hit, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, is the variable display of the second special symbol a big change of a big hit? Regardless of whether it is a big hit variation that is usually a big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-65(C), the variation display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is finished, the value of the accessory control process flag is again updated to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, (See Y in step 052IWS1127D).

On the other hand, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that is out of alignment or the small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-65(D), When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a deviating symbol (N in step 052IWS1127D, step 052IWS1129B).

Further, as a control method in the case where a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed, other than those shown in the modified examples 1 and 2, for example, When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol, which is forced to stop, while the variable display of the first special symbol that is the small hit is displayed. In the variable display of the second special symbol, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation may be continued.

Further, for example, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol which is the 10R certainty variation big hit, the forced stop is stopped while the 2R certainty variation big hit is given. When the small hitting symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the 1 special symbol, the variation may be continued.

Further, for example, during the normal state (low probability / low base state), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol that is being executed is displaced, Either the small hit variation or the big hit variation may be configured to be forced to stop. With such a configuration, in this example, when the variable display is completed 50 times in the low probability/high base state, the state is changed to the low probability/low base state (see FIG. 10-29). When the variable display is ended and the low probability/low base state is entered, 1 to 4 second reserved memories are accumulated, and if there is a second reserved memory that is a big hit, it is forced to stop. As a result, it is possible to prevent a big hit at unintended timing. In addition, in particular, in the gaming machine configured to be controllable in the KT state as in this example, by performing a right-handing operation in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the second starting winning opening for easy starting winning is obtained. It is also possible to use a strategy such that the winning prize is started and the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed, and the winning symbol of the first start is prized and the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. It is effective as a preventive measure.

As described above, various modes are conceivable as a control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of the one special symbol is being executed.

(Modification 3)
Further, in the present characteristic part 052IW, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the control for forcibly displaying the deviating symbol is stopped by the same control. Although the case (see FIG. 10-59) is shown, different control may be used. FIG. 10-66 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol variation process in Modification 3. In the modified example 3, the first special symbol variation process is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-19. 10-66, the processes of steps 052IWS1120B to S1125B are similar to those shown in FIG. 10-22. However, in the third modification, the determination processes of steps 052IWS1126B to S1128B shown in FIG. 10-22 are executed. not exist. Therefore, in Modification 3, if the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (N in step 052IWS1125B), the CPU 103 terminates the process.

FIG. 10-67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining control of variable display when a small hit occurs in variable display of the other special symbol during execution of variable display of one special symbol in Modification 3.

As shown in FIGS. 10-67 (A) and (C), in Modification 3, the small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol that is the deviating or the small hit, the probability variation big hit When the symbols are stopped and displayed, similarly to FIGS. 10-59 (A) and (C), the variable display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbols are stopped and displayed. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-67 (D) and (F), the small hit symbol stops in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol that is a deviation, a small hit, and a probability variation big hit. When displayed, similarly to FIGS. 10-59 (D) and (F), the variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-67(B), in Modification 3, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol which is normally a big hit. Similarly to FIG. 10-59(B), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed as a falling symbol.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-67(E), in Modification 3, when the small hitting symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol which is usually a big hit. In contrast to FIG. 10-59(E), the variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-67, in Modification 3, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. The control to stop and display is different.

In Modification 3, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol while the variable display of the first special symbol which is usually the big hit is being executed, the normal big hit is stopped while the forced hit stop is displayed. While the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed during execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the case where the variable display is continued is shown in the case where the small hit symbol is stopped, but it is limited to such an aspect. Absent. For example, conversely, while the small hit pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol while the variable display of the first special symbol that is normally a big hit is being executed, the variable display is continued, while the normal big hit is When the small hitting symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, it may be configured to be forcedly stopped. Further, for example, (regardless of whether it is a probability big hit or a normal big hit) When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol while the variable display of the first special symbol which is a big hit is being executed, it is forcibly removed While stopping, (regardless of whether it is a probability big hit or normal big hit) If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol while the variable display of the second special symbol which is a big hit is being executed, it fluctuates The display may be continued. As such, in some form, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol and when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the control for forced disengagement stop may be different.

(Modification 4)
FIG. 10-68 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in Modification 4. 10-68, the processes of steps 052IWS1120A to S1128A are the same as those shown in FIG. 10-19.

In Modification 4, in step 052IWS1128A, neither the 10R certainty variation big hit nor the 6R certainty variation big hit (that is, the 6R normal big jackpot) is displayed, and when the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag to It is confirmed whether or not it is set (step 052IWS1131A). If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if it is not the probability variation state), the process is ended as it is. If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if the probability variation state), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129A). Note that the processing of step 052IWS1130A is the same as the processing shown in FIG.

In Modification 4, by executing the determination process of step 052IWS1131A, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol which is usually a big hit, The variation display of the first special symbol is not forcibly stopped and displayed in the deviating symbol, but the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the deviating symbol when the probability change state is in progress. On the other hand, even during the variation display of the first special symbol which is usually a big hit, the variation display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed unless it is in the probability changing state.

FIG. 10-69 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol variation process in Modification 4. 10-69, the processes of steps 052IWS1120B to S1128B are the same as those shown in FIG. 10-22.

In the modified example 4, in step 052IWS1128B, the variable display of the first special symbol which is neither the 10R certainty variation big hit, the 6R certainty variation big hit, nor the 2R certainty variation big hit (that is, the 2R normal big hit) is being executed, the CPU 103 Confirms whether the probability variation flag is set (step 052IWS1131B). If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if it is not the probability variation state), the process is ended as it is. If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if the probability variation state), the CPU 103 controls to transmit the second compulsory symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129B). Note that the processing of Step 052IWS1130B is the same as the processing shown in FIG.

In the modified example 4, when the determination process of step 052IWS1131B is executed, during the variable display of the second special symbol that is usually a big hit, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol, The variable display of the second special symbol is not forcibly stopped and displayed as a deviating symbol, but the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed as a deviating symbol when the probability change state is in progress. On the other hand, even during the variation display of the second special symbol that is usually a big hit, the variation display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed unless it is in the probability change state.

In Modification 4, the case is shown in which the probability variation flag is forcibly stopped depending on whether or not the probability variation flag is set (whether or not it is in the probability variation state), but only in such a mode. I can't. For example, it may be configured to perform control to forcibly stop and display a symbol depending on whether or not the special drawing time saving flag is set. Further, for example, only in the high-probability/low-base state (the high-probability flag is on, the high-base flag is off), the control to forcibly stop and display the symbol may be performed. As such, it may be configured in any form so as to perform control to forcibly stop and display the symbol according to the current game state.

In addition, as described above, when configured to perform control to forcibly stop and display with a symbol only in the high probability/low base state, it is possible to prevent a big jackpot from being normally displayed by the variable display of one identification information, It is possible to prevent the second KT state (small hit RUSH) from being interrupted.

As described above, according to the present characteristic part 052IW, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different advantages for the player. is there. In addition, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that is a state different from the advantageous state. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) where value is easily added. Then, in response to the game medium (for example, a game ball) passing through a specific area (for example, a special winning opening), a setting suggestive effect (for example, a small hit winning suggestion effect) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of setting suggestion production.

Specifically, in this example, the suggestion at the time of winning the small hit can be executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the special winning opening during the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH). However, during the small hit RUSH, the winning frequency to the special winning opening is particularly high, so it is possible to focus on the setting suggestive effect (in this example, the suggestive effect at the time of small hit winning), and improve the interest of the setting suggestive effect. be able to.

In this example, the case where the setting suggesting effect (in this example, the small hit winning suggestion effect) is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won in the special winning opening as the specific area is shown. I can't stop. For example, even if it is configured to be able to execute the setting suggestion effect based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening (the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B), the general winning opening 10, and the special winning opening as the specific area. Good. Further, the setting suggestion effect may be configured to be executable based on the entry of the game ball into the outlet as the specific area. Further, for example, the setting suggestion effect may be configured to be executable based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gates such as the passage gate 41 as the specific area.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, it is possible to set any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different degrees of advantage for the player. In addition, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that is a state different from the advantageous state. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) where value is easily added. Further, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect (for example, a prize ball number indication suggestion effect), and the easiness of execution of the setting suggestion effect differs depending on the length of the period in which the special state is controlled (for example, FIG. 10-43 ). As shown in, when the number of award balls reaches 456, it is possible to execute the award ball number indicating suggestion production A with a probability of 3%, and when the number of award balls reaches 555, there is a probability of 2%. The number display suggestion effect B can be executed, the prize ball number indication suggestion effect C can be executed with a probability of 1% when the number of prize balls reaches 666, and 5 when the number of prize balls reaches 2456. It is possible to execute the award ball number display suggesting effect D with a probability of %, and to execute the award ball number indicating suggestion effect E with a probability of 3% when the number of award balls reaches 2555, and the award ball number of 2666. When the number of individual balls is reached, there is a 2% probability that the award ball number display suggestive effect F can be executed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of setting suggestion production.

In this example, the timing when the number of prize balls reaches 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, and 2666 as the "length of the period controlled in the special state" (in other words, A case is shown in which the award ball number display suggesting effect is executed during a period until a certain specific game value is given), but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, "the length of the period controlled to the special state" is controlled to the length of the period controlled to the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit game state) or the special state (in this example, the small hit game state) It may be the length of a given period or the length of these total periods.

Further, when the length of the period controlled to an advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state) is used as the “length of the period controlled to the special state”, the length of the period from the fanfare of the big hit game to the ending is used. Alternatively, the length of the period of only the round game during the big hit game may be used. In this case, for example, as the big hit with a longer period from the fanfare of the big hit game to the ending, the prize ball number indicating suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate. Further, for example, in the case of a big hit with a small number of rounds during the big hit game, it may be configured to execute the prize ball number indicating suggestion effect at a higher rate than a big hit with a large number of rounds.

In addition, for example, as the “length of the period controlled to the special state”, the number of small hits that occur during the high probability/second KT state or the number of times of the variable display executed during the high probability/second KT state is executed. Accordingly, the prize ball number display suggestive effect may be configured to be executed. In this case, for example, the higher the number of small hits, the higher the proportion of prize ball display suggestion effects may be executed, or the larger the number of times the variable display is executed, the higher proportion the prize ball count display suggestion effects may be executed. .. Further, for example, the award ball number display suggestion effect may be executed at a high rate at the timing when the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH) ends, and various values may be set as the “length of the period controlled to the special state”. Various modes are possible.

Generally, in a gaming machine, when the number of prize balls reaches a certain number and a display such as "XXXXX" is displayed, "1000 OVER" of the prize ball emphasis effect shown in this example or It is displayed in a unit with a certain limit, such as in units of 1000 prize balls such as "2000 OVER". On the other hand, the award ball number indication suggestive effect shown in this example is a timing different from the normal timing when the number of award balls reaches 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555 or 2666. Since it is executed in, it is possible to expect a high setting while giving a sense of incongruity to the generation timing of the award ball number display suggestive effect, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, when the specific display result (for example, the big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state). Moreover, when a special display result (for example, a small hitting pattern) different from the specific display result is displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small hitting game state). Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination). Further, the judgment value includes a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display the specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. And a special determination value (for example, a determination value for a small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. Further, it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different numbers of specific determination values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”). The number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, setting suggestive effect can be executed in response to the control to the special state (for example, a small hit occurs during the high probability/second KT state, and a game ball is won in the special winning opening. Based on the above, it is possible to carry out a small hit winning suggestion production and a prize ball number display suggestive production). Therefore, the interest of the setting suggestion effect can be improved in association with the control to the special state.

In this example, the case where the setting suggestion effect (in this example, the suggestion effect at the time of winning the small hit, the indication suggestion of the number of prize balls) is executed based on the fact that the game ball has won the special winning opening, is shown. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, while the small hit is changing, or when the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to the open state, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at the start of the small hit game. Further, for example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed by changing the small hit notification mode when a small hit occurs. In this way, any form may be used as long as the setting suggestion effect is executed in response to the control for the small hit.

In addition, according to this characteristic section 052IW, when it is controlled in the advantageous state and in the special state, the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17) is played. It is possible to control the medium (for example, a game ball) into an easy-to-enter state (for example, open state) where it is easy to enter and an inaccessible state (for example, closed state) where entry is difficult or impossible. Further, the setting suggestion effect can be executed in response to the variable means being controlled to be in the easy entry state (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the special variable winning ball device 17 are in the open state, and are large. Based on the occurrence of winning game balls to the winning opening and special winning opening, it is possible to execute suggestion production at the time of winning the small hit and indication suggestion of the number of prize balls). Therefore, the interest of the setting suggestion effect can be improved in association with the control of the variable means.

In this example, in the case of executing the setting suggestion effect (in this example, the suggestion effect at the time of winning the small hit, the indication suggestion of the number of prize balls) based on the fact that the game ball has won the special prize hole or the special prize hole. However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when executing the opening effect when the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to be in the open state, the setting suggesting effect is executed by changing the effect mode of the opening effect. It may be configured as follows. As described above, any setting may be performed as long as the setting suggestion effect is executed in response to the variable means being controlled to the easy entry state.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, when the control of the game state is switched (for example, at the start or end of the big hit game, when transitioning from the low probability/first KT state to the normal state (low probability/low base state) ), the setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display is changed in step 052IWS624). Therefore, the interest of the setting suggestion effect can be improved in association with the switching of the control of the game state.

In this example, as "when the control of the game state is switched", when the big hit game starts or ends, when the low probability/first KT state is changed to the normal state (low probability/low base state), the setting is made. Although the case where the suggestive effect is configured to be executable is shown, the invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, during the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH) during the big hit game transition, or from the big hit game to the high base state (high probability/first KT state or low probability/first KT state) The setting suggestion effect may be configured to be executable during the effect period. Further, for example, a gaming machine configured to perform a variable display a predetermined number of times during a high base state or to shift to a high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH) based on occurrence of a predetermined number of small hits. In, in the production period when transitioning from the high base state to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH), the setting suggestion production may be configured to be executable, and various settings may be made as “when the control of the game state is switched”. Various modes are possible.

Further, in this example, the case where the setting suggestion effect is executed by changing the display mode of the right-handed display and the left-handed display is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a manner. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed by changing the effect mode of the fanfare effect at the start of the big hit and the ending effect at the end of the big hit, and various modes are possible.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, according to the number of times of control to the special state during the special state, the total game value given by the special state during the special state, or the number of executions of the variable display during the special state, It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect with different selection ratios (for example, when the number of prize balls reaches 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666), different selection ratios are used. The number of balls display suggesting effects A to F are executed, or, for example, according to the number of small hits that occur during the high probability/second KT state or the number of times of variable display executed during the high probability/second KT state. Alternatively, the prize ball number display suggestive effects A to F may be executed at different selection rates. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in association with the number of times of control to the special state, the total game value, or the number of times of variable display execution.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, as the special state, there are an advantageous special state (for example, the second KT state), and a disadvantageous special state (for example, the first KT state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous special state. Controllable. Further, the setting suggestion effect can be executed with different selection ratios when the game medium passes through the specific area during the advantageous special state and when the game medium passes through the specific area during the disadvantageous special state (for example, Only when the game ball is a small hit in the second KT state and a special winning opening is won in the special winning opening, the suggestion effect at the time of winning the small hit and the suggestion effect for displaying the number of prize balls can be executed). Therefore, the interest of the setting suggestion effect can be improved in association with the type of special state.

In addition, in this example, only when the game ball is won in the special winning opening during the second KT state, the small hit winning suggestion effect and the prize ball number indication suggesting effect are configured to be executable. It is not limited to various forms. For example, even if a game ball is won in the special winning opening during the first KT state, it is possible to execute the small hit winning indication suggestion effect and the prize ball number indication suggesting effect, and the special winning opening during the second KT state. Depending on whether it is a prize or a game ball is won in the special winning opening during the first KT state, it is possible to execute the small hit winning indication suggestion effect and the prize ball number indication suggestion effect at different ratios. You may comprise. Further, for example, even when an irregular game ball is won in the special winning opening during the non-KT state, the small hit winning suggestion effect and the prize ball number display suggesting effect may be executed. ..

In the case of the above configuration, when a special winning opening or irregular winning occurs in the first KT state (high base state), or when a special winning opening occurs in the second KT state Compared with the above, it may be configured to execute the small hitting prize suggestion effect and the prize ball number indication suggestion effect at a higher rate, or the small hit prize suggestion effect and the prize ball number indication suggestion effect at a lower rate. It may be configured to execute.

In addition, in this characteristic part 052IW, the value of the prize ball number counter and the number of prize balls are displayed during the big hit game based on the 10R sure-change big hit, the 6R sure-change big hit, and the 6R normal big hit, and during the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH). Is updated and the value of the prize ball counter is not updated during the big hit game based on the 2R probability change hit and the 2R normal big hit and during the high base state (high probability/first KT state, low probability/first KT state) (however, In addition to not resetting the prize ball counter), in principle, the prize ball count display is hidden, and the variable display is terminated 50 times in the low probability/first KT state and the normal state (low probability/low base state) is reached. The case where the value of the prize ball number counter is controlled to be reset when the shift is made has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. The value of the prize ball number counter may be updated even during a big hit game based on the 2R probability varying big hit or the 2R normal big hit.

In addition, in the present example, due to the configuration as described above, for example, the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH) is terminated and the high base state (high probability/first KT state, low probability/first KT). State)), if a high probability 10R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit occurs in the high base state and the state changes again to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH), the prize in the previous small hit RUSH It is possible to update the value of the prize ball number counter while displaying the number of balls and display the prize ball number display.

Further, not only in the mode of displaying the number of prize balls as shown in this example, for example, when the probability of 10R probability variation is a big hit and the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH) is entered, the high probability/second KT state is displayed. The (small hit RUSH) state and the big hit game immediately before that may be set as one section, and the number of prize balls in the section may be totaled to display the total value. Further, for example, by changing the display mode (display color in this example) of the totalized value, the setting suggestion effect suggesting the current set value may be executed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 052IW, as the “setting suggestion effect”, the small hitting prize suggestion effect and the prize ball number indication suggestion effect are produced in a mode in which the current setting value indicates any one of the setting values “1” to “6”. However, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, instead of suggesting the current set value, even if configured to execute the setting suggestion effect in a mode that suggests whether or not the setting change that changes the set value when the power is turned on to the game machine is suggested. Good. In this way, the “setting suggestion effect” may be something that makes a suggestion regarding the setting in some form.

Further, according to the present characteristic part 052IW, the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel. , It is possible to control to an advantageous state (eg, big hit game state) advantageous to the player when a specific display result (eg, big hit pattern) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, and is special as the display result of the variable display. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, a small hitting gaming state) different from the advantageous state when the display result (for example, a small hitting symbol) is derived and displayed. Further, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probability variation big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol), and the one in which the first specific display result is derived and displayed is It is more advantageous for the player than the second specific display result is displayed by derivation (for example, it is controlled to a probable state after the jackpot game is over). Further, while the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, which is the variable display corresponding to the first specific display result, is being performed, the special display result is displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Based on the derived display, the display result of the variable display of the one identification information is not derived and displayed (for example, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the first special symbol or the first special symbol or 2 Variable display of special symbols is continuously executed). Further, while the variable display of the identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result is being executed, the special display result is displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. Based on the derived display, the one variable display of the identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, a deviating symbol) (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is deviating and is a symbol. It will be forced to stop). Therefore, control considering the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display can be realized.

Specifically, if the normal big hit (non-probable strange big hit) is displayed in the variable display corresponding to the remaining suspension of one of the identification information, even though the state shifts to the second KT state (small hit RUSH) or the positive hit state, The second KT state (small hit RUSH) or the probability variation state will end immediately, and there is a risk that the interest in the game will decrease. On the other hand, if the variation display corresponding to the remaining suspension of the identification information on one side is forcibly and uniformly discontinued and the symbols are stopped and displayed (forcibly disengaged), even if the variation display is a certainty big hit, it is disengaged. As a result, the game value given to the player in the advantageous state (big hit game state) is reduced, which is not preferable. Therefore, in the characteristic part 052IW, while the fluctuation display that is a normal big hit (non-probability variation big hit) is forcibly deviated, the fluctuation display (the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted) is performed for the fluctuation display that is a probability big hit. , It is possible to improve the interest in the game while suppressing the decrease in the game value given to the player.

In this example, as a mode that "variable display of one identification information is not stopped", the update of the first variation time timer or the second variation time timer is interrupted, and the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped), and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol which has been interrupted after the small hit game is finished is configured to be restarted. May be. It is only necessary that the variable display is not completely stopped in some form.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, the second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) due to the special state is easily given. Therefore, by providing a situation in which a game value due to a special state is likely to be provided, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change) that is a state different from the advantageous state and is easily controlled to the advantageous state as compared to a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). State)) can be controlled. Further, the first specific display result is derived and displayed, and is controlled to a specific state (for example, the probability variation state is controlled after the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot is controlled), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed. Based on the fact, it controls to a non-specific state (for example, it does not control to a probability change state after the end of the big hit game based on the normal big hit). Therefore, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of whether the control is performed in the specific state.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change) that is a state different from the advantageous state and is easily controlled to the advantageous state as compared to a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). State)) can be controlled. Further, it is possible to control to the specific state based on the fact that the game medium (for example, the game ball) has passed the specific region (for example, the V region 052IW104) while being controlled to the advantageous state. When the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the game medium passes through the specific region at a high rate when controlled in the advantageous state, as compared with the case where the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (See FIGS. 10-11). Therefore, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, the special display result can be derived and displayed regardless of whether the first identification information is variably displayed or the second identification information is variably displayed ( (See FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Further, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information while the variable display of the first identification information is being performed corresponding to the second specific display result, the first identification information is displayed. Variable display of information is derived and displayed by a predetermined display result (see FIG. 10-67(B)). Further, when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information while the variable display of the second identification information is being performed corresponding to the second specific display result, the second identification information is displayed. The variable display of No. is not controlled to be derived and displayed as a predetermined display result (see FIG. 10-67(E)). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change) that is a state different from the advantageous state and is easily controlled to the advantageous state as compared to a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). State)) can be controlled. Further, the variable display executing means is a variable display of the identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information and is a variable display corresponding to the second specific display result when being controlled to the specific state. During execution of, the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, and the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed as the predetermined display result (FIGS. 10-68 and 10-). 69). Further, when the variable display of the identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, which is the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, is being performed when the control is performed in the non-specific state, When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the one identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed (see FIGS. 10-68 and 10-69). ). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of whether or not the display is controlled to the specific state.

Further, according to the present characteristic portion 052IW, the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) based on that the game medium (for example, the game ball) has entered the first starting area (for example, the first starting winning opening). ) Variable display is possible, and based on the fact that the game medium has entered the second starting area (for example, the second starting winning opening), the variable display for the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is executed. It is possible. Also, variable means (for example, special variable winning) capable of changing between a first state (for example, open state) in which the game medium can enter and a second state (for example, closed state) in which the game medium is difficult or inaccessible A ball device 17). In addition, after the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is executed, an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state) and a special state having a lower degree of advantage than the advantageous state ( For example, a small hit game state) can be controlled, and when the special state is controlled, the variable means is controlled to the first state. In addition, the first starting area is provided so that a game medium that moves on a predetermined path (for example, an area on the left side of the game area) of the moving path on which the game medium can move can enter, and the variable means is one of the moving paths. A game medium that moves on a specific route (for example, a region on the right side of the game region) is provided so that it can enter. Further, it is possible to execute a specific notification (for example, right-handed notification shown in (1) and (2) in FIG. 10-56) for promoting the launch of the game medium to the specific path, and the variable display of the first identification information is possible. When the special state is controlled after the execution of, the specific notification is not executed (for example, see FIG. 10-56(3)). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the promotion of the launch of the game medium.

Specifically, as shown in the present characteristic part 052IW, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, and the small hit type of the first special symbol side It is configured so that the winning ratio (advantage) to the special winning opening is lower than that of the small hit type on the second special symbol side, and the second special when the small hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol. When the variable display of the symbols is configured to be forcedly stopped and stopped, if the right hitting notification is executed for the small hit on the side of the first special symbol with a low winning rate (advantage), it is substantially It is not preferable because the player wastes the game ball in spite of being unlikely to win a prize in the special winning opening, and rather gives a disadvantageous launch promotion notification. Therefore, in this example, while the right hit notification is executed for the small hit on the second special symbol side, the right hit notification is not executed for the small hit on the first special symbol side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages due to the player's wasteful hitting, and it is possible to realize appropriate notification.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, the first hold storage means (for example, the first hold storage buffer) capable of storing the information related to the variable display of the first identification information as the hold storage, and the variable display of the second identification information. And a second reserved storage means (for example, a second reserved storage buffer) capable of storing information regarding the reserved storage. In addition, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information or a display result of the variable display of the second identification information, it is in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state). It is controllable, and when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information or a display result of the variable display of the second identification information (for example, It can be controlled to a small hit game state). Further, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the frequency of the variable display of the second identification information becoming the special display result is increased. Further, based on the fact that when the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, the special display result is derived and displayed as the display result of one variable display, As a display result of the other variable display, a predetermined display result (for example, a deviating pattern) different from the specific display result and the special display result is derived and displayed. Therefore, the variable display can be forcibly ended, and the pending storage can be smoothly consumed.

In addition, according to this characteristic part 052IW, it is possible to give a predetermined value when controlled to a special state (for example, pay out 10 prize balls based on winning of a game ball into a special winning opening), It is possible to give a value higher than a predetermined value when controlled to an advantageous state (for example, pay out 15 prize balls based on winning of a game ball to the special winning opening). Further, as the specific notification, a first specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 shown in (1) and (2) of FIG. 10-56) and visual confirmation than the first specific notification It is possible to execute the second specific notification (for example, the display of the right-handed display 052IW007 shown in FIG. 10-56(1)) having a high possibility. Further, when controlled to the advantageous state, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are executed (see FIG. 10-56(1)), and the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and then the special state is controlled. If so, the first specific notification is executed and the second specific notification is not executed (see FIG. 10-56(2)). Therefore, it is possible to realize the notification corresponding to the value that can be given.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Further, when the variable state of the first identification information is executed and then the special state is controlled, it is more advantageous than when it is changed to the special state after the variable display of the second identification information is executed. It controls to a special type of low degree (for example, small hit A). When the special state is controlled after the variable display of the second identification information is performed, the specific notification is performed (see (2) and (3) in Fig. 10-56). Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification in consideration of the player's advantage.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, it is possible to execute a variable display effect (for example, a variable display of the decorative pattern) corresponding to at least the variable display of the first identification information. In addition, it is possible to execute a variable display effect in a common mode when the special state is controlled and when the special state is not controlled (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs. , Forcibly display non-reach outliers). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's recognizability of being controlled to the special state after the variable display of the first identification information is executed. In addition, the reserved storage stored in the second reserved storage means can be smoothly consumed.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, a delay means (for example, a restriction piece provided in the variable winning ball device 6B) for delaying the movement of the game medium is provided on the upstream side of the variable means in the specific route. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the target from being aimed at the timing at which the control to the special state is performed after the variable display of the second identification information is normally performed. Therefore, it is possible to strengthen countermeasures against the game machine.

The delay means is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, on the upstream side of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 provided on the right side of the game area, as a delay means, a passage member for moving the game ball to meander left and right is provided. You may.

In addition, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, the game control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) for controlling the progress of the game and the effect based on the information from the game control means. The production control means (for example, CPU120 for production control) which controls is provided. In addition, the game control means controls the execution of the notification by the notification means (for example, the right-handed indicator 26) that performs a predetermined notification. Further, the effect control means performs a specific notification (for example, turning on the right-handed notification LED 37) in response to the notification by the notification means. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification while reducing the processing load of the effect control means.

In this example, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, right-handed notification is executed during the big hit game. Although the case is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a special variable winning ball device (left big winning opening) is provided on the left side of the game area, and a special variable winning ball device (right big winning opening) is also provided on the right side of the playing area. If the variable display of the symbol is a big hit, the left big winning opening is opened during the big hit game, and if the big hit is the variable display of the second special symbol, the right big winning opening is opened during the big hit game. When applied to the gaming machine configured as described above, when the big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, while the right hitting notification is executed during the big hit game, in the variable display of the first special symbol In the case of a big hit, the right hit notification may not be executed during the big hit game. Further, in the case of such a configuration, when the big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the left hitting notification may be executed during the big hit game. That is, the specific notification executing means may be configured to execute the specific notification when the variable means (in this example, the right special winning opening) is controlled to be in an advantageous state of a type in which the control target is set. With such a configuration, when a big hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the left hitting notification is executed during the big hitting game to prevent the player from mistakenly performing the right hitting operation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the disadvantage of the player.

Further, in this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) is provided on the right side of the game area, the case of executing the right hitting notification even during the KT state has been described. It is not limited to various forms. For example, when the second start winning port is applied to the gaming machine provided on the left side of the game area, the right-handed notification is not executed during the KT state, the high base state, or the time saving state. Good.

Further, in this example, only during the big hit game, in addition to turning on the right-handed indicator 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37, right-handed notification is executed by displaying the right-handed display 052IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, in the second KT state (during small hit RUSH), in order to execute the first variation display after the end of the big hit game, in addition to turning on the lighting of the right hit indicator 26 and the right hit notification LED 37. Alternatively, the right-handed notification may be executed by displaying the right-handed display 052IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Alternatively, in this case, for example, in the ending period at the end of the big hit game, in addition to the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 and the right-handling notification LED 37, a right-handed display 052IW007 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. Alternatively, the right-handed notification may be executed.

Further, in this example, the right-handed display displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, in addition to the right-handed display 052IW007 having a relatively large size as shown in FIG. 10-56(1), a symbol display (for example, right-facing triangle display) indicating right-handed display is displayed on the image display device 5. Therefore, the right-handed notification may be executed.

Further, the method of small hit control is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a plurality of special variable winning ball device is provided, the special variable winning ball device (special winning opening) to be opened is configured to be different according to the type of small hit, and the small display is a small hit in the variable display of the first special symbol. It may be configured such that the selection ratio of the small hit type is different depending on whether the small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol. In this case, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is easy to select the small hit type (or the small hit type of the open mode with a low winning rate) opened by the special variable winning ball device with the small number of prize balls. When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, it is easy to select the small hit type (or the small hit type of the open mode with a high winning rate) that the special variable winning ball device with a large number of prize balls opens. You may comprise.

Further, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol, the right hit notification is given during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-56 (2)), and the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. In the case where a small hit occurs in, the right hit notification is not performed during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-56 (3)), but when the small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol However, the right-handed notification may not be performed in some cases. For example, when a small hit occurs when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the situation where the left hit operation should be performed in the normal state, the right hit notification is not performed during the small hit game. You may.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, when a specific display result (eg, big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (eg, big hit game state). Is. Also, when a special display result (for example, a small hit pattern) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result, a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state) can be controlled. Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination). Further, it is possible to control to a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable variation state) and a specific state (for example, a probable variation state) that is easier to control to an advantageous state than the non-specific state. Further, the judgment value includes a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display the specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. And a special determination value (for example, a determination value for a small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. Further, it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different numbers of specific determination values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”). Further, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value, and is common when controlled to the non-specific state and controlled to the specific state (FIGS. 10-3 and 10). -4). Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability.

Specifically, if the lottery probability other than the jackpot winning probability and the type distribution change depending on the set value, the difference in the advantage degree (difference in payout performance) becomes too remarkable depending on the set value, and the gambling probability may become excessively high. There is. Therefore, in the characteristic part 052IW, the number of special determination values is set to be common regardless of the set value (the small hit winning probability is set to be common), so that the difference in the advantage degree is prevented from becoming excessively large depending on the set value. However, it prevents gambling from becoming excessively high.

Further, according to the present characteristic part 052IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol). And can be executed in parallel). Further, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the frequency of the variable display of the second identification information becomes a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol). Therefore, in a gaming machine that can be controlled in a special state, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, as the special state, there are a first special state (for example, the first KT state) and a second special state (for example, the second KT state) having a higher advantage than the first special state. It is controllable. Therefore, in the gaming machine that can be controlled to the second special state, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, it is possible to execute a special suggestion effect corresponding to the degree of advantage of the special state (for example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect shown in FIG. 10-55). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by suggesting the degree of advantage of the special state.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, a predetermined display result (for example, a deviating pattern) different from the specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) and a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived as the display result of the variable display. When the displayed variable display is executed, it is possible to execute the set value suggesting effect that suggests the set value (for example, the set value suggesting effect shown in FIG. 10-54). Therefore, by performing the set value suggestion effect, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In this example, the case where the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect and the set value suggestion effect are executed in the variable display that is out of sync is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect and a set value suggestion effect may be executed during a big hit game or a small hit game, and various modes are possible.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Further, the type of special state is determined using a special type determination value (for example, a small hit type determination value) for determining the type of special state. The number of special type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see Fig. 10-6). Therefore, more appropriate game play can be realized.

Specifically, in the characteristic part 052IW, the number of special type determination values is common regardless of the set value (the small hit type is shared in common), so that the difference in advantage degree becomes excessive depending on the set value. It prevents it from becoming too big, and prevents gambling from becoming too high.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the case where the small hit type allocation is the same regardless of which of the set values is “1” to “6” is shown. It is not limited to various forms. For example, the determination ratio of the small hit type may be changed depending on which of the set values "1" to "6", and the advantage may be varied depending on the set value.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, 10R certainty variation big hit, 6R certainty variation big hit, 6R regular big hit, 2R certainty variation big hit, 2R regular big hit). Further, the type of the advantageous state is determined by using the advantageous type determination value (for example, the jackpot type determination value) for determining the type of the advantageous state. The number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see Fig. 10-5). Therefore, more appropriate game play can be realized.

Specifically, in the present characteristic unit 052IW, the number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (the big hit type is commonly assigned), so that the difference in the advantageous degree is excessively large depending on the set value. It also prevents the gambling property from becoming excessively high.

It should be noted that in this example, as shown in FIG. 10-5, the case where the jackpot type allocation is the same regardless of which of the setting values “1” to “6” is shown. It is not limited to the mode. For example, the determination ratio of the jackpot type may be changed depending on which of the set values "1" to "6", and the advantage may be varied depending on the set value.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, the variable display mode is determined using the variable display mode determination value (for example, the variation pattern determination value) for determining the variable display mode. Further, the number of variable display mode determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-10). Therefore, more appropriate game play can be realized.

Specifically, in the characteristic part 052IW, the number of variable display mode determination values is set to be the same regardless of the set value (the distribution of the variation patterns is set to be common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage becomes excessive depending on the set value. It prevents it from becoming too big, and prevents gambling from becoming too high.

In particular, if the selection ratio of the variation pattern varies depending on the set value, the period from one small hit control to the next small hit control will change, and even if the small hit winning probability is common, it is advantageous for elements other than the big hit lottery This is not preferable because the degree (difference in payout performance) is greatly different, but in the characteristic part 052IW, such a problem does not occur by making the selection ratio of the variation pattern common regardless of the set value. ing.

In the present example, as shown in FIG. 10-10, the case where the allocation of the variation patterns is the same regardless of which of the set values is “1” to “6” is shown. It is not limited to the mode. For example, by varying the determination rate of the variation pattern depending on whether the setting value is “1” to “6” and providing a difference in the variation time, the variation efficiency is changed depending on the setting value. It may be configured such that the degree of advantage differs depending on the value.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, when a specific display result (eg, big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (eg, big hit game state). Is. Also, when a special display result (for example, a small hit pattern) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result, a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state) can be controlled. Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination). In addition, the determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for jackpot determination) for deciding to display the specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. It is determined that a special judgment value (for example, a judgment value for a small hit judgment) for deciding to derive and display a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result as the display result of the variable display. And a predetermined determination value (for example, a determination value for determination of deviation) are included. Further, it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different numbers of specific determination values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”). The number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values, and the number of the predetermined determination values differs depending on the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of guessing the set value and improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, it is possible to control to the non-specific state (for example, the non-probable variation state) and the specific state (for example, the probable variation state) that is more easily controlled to be advantageous than the non-specific state. Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination values corresponding to the specific states of all the set values (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value during the specific state.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). Variable display can be performed in parallel). Further, the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is larger than the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state is performed. The corresponding judgment value includes a predetermined judgment value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value using the display result of the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state.

Further, according to the characteristic part 052IW, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, the KT state) in which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information is increased to the special display result. In addition, when the variable display is controlled to a special state and the predetermined display result (for example, the outlying pattern) is derived and displayed, the set value suggesting effect suggesting the set value (for example, the setting shown in FIG. 10-54 is set. Value suggestion production) can be executed. Therefore, by performing the set value suggestion effect, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 052IW, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). Further, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit game state). Also, when a special display result (for example, a small hit pattern) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result, a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state) can be controlled. Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination). Further, the judgment value includes a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display the specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. And a special determination value (for example, a determination value for a small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. Further, it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different numbers of specific determination values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”). The number of special determination values among the determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-4), and the determination corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information is performed. The number of special determination values differs between the value and the determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the game while realizing appropriate game playability.

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 (JP-A-2017-148127), the display result of the variable display is advantageous with respect to the control of deriving the variable display of the identification information by the predetermined display result (forced disengagement stop). It was not possible to realize control considering the degree. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a gaming machine capable of realizing control considering the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, the characteristic unit 052IW has the following gaming machines (means A1) to (means A6). The characteristic configuration of is also disclosed.

(Means A1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and is a variable display of first identification information (eg, first special symbol) and second identification information (eg, second special information). Variable display execution means capable of executing variable display of (pattern) in parallel (for example, the portion for executing steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)), and display of variable display As a result, when a specific display result (eg, big hit symbol) is derived and displayed, an advantageous state control means (eg, game control microcomputer 100() capable of controlling to an advantageous state (eg, big hit game state) advantageous to the player Specifically, the CPU 103) executes the steps S122 to S125) and a special state different from the advantageous state when the special display result (for example, the small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display ( For example, with a special state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S126 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) that can be controlled to a small hit game state, and a variable display execution means. Based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information while the variable display of the identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is being performed. The first control that does not derive and display the display result of the variable display of information (for example, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol continues. When executed), the second control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the one identification information with a predetermined display result (for example, the off symbol) is displayed (for example, the off symbol is displayed and stopped (for example, the first special symbol or It is possible to execute the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped by the symbol))), and the first control and the second control depending on the display result derived and displayed in the variable display of one identification information. Which of the above is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes the steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B according to the determination results of the steps 052IWS1128A and S1128B. In the modified example 1, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the results of the determinations in steps 052IWS1127A and S1127B. Therefore, steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B are executed. For example, in the modified example 2, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B according to the determination results of steps 052IWS1130C and S1130D. ) Is characterized. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

(Means A2) In the means A1, special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100( (for example, game control microcomputer 100( Specifically, the CPU 103) may be configured to include a portion (which executes step 052IWS2208). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value due to the special state is likely to be given.

(Means A3) In the means A1 or the means A2, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, probability variation big hit pattern) and a second specific display result (for example, normal big hit pattern), and the advantageous state is Specific state control means (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is a different state and can be controlled to an advantageous state more easily than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state) (for example, a high probability state) The game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the part that executes step 052IWS2206 in the CPU 103) is provided, and the specific state control means controls the specific state based on the fact that the first specific display result is derived and displayed. (For example, control to the probability variation state after the end of the big hit game based on the probability variation big hit), control to the non-specific state based on the second specific display result is derived display (for example, the end of the big hit game based on the normal jackpot) It may be configured such that the probability change state is not controlled later). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of whether the control is performed in the specific state.

(Means A4) In any one of the means A1 to A3, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, probability variation big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, normal big hit symbol). , A specific state that is different from the advantageous state and that can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high-probability state (probability variation state)) that is easier to control to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low-probability state) A control means (for example, a part that executes step 052IWS2206 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) is provided, and the specific state control means is a specific area (for example, a portion when the advantageous state is controlled). Based on the fact that the game medium (for example, a game ball) has passed through the V area 052IW104), it can be controlled to a specific state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)), step 052IWS2404. S2405, S2204 to S2206 are executed), in the case where the first specific display result is derived and displayed, as compared with the case where the second specific display result is derived and displayed, a high rate when the advantageous state is controlled. By this, the game medium passes through the specific area (as shown in FIG. 10-11(1), in the big hit game based on the probability variation big hit, the opening period of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is long. On the other hand, FIG. 10-11(2). As shown in, in the big hit game based on the normal big hit, the opening period of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 may be extremely short.). With such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

(Means A5) In any one of the means A1 to A4, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, probability variation big hit pattern) and a second specific display result (for example, normal big hit pattern). , The first specific display result is derived and displayed is more advantageous to the player than the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, it is controlled to a probable state after the jackpot game is over). The variable display executing means can derive and display the special display result regardless of whether the variable display of the first identification information is performed or the variable display of the second identification information is performed (for example, game control). Microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS64A and S64B. (See FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4.), a second specific display result which is a variable display of the first identification information. Based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to, the variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, modified example). 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes the steps 052IWS1129A and S1130A when the answer in step 052IWS1128A is N. See FIG. 10-67(B)), the second identification information variable. When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information while the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result is being performed, the variable display of the second identification information is displayed as the predetermined display result. The derived display control is not performed (for example, in the modified example 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) does not perform the processing of steps 052IWS1126B to S1128B. FIGS. 10-66 and 10-67). (See (E).). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information, in addition to the advantage degree of the display result of the variable display.

(Means A6) In any one of the means A1 to A5, the specific display results include a first specific display result (for example, a probability variation big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol). , The first specific display result is derived and displayed is more advantageous to the player than the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, it is controlled to a probable state after the jackpot game is over). A specific state control that is a state different from the advantageous state and that can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability variation state)) that is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state) Means (for example, a portion that executes step 052IWS2206 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)), the variable display execution means, when being controlled to a specific state, the first identification information and Based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information while the variable display of one of the second identification information is being performed and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result is being executed. Then, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed by a predetermined display result (for example, in the modification 4, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines that the result is Y in steps 052IWS1131A and S1131B). Steps 052 IWS1129A and S1130A are executed (see FIGS. 10-68 and 10-69), and when one of the first identification information and the second identification information is varied, the identification information is changed. When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information while the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result is being performed, the variable display of the one identification information is displayed as the predetermined display result. The control for deriving and displaying is not performed. -68, see FIGS. 10-69)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of whether or not the display is controlled to the specific state, in addition to the advantage degree of the display result of the variable display.

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 (JP-A-2017-148127), the display result of the variable display is advantageous with respect to the control of deriving the variable display of the identification information by the predetermined display result (forced disengagement stop). It was not possible to realize control considering the degree. Therefore, for the purpose of providing the gaming machine capable of realizing the control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, the characteristic portion 052IW has the following gaming machines (means B1) to (means B6). The characteristic configuration of is also disclosed.

(Means B1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, in which variable display of first identification information (for example, first special symbol) and second identification information (for example, second special information) Variable display execution means capable of executing variable display of (pattern) in parallel (for example, the part that executes steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)), and the display of variable display As a result, when a specific display result (for example, big hit symbol) is derived and displayed, advantageous state control means (for example, gaming control microcomputer 100( Specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps S122 to S125), and a special state different from the advantageous state when the special display result (for example, the small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display ( For example, a special state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S126 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) that can be controlled to a small hit game state) and a variable display execution means. Can derive and display the special display result regardless of whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100). (Specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS64A and S64B. (See FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4.), variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information. Based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information during execution of the first control, the display result of the variable display of the other identification information is not derived and displayed (for example, the first variation time). The update of the timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed), and a predetermined display result of the variable display of the one identification information (for example, The second control that is derived and displayed with the off symbol (for example, the off symbol is displayed and stopped (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is forcibly displayed as the off symbol)) Execution is possible, and which of the first control and the second control is executed depends on the display result derived and displayed in the variable display of the one identification information (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, Is the CPU 103) is step 052. Steps 052 IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B are executed according to the determination results of IWS1128A and S1128B. For example, in the modified example 1, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B according to the determination results of steps 052IWS1127A and S1127B. For example, in the modified example 2, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B according to the determination results of steps 052IWS1130C and S1130D. ) Is characterized. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

(Means B2) In the means B1, special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 ( Specifically, the CPU 103) may be configured to include a portion (which executes step 052IWS2208). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value due to the special state is likely to be given.

(Means B3) In the means B1 or the means B2, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probability variation big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol), and the advantageous state. Specific state control means (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is a different state and can be controlled to an advantageous state more easily than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state) (for example, a high probability state) The game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the part that executes step 052IWS2206 in the CPU 103) is provided, and the specific state control means controls the specific state based on the fact that the first specific display result is derived and displayed. (For example, after the big hit game based on the probability variation big hit is controlled to the probability variation state), the second specific display result is derived and displayed, and is controlled to the non-specific state (for example, the end of the big hit game based on the normal jackpot) It may be configured such that the probability change state is not controlled later). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of whether the control is performed in the specific state.

(Means B4) In any one of the means B1 to B3, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probability variation big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal big hit symbol). , A specific state that is different from the advantageous state and that can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high-probability state (probability variation state)) that is easier to control to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low-probability state) A control means (for example, a part that executes step 052IWS2206 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) is provided, and the specific state control means is a specific area (for example, a portion when the advantageous state is controlled). It is possible to control to a specific state based on the fact that the game medium (for example, a game ball) has passed through the V area 052IW104) (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)), step 052IWS2404. S2405, S2204 to S2206 are executed), in the case where the first specific display result is derived and displayed, as compared with the case where the second specific display result is derived and displayed, a high rate when the advantageous state is controlled. As a result, the game medium passes through the specific area (as shown in FIG. 10-11(1), in the big hit game based on the probability variation big hit, the opening period of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 is long. On the other hand, FIG. 10-11(2). As shown in, in the big hit game based on the normal big hit, the opening period of the V area opening/closing plate 052IW101 may be extremely short.). With such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

(Means B5) In any one of the means B1 to B4, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, probability variation big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, normal big hit symbol). , The first specific display result is derived and displayed is more advantageous to the player than the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, it is controlled to a probable state after the jackpot game is over). The variable display execution means derives and displays the special display result in the variable display of the second identification information during execution of the variable display of the first identification information corresponding to the second specific display result. , The variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed by a predetermined display result (for example, in the modification 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103), when the answer is N in step 052IWS1128A, steps 052IWS1129A and S1130A). 10-67(B).), Special display in the variable display of the first identification information during execution of the variable display of the second identification information corresponding to the second specific display result. When the result is derived and displayed, control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the second identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed (for example, in the modification 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)). Does not perform steps 052IWS1126B to S1128B (see FIGS. 10-66 and 10-67(E)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information, in addition to the advantage degree of the display result of the variable display.

(Means B6) In any one of the means B1 to B5, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, probability variation big hit symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, normal big hit symbol). , The first specific display result is derived and displayed is more advantageous to the player than the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, it is controlled to a probable state after the jackpot game is over). A specific state control that is a state different from the advantageous state and that can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability variation state)) that is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state) Means (for example, a portion that executes step 052IWS2206 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)), the variable display execution means, when being controlled to a specific state, the first identification information and Based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information while the variable display of one of the second identification information is being performed and the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result is being executed. Then, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed by a predetermined display result (for example, in the modified example 4, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines that the result is Y in steps 052IWS1131A and S1131B). Steps 052 IWS1129A and S1130A are executed (see FIGS. 10-68 and 10-69), and when one of the first identification information and the second identification information is varied, the identification information is changed. When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information while the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result is being performed, the variable display of the one identification information is displayed as the predetermined display result. The control for deriving and displaying is not performed. -68, see FIGS. 10-69)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of whether or not the display is controlled to the specific state, in addition to the advantage degree of the display result of the variable display.

Note that the structure shown by the characteristic part 052IW can be appropriately combined with the structure shown by the characteristic part 21TM to form a gaming machine. For example, the configuration for changing the set value indicated by the characteristic portion 21TM is applied to the characteristic portion 052IW so that the setting value suggesting effect can be executed or the small hit RUSH continuous suggesting effect can be executed. , Right hitting notification can be executed, over-winning suggestion effect can be executed, small hit prize suggestion effect can be executed, prize ball number display suggestion effect can be executed You may do it. In addition, for example, the configuration that can change the set value shown in the characteristic unit 21TM is applied to the characteristic unit 052IW, and while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed, it is a small hit in the variable display of the other special symbol. In that case, the variable display of one of the special symbols may be removed, and the variable display may be forcibly stopped and displayed or the variable display may be continued.

Further, when the configuration shown by the characteristic unit 021TM is applied, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the setting value may be suggested by changing the mode of the ending effect. In this case, for example, in the ending effect, a mode transition notification including a small hit RUSH, a chance mode, etc. is executed, a card forgetting prevention notification such as a prepaid card is executed, or a maker logo is displayed. It is configured to suggest the set value by changing the display mode of the mode transition notification, the card forgetting prevention notification, the manufacturer logo display, and the display mode of the image displayed at the same time. You may.

[Explanation on Characteristic Part 18TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 18TM will be described. In the present embodiment, as shown in the above (description regarding the characteristic part 052IW), the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be simultaneously executed in parallel.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the game state, there are a normal state (low probability/non-KT state) and a KT state in which a small hit is more likely than in the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. In this characteristic portion 18TM, the gaming state is controlled to a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state: normal state), and a low probability and first KT state (low probability/first KT state: time saving). State), a high probability and a first KT state (high probability/first KT state; probability variation state), and a high probability and a second KT state (high probability/second KT state: small hit RUSH) State).

(Relationship between game state and production design and production mode)
First, each game state (low-probability/non-KT state: normal state, low-probability/first KT state: time saving state, high-probability/first KT state: probable variation state, and high-probability/second KT state: small hit RUSH state) The relationship between each effect design (decorative design, first small design, and second small design) and each effect mode (day mode, night mode, cloudy mode, rain mode, and typhoon mode) will be described in detail. In this embodiment, the symbols displayed in the upper right and upper left portions of the image display device 5, which are smaller than the decorative symbols, and whether the special symbols are variably displayed and the display result of the special symbols are displayed. Is called a small design. The variable display of small symbols can be executed in parallel with the variable display of special symbols, and the stop display of small symbols can also be executed in parallel with the stop display of special symbols. Then, the first small symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is variably displayed and stopped, and the area in the upper left part of the screen of the image display device 5 is arranged from the left to the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, And the first small symbol display area 5r1, and the second small symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in a variable display and stopped, the area on the upper right part of the screen of the image display device 5 is the second small symbol display area 5l2 from the left, The second small symbol display area 5c2 and the second small symbol display area 5r2.

The first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 have a smaller display area than the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The second small symbol display areas 51, 5c2, 5r2 have a smaller display area than the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Therefore, the visibility of the first small design is lower than that of the decorative design, and the visibility of the second small design is lower than that of the decorative design.

11-1 and 11-2 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of decorative symbols, small symbols, and background images corresponding to the gaming state. In the present embodiment, variable display of decorative symbols is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Here, there is a case where the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and a case where the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. The variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol of the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol is different depending on the game state. In the following description, of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol is referred to as a main symbol, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol do not correspond to the decorative symbol. Special symbols are called sub-symbols.

That is, the state where the main symbol is the first special symbol and the sub symbol is the second special symbol is that in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1, corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol. The variable display of one small symbol is executed, and in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the second small symbol display area 512, In 5c2 and 5r2, the variable display of the second small symbol is executed corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, the state where the main symbol is the second special symbol and the sub symbol is the first special symbol means that, in the second small symbol display areas 51, 5c2, 5r2, the second special symbol is displayed corresponding to the variable display. The variable display of the two small symbols is executed, and in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, and the first small symbol display area 511, In 5c1 and 5r1, the variable display of the first small symbol is executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol.

As the gaming state in the present embodiment, as described above, "low certainty/non-KT state" (sometimes referred to as normal state) corresponding to the low certainty low base state, and "low low" corresponding to the low certainty high base state. Probability/first KT state" (sometimes referred to as "time saving state"), "high precision/first KT state" (sometimes referred to as probable variation state) corresponding to the highly accurate high base state, and highly accurate low base state There is a corresponding “high accuracy/second KT state” (sometimes referred to as a small hit RUSH state). And, when the game state is controlled to (i) low probability/non-KT state (normal state), the main symbol is the first special symbol and the sub symbol is the second special symbol. On the other hand, when the game state is controlled to (ii) low-accuracy/first KT state, (iii) high-accuracy/first KT state, (iv) high-accuracy/second KT state is controlled In either case, the main symbol is the second special symbol, and the sub symbol is the first special symbol.

That is, in the case of (i), the decorative symbol and the first small symbol are information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the second small symbol is the information corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. However, in the case of (ii) to (iv), the decorative symbol and the second small symbol are information corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, and the first small symbol is the first special symbol. The information corresponds to the variable display. In the following description, “special figure 1” in the figure indicates the first special symbol, and “special figure 2” in the figure indicates the second special symbol.

FIG. 11-1(A) is a low-probability/non-KT state (normal state) in the gaming state, the main symbol is the first special symbol, and the image display device 5 when the sub symbol is the second special symbol. It is a figure which shows the example of the image displayed on. Further, FIG. 11-1 (B), the game state is a low probability / first KT state (time saving state), the main symbol is the second special symbol, the image is displayed when the sub symbol is the first special symbol FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the device 5. 11-2 (C1) to (C3), the gaming state is a high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state), the main symbol is the second special symbol, and the sub symbol is the first special symbol. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the image display device 5 at times. Further, FIG. 11-2 (D1) to (D3), the gaming state is a high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the main symbol is the second special symbol, and the sub symbol is the first special symbol. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the image display device 5 at the time.

As shown in FIGS. 11-1 and 11-2, in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, a first reservation display area for displaying the first reservation memory number (0 to 4 first reservation displays 18TM010). 18TM011 is provided, and in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5, a second hold display area 18TM021 for displaying the second hold storage number (0 to 4 second hold displays 18TM020) is provided. Further, in the lower center part of the screen of the image display device 5, active display which is information corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed and also information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol as the main symbol being executed. An active display area 18TM031 for displaying 18TM030 is provided.

Further, a first reserved memory number special display area 18TM015 for displaying the first reserved memory number is provided in the left part of the screen of the image display device 5 (upper part of the first reserved display area 18TM011). A second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 for displaying the second reserved storage number is provided in the right part of the screen (above the second reserved display area 18TM021). Then, as described above, in the upper left part of the screen of the image display device 5, the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 for displaying the first small symbol corresponding to the first special symbol are provided. In the upper right part of the screen of the display device 5, second small symbol display areas 51, 5c2, 5r2 for displaying the second small symbol corresponding to the second special symbol are provided.

Here, the number of objects (circular images) corresponding to the first number of pending storages is displayed in the first pending display area 18TM011, and the number of second pending storages is displayed in the second pending display area 18TM021. A number of objects (round images) are displayed. On the other hand, in the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015, the first reserved storage number is numerically displayed, and in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025, the second reserved storage number is numerically displayed. It The display range of the objects in the first reserved display area 18TM011 is wider than the display range of the numerical value in the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015, and the first reserved display area 18TM011 has the first reserved memory number The memory number special display area 18TM015 is displayed with higher visibility. In addition, the display range of the objects in the second reserved display area 18TM021 is wider than the display range of the numerical value in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025, and the second reserved display area 18TM021 has the second reserved memory number 2 The number of reserved memories is displayed with higher visibility than the special display area 18TM025.

Further, in the first hold display area 18TM011, when the main symbol is the first special symbol and the sub symbol is the second special symbol (that is, the game state is (i) low probability/non-KT state (normal state) ))), the number of objects corresponding to the first reserved memory number is displayed, but when the main symbol is the second special symbol and the sub symbol is the first special symbol (that is, the game state is Any one of (ii) low accuracy/first KT status (time saving status), (iii) high accuracy/first KT status (probability change status), and (iv) high accuracy/second KT status (small hit RUSH status) , When the object itself is hidden. In this way, in the first hold display area 18TM011, objects corresponding to the first hold storage number are displayed according to the game state. On the other hand, in the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015, the first reserved storage number is displayed regardless of the game state (when the game state is any of (ii) to (iv)). Therefore, the player confirms the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015 even in the game state (any of (ii) to (iv)) in which the object is not displayed in the first reserved display area 18TM011. It is possible to grasp the first number of reserved memories.

Further, in the second hold display area 18TM021, when the main symbol is the second special symbol and the sub symbol is the first special symbol (that is, the game state is (ii) low probability/first KT state (time saving state ), (iii) high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state), and (iv) high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state)), corresponding to the second reserved memory number. Although the number of objects is displayed, when the main symbol is the first special symbol and the sub symbol is the second special symbol (that is, the gaming state is (i) low certainty/non-KT state (normal state) , When the object itself is hidden. In this way, the second hold display area 18TM021 displays objects corresponding to the second hold storage number according to the game state. On the other hand, in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025, the second reserved storage number is displayed regardless of the gaming state (even when the gaming state is (i)). Therefore, the player can confirm the second reserved storage number by checking the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 even in the game state (i) in which the object is not displayed in the second reserved display area 18TM021. You can

Further, in the active display area 18TM031, regardless of the game state, among the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the object corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol which is the main symbol is displayed and becomes the sub symbol. The object corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is not displayed.

The example shown in FIG. 11-1(A) shows the screen of the image display device 5 when the game state is controlled to the low certainty/non-KT state (normal state). When the game state is controlled to the low accuracy/non-KT state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the daytime mode. When the effect mode is the daytime mode, a "daytime image" representing a daytime landscape including the sun and mountains is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern.

In the present example, when the first number of pending storages is 4 and the number of second pending storages is 2, the variable display of the first special symbol which is the main symbol and the second symbol which is the sub symbol The variable display of special symbols is executed concurrently in parallel. Further, the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015 displays "4", the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 displays "2", and the first reserved display area 18TM011 displays four first storage areas. The hold display 18TM010 is displayed. Further, in the active display area 18TM031, an active display 18TM030 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the first special symbol which is the main symbol) is displayed. Further, the variable display of decorative symbols (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is the main symbol) is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and the first in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1. The variable display of the small symbols (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed, and the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the sub symbol) in the second small symbol display areas 51, 5c2, 5r2. ) Variable display is being executed.

The example shown in FIG. 11-1(B) shows the screen of the image display device 5 when the game state is controlled to the low certainty/first KT state (time saving state). When the game state is controlled to the low accuracy/first KT state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the night mode. When the effect mode is the night mode, a "night image" representing a night landscape including the night sky and mountains is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern.

In this example, when the first number of reserved storages is 2 and the number of second reserved storages is 4, the variable display of the first special symbol which is the sub symbol and the second which is the main symbol The variable display of special symbols is executed concurrently in parallel. Also, "2" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015, "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025, and four second display areas are displayed in the second reserved display area 18TM021. The hold display 18TM020 is displayed. Further, in the active display area 18TM031, an active display 18TM030 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is displayed. Further, the variable display of decorative symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and the first in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1. The variable display of the small symbols (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is the sub symbol) is executed, and the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) in the second small symbol display areas 51, 5c2, 5r2. ) Variable display is being executed.

11-2 (C1) to (C3) are diagrams showing the screen of the image display device 5 when the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state). When the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state, the player can select one of the effect modes from the cloudy mode, the rain mode, and the typhoon mode. Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to one of the selected effect modes.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-2 (C1), a “cloudy image” representing a cloudy landscape including clouds is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern in correspondence with the effect mode being the cloudy mode. .. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 11-2 (C2), the rain mode is used as the background image of the decorative pattern, corresponding to the effect mode being the rain mode, that is, a “rain image”. Is displayed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11-2 (C3), in response to the effect mode being the typhoon mode, a “typhoon” showing a landscape of a typhoon including clouds, wind, and rain as the background image of the decorative pattern. "Image" is displayed.

In the example shown in FIGS. 11-2 (C1) to (C3), the first reserved memory number is 2 and when the second reserved memory number is 4, the first special symbol that is a sub symbol The variable display and the variable display of the second special symbol which is the main symbol are simultaneously executed in parallel. Also, "2" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015, "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025, and four second display areas are displayed in the second reserved display area 18TM021. The hold display 18TM020 is displayed. Further, in the active display area 18TM031, an active display 18TM030 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is displayed. Further, the variable display of decorative symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and the first in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1. The variable display of the small symbols (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is the sub symbol) is executed, and the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) in the second small symbol display areas 51, 5c2, 5r2. ) Variable display is being executed.

11-2 (D1) to (D3) are diagrams showing the screen of the image display device 5 when the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). When the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state, the player can select one of the effect modes from the cloudy mode, the rain mode, and the typhoon mode. Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to one of the selected effect modes.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-2 (D1), a "cloudy image" representing a cloudy landscape including clouds is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, corresponding to the effect mode being the cloudy mode. .. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11-2 (D2), a rainy image showing a rainy landscape including clouds and rain as a background image of a decorative pattern corresponding to the effect mode being a rainy mode. Is displayed. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 11-2 (D3), the typhoon landscape including clouds, wind, and rain is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern in response to the effect mode being the typhoon mode. "Image" is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-2 (D1) to (D3), the first reserved memory number is 2 and when the second reserved memory number is 4, the first special symbol that is a sub symbol The variable display and the variable display of the second special symbol which is the main symbol are simultaneously executed in parallel. Also, "2" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015, "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025, and four second display areas are displayed in the second reserved display area 18TM021. The hold display 18TM020 is displayed. Further, in the active display area 18TM031, an active display 18TM030 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is displayed. Further, the variable display of decorative symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and the first in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1. The variable display of the small symbols (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is the sub symbol) is executed, and the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) in the second small symbol display areas 51, 5c2, 5r2. ) Variable display is being executed.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-2 (C1) and (D1), when the effect mode is controlled to the cloudy mode, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, numerical symbols (in this example, "0" to "9") and a special design 18TM050 (in this example, a decorative design in which the character "OPEN" is shown in an elliptical object is a decorative design for notifying the occurrence of a small hit). The decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and in the second small symbol display areas 512, 5c2, 5r2, the variable display of the second small symbols consisting only of numerical symbols (in this example, "0" to "9") is performed. ..

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-2 (C2) and (D2), when the effect mode is controlled to the rain mode, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, numerical symbols (in this example, “0”) 〜“9”) variable display of decorative symbols is performed, and in the second small symbol display areas 512, 5c2, 5r2, the second consisting only of numerical symbols (“0” to “9” in this example) A variable display of small symbols is displayed.

Similarly, as shown in FIGS. 11-2 (C3) and (D3), when the effect mode is controlled to the typhoon mode, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, numerical symbols (in this example, “0 Variable display of decorative symbols consisting only of "-" to "9") is performed, and in the second small symbol display areas 51, 5c2, 5r2, a number consisting of only numerical symbols ("0" to "9" in this example) The variable display of 2 small symbols is performed.

In the present embodiment, regardless of the game state, and regardless of the effect mode, the symbols forming the second small symbol are numerical symbols of "0" to "9", and the second small symbol is variably displayed and stopped. The displayed areas are the second small symbol display areas 51, 5c2, 5r2. That is, in the present embodiment, regardless of the game state, and regardless of the effect mode, the second small symbol that is variably displayed is common, and the region in which variably displayed is also common.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 11-2, when the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state), the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). When it is, the variable display mode of the second small symbol is common, and the variable display area of the second small symbol is also common. Further, regardless of the effect mode, the variable display mode of the second small symbol is common, and the variable display area of the second small symbol is also common. According to such a configuration, a period in which the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state) and a period in which the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) With that, regardless of which production mode is controlled, the display mode and display area of the second small symbol can be made common, so that the player can accurately set the second small symbol even if the production mode is switched. It becomes possible to grasp.

As shown in FIG. 11-2(C1), when the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability variation state), and as shown in FIG. 11-2(D1), the gaming state is highly accurate. In each of the cases where the second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is controlled, a common "cloudy image" can be displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-2 (C2), when the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state), and as shown in FIG. 11-2 (D2), the game state is In either case, the common "rain image" can be displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern depending on whether the high-precision/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is controlled. In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-2 (C3), when the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state), and as shown in FIG. 11-2 (D3), the game state is In both cases of controlling to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), a common "typhoon image" can be displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-2 (D1) to (D3), when the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the game state is high-accuracy/second. Different from the case of controlling to the 1KT state (probability variation state), it corresponds to the control to the high-precision/second KT state (small hitting RUSH state) in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. The special display 18TM100 is displayed. The special display 18TM100 includes a character "RUSH" for informing that the small hit RUSH state is present, and the background image (cloudy image, cloudy image, which corresponds to the presentation mode (any one of cloudy mode, rain mode, typhoon mode) at that time. Either a rain image or a typhoon image).

Here, the special display 18TM100 is displayed with a higher priority than the background image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the background image and is superimposed and displayed so as to be seen by the player in the foreground). The character "RUSH" included in the special display 18TM100 may cause an animation operation of moving within the area of the special display 18TM100. For example, the character "RUSH" may cause an animation operation to move in the area of the special display 18TM100 from the upper left direction to the lower right direction. Such an animation operation can further enhance the effect effect in the small hit RUSH state.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-2 (D1) to (D3), the area in which the special display 18TM100 in the upper right part of the screen is displayed is the second small symbol display areas 512 and 5c2 in any of the effect modes. 5r2 and the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025. Similarly, the area where the special display 18TM100 is displayed in the lower left part of the screen does not overlap with the active display area 18TM031 and does not overlap with the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, when the gaming state is controlled to either the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state) or the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the fog mode is controlled. It is possible, and the background image can be a “cloudy image”. In addition, it is possible to control to the rain mode and to control the background image when the gaming state is controlled to either the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state) or the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). It can be a rain image”. In addition, it is possible to control to the typhoon mode when the game state is controlled to either the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state) or the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), and the background image is displayed as " Typhoon image”.

In this way, it is possible to control to a common effect mode when controlled in the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability variation state) and in the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). Since it is possible to control to a common effect mode, it is possible to share effect data such as a background image. It is possible to control to a common effect mode between the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state) and the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), and execute effects based on common effect data (for example, background image). By making it possible, compared to the case of providing an individual (specific to that gaming state) effect mode for the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state) and the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), It is possible to suppress the storage capacity of the effect data and reduce the development load of the effect data.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11B, the display mode (first reserved display mode) of the first reserved storage number in the first reserved display area 18TM011 is the high-accuracy/first KT state (probably changed state). ) And the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) regardless of which production mode is controlled. In addition, the display mode of the second reserved storage number (mode of the second reserved display) in the second reserved display area 18TM021 is also the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state) and the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). It is common regardless of which production mode is controlled. Further, the display mode of the active display in the active display area 18TM031 is also irrespective of whether the production mode is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state) or the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). It is common.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is irrelevant whether the first reserved display area 18TM011 is controlled to a high precision/first KT state (probability variation state) or a high precision/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). However, the second hold display area 18TM021 is also common regardless of whether the production mode of the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state) or the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is controlled. The active display area 18TM031 is also common regardless of whether the production mode is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state) or the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state).

In this way, at least the period when the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state) and the period when the gaming state is controlled to the high-probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). , Regardless of which production mode is controlled, the display mode of the corresponding display (first hold display, second hold display, active display) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is made common, and the correspondence display ( The areas in which the first hold display, the second hold display, and the active display are displayed are made common. As a result, the player has a period in which the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability variation state) and a period in which the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). Thus, even when the effect mode is changed, the number of reserved memories (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number) can be easily grasped, and whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Can be easily grasped.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B, the non-KT state (normal state), the low accuracy/first KT state (time saving state), and the high accuracy/first KT state (probability change). State) and high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the display mode of the correspondence display (first hold display, second hold display, active display) is made common, and the correspondence display (first hold display) The display, the second hold display, and the active display) are shared. Not limited to such a form, the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state) or the high-accuracy/second KT state is related to one or both of the non-KT state (normal state) and the low-probability/first KT state (time saving state). The correspondence display may be displayed in a mode different from the state (small hit RUSH state), and different from the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state) or the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). Corresponding display may be displayed in the area.

That is, in the high-accuracy state (high-accuracy/first KT state, high-accuracy/second KT state), the production mode is shared between the first KT state and the second KT state, while in the low-accuracy state (non-KT state). State, low-accuracy/first KT state), the display mode of the correspondence display in the low-accuracy state is changed to the high-accuracy state in response to being controlled to the effect mode (day mode, night mode) different from the high-accuracy state. The display mode of the corresponding display in the low accuracy state may be different from the display mode of the corresponding display in the high accuracy state.

In this way, at least the period when the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state) and the period when the gaming state is controlled to the high-probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). It is preferable that the display mode of the correspondence display is made common and the area in which the correspondence display is made is made common regardless of which effect mode is controlled.

Note that the display mode (or display area) of the corresponding display may be changed depending on which effect mode is controlled, without being limited to such a form. However, a common effect is produced during the period when the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability variation state) and the period where the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). When the mode is controlled, the display mode (and display area) of the corresponding display is made common.

For example, when the effect mode is controlled to the cloudy mode, the corresponding display (active display, hold display) is a mode in which the character "cloud" is displayed on the round object, and the effect mode is the rain mode. When it is controlled, the corresponding display (active display, hold display) is a mode in which the character "rain" is displayed on the round object, and when the effect mode is controlled to the typhoon mode, The correspondence display (active display, hold display) is a mode in which the character "stand" is displayed on a round object. In this way, when the display mode of the corresponding display is changed for each effect mode, the period in which the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state) and the gaming state is the high-accuracy/second KT state. When the effect mode is controlled in the same period as (the small hit RUSH state) (for example, when the effect mode is controlled to the cloudy mode), the display mode of the corresponding display is the same. It is assumed that there is a certain correspondence (for example, the correspondence display is an image in which the character "cloud" is displayed on a round object).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the first reserved storage number in the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015 is as follows: non-KT state (normal state), low probability/first KT state (time saving state), high accuracy/first state. It is assumed to be common regardless of which game state is controlled, the 1 KT state (probability change state) or the high precision/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). In addition, the display mode of the second reserved memory number in the second reserved memory number special display area 18TM025 is also the non-KT state (normal state), the low-probability/first KT state (time saving state), the high-probability/first KT state (probability change state). ), and the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) regardless of which game state is controlled.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015 has a non-KT state (normal state), a low accuracy/first KT status (time saving status), a high accuracy/first KT status (probability change status), and a high accuracy. It is common regardless of which gaming state is controlled, the certain/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). In addition, the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 is also in the non-KT state (normal state), the low-accuracy/first KT state (time saving state), the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state), and the high-accuracy/second KT state. It is common regardless of which gaming state (small hit RUSH state) is controlled.

In this way, regarding the position in the screen of the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015 and the display mode of the first reserved storage number displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015, it depends on the game state. No, and it is common regardless of the effect mode. Further, regarding the position in the screen of the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025, and the display mode of the second reserved storage number displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025, regardless of the game state, Further, it is common regardless of the effect mode. As a result, even when an effect corresponding to each effect mode is executed on the image display device 5, the player can accurately grasp the number of reserved memories (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number). It will be possible.

(Transition of game state)
In the present embodiment, in the low-accuracy/non-KT state (normal state), the player aims at the left side of the game area and performs a game ball firing operation (left hitting). Therefore, in the normal state, mainly the starting winning to the first starting winning opening occurs, and mainly the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-29, since the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in the low certainty/non-KT state (normal state), it is mainly 9%. Probability [10R probability big hit], 56% [6R probability big hit], and 35% [6R normal big hit].

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when the [10R certainty variation big hit] occurs in the low probability/non-KT state (normal state), the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state after the end of the big hit game) ). In addition, when [6R probability variation big hit] occurs in the low probability/non-KT state (normal state), it shifts to the high accuracy/first KT state (probability variation state) after the big hit game and the next big hit occurs. The high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state) is maintained until the following. Also, in the low-probability/non-KT state (normal state), if [6R normal big hit] occurs, it shifts to the low-probability/first KT state (time saving state) after the big hit game, and the next big hit occurs. The low accuracy/first KT state (time saving state) is maintained until the variable display is completed 50 times.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the KT state (high accuracy/first KT status (probability variation status), low accuracy/first KT status (time saving status), high accuracy/second KT status (small hit RUSH status) Aiming to the right of the game area, the game ball is fired (right-handed). Therefore, in the KT state, mainly the starting winning to the second starting winning opening occurs, and mainly the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-29, since the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in the KT state, [15R probability change big hit] or at a rate of 15% mainly. [2R probability variation big hit], [6R probability variation big hit] occurs at a rate of 50%, [2R normal variation big hit] occurs at a rate of 35%.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when the 10R probability variation big hit or [2R probability variation big hit] occurs in the high probability/first KT state (probability variation state), the high accuracy/second KT state (after the jackpot game ends) The small hit RUSH state) is maintained, and the high-precision/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs. In addition, when [6R probability variation big hit] occurs in the high probability/first KT state (probability variation state), it shifts to the high precision/first KT state (probability variation state) after the end of the big hit game, and the next big hit occurs. The high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state) is maintained until the following. In the present embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of [6R probability variation big hit] is 50% in total (see FIG. 10-5 ), so once highly accurate/ When the first KT state (probability change state) is reached, the highly accurate/first KT state (probability change state) is looped at a rate of 50%. In addition, when [2R normal big hit] occurs in the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state), after the big hit game ends, the low-precision/first KT state (time saving state) is entered, and the next big hit occurs. The low accuracy/first KT state (time saving state) is maintained until the variable display is completed 50 times.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when [10R certainty variation big hit] or [2R certainty variation big hit] occurs in the low probability/first KT state (time saving state), high probability/second KT after the big hit game ends. It shifts to the state (small hit RUSH state) and the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs. In addition, when [6R probability variation big hit] occurs in the low probability/first KT state (time saving state), it shifts to the high accuracy/first KT state (probability variation state) after the end of the big hit game, and the next big hit occurs. The high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state) is maintained until the following. Also, when [2R normal big hit] occurs in the low probability/first KT state (time saving state), after the big hit game ends, the low accuracy/first KT state (time saving state) is entered and the next big hit occurs. The low accuracy/first KT state (time saving state) is maintained until the variable display is completed 50 times. In the present embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of being [2R normal big hit] is 35% (see FIGS. 10-5(D) and (E)). Once the low accuracy/first KT state (time saving state) is reached, the low accuracy/first KT state (time saving state) is looped at a rate of 35%. In addition, when [6R normal big hit] or [2R normal big hit] occurs and the low probability/first KT state (time saving state) occurs, the next big hit does not occur and the variable display of 50 times ends 10 to 29, the low probability/non-KT state (normal state) is entered.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when [10R certainty variation big hit] or [2R certainty variation big hit] occurs in the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), high accuracy/ The state shifts to the second KT state (small hit RUSH state), and the high-precision/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs. In the present embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of being [10R certainty variation big hit] or [2R certainty variation big hit] is 15% (FIG. 10-5(D)). , (E)), once the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is reached, the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) loops at a rate of 15%. In addition, when [6R probability variation big hit] occurs in the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), it shifts to the high-precision/first KT state (probability change state) after the end of the big hit game, and the next big hit. The high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state) is maintained until occurs. In addition, when the [2R normal big hit] occurs in the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the low-precision/first KT state (time saving state) is entered after the end of the big hit game, and the next big hit. The low probability/first KT state (time saving state) is maintained until the occurrence of or the end of the variable display of 50 times.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in accordance with the type of big hit, the proportion of which of the high-precise/first KT state (probability change state) and the high-precise/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is controlled Are different, and the game value (number of prize balls) finally given to the player greatly differs depending on which game state is controlled. Therefore, the player pays attention to the big hit type when the big hit occurs.

(Example of production in each production mode)
FIG. 11-3, FIG. 11-4, and FIG. 11-5 show examples of effects in each effect mode when the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). .. 11-3(A1) to (A3) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an effect image when the variable display result of the second special symbol is "small hit" when the effect mode is the cloudy mode. 11-4 (B1) to (B3) are explanatory views showing an example of the effect image when the variable display result of the second special symbol is "small hit" when the effect mode is the rain mode. Yes, FIGS. 11-5 (C1) to (C3) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an effect image when the variable display result of the second special symbol is “small hit” when the effect mode is the typhoon mode. Is.

(Small hit in cloudy mode)
As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A1), when the player selects the cloudy mode as the effect mode while the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect mode. Controlled to cloudy mode. When the production mode is the cloudy mode and the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state, "cloudy image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. A special display 18TM100 corresponding to being controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is displayed on the section and the lower left part of the screen.

The special display 18TM100 is superimposed and displayed on the background image with a higher priority than the background image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the background image and is superimposed and displayed so that the player can see it in the foreground). When the CUP 103 is performing the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol at the same time, the effect control CPU 120, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the decorative symbol The variable display (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is executed, and in the second small symbol display areas 51, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5, the second small symbol (second special symbol) (Information corresponding to) is executed, and in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5, the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is a sub symbol) The variable display of is being executed.

The effect control CPU 120 displays “2” in the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015 of the image display device 5 because the first reserved storage number is 2, and the second reserved storage number is 4. Therefore, “4” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 18TM031 displays the active display 18TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second reserved display area 18TM021 displays four second reserved displays 18TM020.

When in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 11-3(A1), the image display device 5 displays a small hit continuous number display indicating the number of consecutive small hits in the second KT state. , A small winning continuous award ball number display indicating the number of award balls given during the period in which the small hits continuously occur in the second KT state is displayed. In this example, it is assumed that after the 10R certainty variation big hit occurs and the state is shifted to the second KT state, small hits have occurred three times by the present time, and as shown in FIG. A case is shown in which characters such as "third time" are displayed as the number display. Also, during the big hit game based on the first 10R probability variation big hit, 15 × 10 balls × 10 rounds = 1500 prize balls are obtained, and for each subsequent small hit, 10 × 3 balls = 30 prize balls are obtained. Based on the fact that 30×3=90 prize balls have been obtained by three small hits, a total of 1590 prize balls have been obtained, and FIG. 11-3 (A1) As shown in, the case where a character such as "1590pt" is displayed as the small winning continuous award ball number display is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (A2), the CPU 120 for effect control corresponds to the fact that the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol becomes the “small hit” symbol, which is displayed in the symbol display area 5L. While stopping the number symbol ("1" in this example), stop any number symbol ("8" in this example) in the symbol display area 5R, the special symbol 18TM050 (oval) in the symbol display area 5C. It is a decorative pattern in which the character "OPEN" is shown in the shape object, and the decorative pattern which notifies the occurrence of a small hit) is stopped. In this way, in the present embodiment, when the effect mode is controlled to the cloudy mode, the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is "small hit", corresponding to the symbol display areas 5L, 5R. At the same time, the numerical symbols are fixedly stopped, and the special symbol 18TM050 is fixedly stopped in the symbol display area 5C. Thereby, even after the combination of the numerical symbols that do not reach the symbol display areas 5L and 5R is stopped, the player can expect a small hit (the special symbol 18TM050 is stopped in the symbol display area 5C). it can.

Further, the effect control CPU 120, in the cloudy mode, based on the small symbol corresponding to the special symbol 18TM050 to be fixedly stopped when a small hit is set to "0", in the second small symbol display area 512, "1" of the second small symbol corresponding to "1" of the decorative symbol (numeral symbol), the second small symbol display area 5c2, "0" of the second small symbol corresponding to the special symbol 18TM050, the second small symbol In the display area 5r2, the second small symbol "8" corresponding to the decorative symbol (numeric symbol) "8" is fixedly stopped. Furthermore, the occurrence of a small hit is informed by displaying the character "small hit!" on the upper part of the image display device 5. And since the game state is controlled to the small hitting game state, the effect control CPU 120 updates the small hitting continuous number display to "fourth time".

Next, during the period when the game state is controlled to the small hit game state and the special variable winning ball device 17 is open, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (A3), the effect control CPU 120, the active display area 18TM031. The active display 18TM030 displayed on the screen and the four second reserved display 18TM020 displayed on the second reserved display area 18TM021 are erased, and the image display device 5 displays a character and "small hitting attacker open!" Display dialogue.

In addition, during the period when the special variable winning ball device 17 is open, three game balls are won in the special winning opening, and the number of prize balls is further increased by 10 balls×3 balls=30 balls, resulting in a total of 1620 balls. I shall. In this case, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (A3), the effect control CPU 120 displays three “+10” images at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the small winning continuous medium prize ball number display. 1620pt”.

(Small hits in rain mode)
As shown in FIG. 11-4 (B1), when the player selects the rain mode as the effect mode while the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state, the effect mode is set by the effect control CPU 120. Controlled in rain mode. When the production mode is the rain mode and the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state, the "rain image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. A special display 18TM100 corresponding to being controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is displayed on the section and the lower left part of the screen.

The special display 18TM100 is superimposed and displayed on the background image with a higher priority than the background image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the background image and is superimposed and displayed so that the player can see it in the foreground). When the CUP 103 is performing the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol at the same time, the effect control CPU 120, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the decorative symbol The variable display (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is executed, and in the second small symbol display areas 51, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5, the second small symbol (second special symbol) (Information corresponding to) is executed, and in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5, the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is a sub symbol) The variable display of is being executed.

The effect control CPU 120 displays “2” in the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015 of the image display device 5 because the first reserved storage number is 2, and the second reserved storage number is 4. Therefore, “4” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 18TM031 displays the active display 18TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second reserved display area 18TM021 displays four second reserved displays 18TM020.

When in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 11-4(B1), the image display device 5 displays a small hit continuous number display indicating the number of consecutive small hits in the second KT state. , A small winning continuous award ball number display indicating the number of award balls given during the period in which the small hits continuously occur in the second KT state is displayed. In this example, it is assumed that after the 10R certainty variation big hit occurs and the state is shifted to the second KT state, the small hits have occurred three times by the present time, and as shown in FIG. A case is shown in which characters such as "third time" are displayed as a numerical display. Also, during the big hit game based on the first 10R probability variation big hit, 15 × 10 balls × 10 rounds = 1500 prize balls are obtained, and for each subsequent small hit, 10 × 3 balls = 30 prize balls are obtained. Based on the fact that 30×3=90 prize balls are obtained by three small hits, a total of 1590 prize balls are obtained, and FIG. 11-4 (B1) As shown in, the case where a character such as "1590pt" is displayed as the small winning continuous award ball number display is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B2), the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the fact that the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is the "small hit" symbol, and corresponds to the number in the symbol display area 5L. The symbol "1", the numerical symbol "3" in the symbol display area 5C, and the numerical symbol "5" in the symbol display area 5R are fixedly stopped. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the effect mode is controlled to the rain mode, the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is "small hit", corresponding to the symbol display areas 5L and 5C. In 5R, a predetermined combination of numerical symbols (in this example, the odd numbered order "135") is fixedly stopped. As a result, even when the combination of decorative symbols (numeral symbols) different from the big hit symbols is stopped in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the player can expect a small hit.

Further, in the rain mode, the effect control CPU 120 sets “135” as the combination of the decorative symbols (numeral symbols) to be fixedly stopped in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R when a small hit occurs. In the second small symbol display area 51, the second small symbol corresponding to "1" of the decorative symbol (numeral symbol), "1", in the second small symbol display area 5c2, the decorative symbol (numeral symbol) of "3" The second small symbol corresponding to "3", the second small symbol display area 5r2, the second small symbol "5" corresponding to the decorative symbol (numeric symbol) "5" is fixedly stopped. Furthermore, the occurrence of a small hit is informed by displaying the character "small hit!" on the upper part of the image display device 5. And since the game state is controlled to the small hitting game state, the effect control CPU 120 updates the small hitting continuous number display to "fourth time".

Next, during the period when the game state is controlled to the small hitting game state and the special variable winning ball device 17 is open, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B3), the effect control CPU 120, the active display area 18TM031. The active display 18TM030 displayed on the screen and the four second reserved display 18TM020 displayed on the second reserved display area 18TM021 are erased, and the image display device 5 displays a character and "small hitting attacker open!" Display dialogue.

In addition, during the period when the special variable winning ball device 17 is open, three game balls are won in the special winning opening, and the number of prize balls is further increased by 10 balls×3 balls=30 balls, resulting in a total of 1620 balls. I shall. In this case, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B3), the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display three “+10” images at the bottom of the screen, and displays the small winning continuous middle prize number display at “1620 pt. To update.

(Small hit in typhoon mode)
As shown in FIG. 11-5 (C1), when the player selects the typhoon mode as the effect mode while the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect mode. Controlled to typhoon mode. When the production mode is the typhoon mode and the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state, the "typhoon image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. A special display 18TM100 corresponding to being controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is displayed on the section and the lower left part of the screen.

The special display 18TM100 is superimposed and displayed on the background image with a higher priority than the background image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the background image and is superimposed and displayed so that the player can see it in the foreground). When the CUP 103 is performing the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol at the same time, the effect control CPU 120, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the decorative symbol The variable display (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is executed, and in the second small symbol display areas 51, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5, the second small symbol (second special symbol) (Information corresponding to) is executed, and in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5, the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is a sub symbol) The variable display of is being executed.

The effect control CPU 120 displays “2” in the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015 of the image display device 5 because the first reserved storage number is 2, and the second reserved storage number is 4. Therefore, “4” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 18TM031 displays the active display 18TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second reserved display area 18TM021 displays four second reserved displays 18TM020.

When in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (C1), the image display device 5 displays a small hit continuous number display indicating the number of consecutive small hits in the second KT state. , A small winning continuous award ball number display indicating the number of award balls given during the period in which the small hits continuously occur in the second KT state is displayed. In this example, it is assumed that after the 10R certainty variation big hit occurs and the state is shifted to the second KT state, small hits have occurred three times by the present time, and as shown in FIG. 11-5 (C1), the small hits continue. A case is shown in which characters such as "third time" are displayed as a numerical display. Also, during the big hit game based on the first 10R probability variation big hit, 15 x 10 balls x 10 rounds = 1500 prize balls are obtained, and after that, 10 x 3 balls = 30 prize balls are obtained for each small hit. Based on the fact that 30×3=90 prize balls are obtained by three small hits, a total of 1590 prize balls are obtained, and FIG. 11-5 (C1). As shown in, the case where a character such as "1590pt" is displayed as the small winning continuous award ball number display is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (C2), the CPU 120 for effect control corresponds to the fact that the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol becomes the “small hit” symbol, whichever is displayed in the symbol display area 5L. That number pattern (“2” in this example), any number pattern (“4” in this example) in the symbol display area 5C, any number symbol (“7” in this example) in the symbol display area 5R Are stopped respectively. Furthermore, an effect image 18TM060 (in this example, a note-shaped image) is added to each of the numerical symbols (“2”, “4”, “7” in this example) stopped in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Overlay display. The effect image 18TM060 is displayed with a higher priority than the decorative pattern (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the decorative pattern and is superimposed and displayed so as to be seen by the player in the foreground). In this way, in the present embodiment, when the effect mode is controlled to the typhoon mode, the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is "small hit", corresponding to the symbol display areas 5L, 5C. On 5R, a combination of decorative designs (numerals) different from the jackpot design is stopped, and an effect image 18TM060 is displayed on each stopped decorative design (numerals). As a result, even when the combination of decorative symbols (numeral symbols) different from the big hit symbols is stopped in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the player can expect a small hit.

Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control, based on the combination of the decorative symbols (numerical symbols) to be fixedly stopped in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the second small symbol display area 512 displays the decorative symbol (numeral symbol) "2." "2" of the second small symbol corresponding to "," in the second small symbol display area 5c2, "4" of the second small symbol corresponding to "4" of the decorative symbol (numeral symbol), second small symbol display area In 5r2, the second small symbol "7" corresponding to the decorative symbol (numeral symbol) "7" is fixedly stopped. Furthermore, the occurrence of a small hit is informed by displaying the character "small hit!" on the upper part of the image display device 5. And since the game state is controlled to the small hitting game state, the effect control CPU 120 updates the small hitting continuous number display to "fourth time".

Next, during the period when the game state is controlled to the small hitting game state and the special variable winning ball device 17 is open, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (C3), the effect control CPU 120, the active display area 18TM031. The active display 18TM030 displayed on the screen and the four second reserved display 18TM020 displayed on the second reserved display area 18TM021 are erased, and the image display device 5 displays a character and "small hitting attacker open!" Display dialogue.

In addition, during the period when the special variable winning ball device 17 is open, three game balls are won in the special winning opening, and the number of prize balls is further increased by 10 balls×3 balls=30 balls, resulting in a total of 1620 balls. I shall. In this case, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (C3), the effect control CPU 120 displays three "+10" images at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the small winning continuous medium prize ball number display as "1620 pt." To update.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, when the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the player produces one of cloudy mode, rain mode, and typhoon mode. The mode can be selected. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-3 (A1) to (A3), when the effect mode is the cloudy mode, when the variable display result of the second special symbol is “small hit”, the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5R is fixedly stopped, and the special symbol 18TM050 is fixedly stopped in the symbol display area 5C to notify the occurrence of a small hit. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 (B1) to (B3), when the effect mode is the rain mode, when the variable display result of the second special symbol is “small hit”, Occurrence of a small hit is informed by stopping the combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "135"), which is the order of odd symbols, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-5 (C1) to (C3), when the effect mode is the typhoon mode, when the variable display result of the second special symbol is "small hit", the symbol display area The occurrence of a small hit is informed by stopping the combination of decorative patterns in which the effect images 18TM060 (in this example, note-shaped images) are superimposed and displayed on 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In this way, the effect for notifying the occurrence of the small hit (the effect when the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped) differs depending on the effect mode, and the player selects the effect mode, and by which effect the small hit occurs. It is also possible to select whether to notify the occurrence. As a result, the effect when a small hit occurs in the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) can be made the player's desired effect, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A2), when the effect mode is the cloudy mode, the numerical symbols (“0” to “9” in this example) and the special symbol 18TM050 (for the elliptical object, “ The decorative pattern including a small hit pattern (in which the character "OPEN" is shown) is displayed in a variable manner. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B2), when the effect mode is the rain mode, the variable display of the decorative design including only the numerical design (in this example, “0” to “9”) is performed. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (C2), when the effect mode is the typhoon mode, the variable display of the decorative symbols including only the numerical symbols (“0” to “9” in this example) is performed. At the same time, when the display result is "small hit", the effect image 18TM060 is displayed in a superimposed manner when the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped. In this way, it is possible to change the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern according to the effect mode, and the gaming state is controlled to the highly accurate state (highly accurate/first KT state, highly accurate/second KT state). It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game while playing.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-3, 11-4, and 11-5, when the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), whichever production mode is controlled Regardless of whether it is displayed, the small hit continuous number display is displayed in the common lower display on the lower right side of the screen, and regardless of which production mode is controlled, the small hit continuous middle prize number display Is displayed in the lower right part of the screen in a common display mode. With such a configuration, the display mode and the display area of the small hit continuous number display can be made common in each effect mode, so that the player can continue the small hits in the second KT state even if the game mode is switched. The number of times can be accurately grasped. Further, in each effect mode, since the display mode and the display area of the small winning continuous award ball number display can be made common, even if the player switches the effect mode, a small hit occurs continuously in the second KT state. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of prize balls awarded during the period.

(Selection period of production mode)
In the present embodiment, (1) gaming state is controlled to a high probability state (high-probability/first KT state (probability change state), high-probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state)) and of the second special symbol. The period during which the variable display (variable display of the second small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is being executed, and (2) is executed corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probability variation jackpot. During the period of the big hit ending, the player can select the effect mode, and during the period that does not correspond to any of (1) and (2), the player cannot select the effect mode. That is, the player can select any one of the effect modes of the cloudy mode, the rain mode, and the typhoon mode only in any one of the periods (1) and (2).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the low probability state (low accuracy/low base state (normal state), low accuracy/high base state (low accuracy/first KT state)), a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) When the variable display of) is being executed, the production mode cannot be selected.

As the probability variation big hit in the present embodiment, (i) The high accuracy/first KT state is controlled after the big hit game state is ended [6R probability variation big hit], and (ii) The high probability/second KT state is controlled after the big hit game state is ended. There is [10R probability variation big hit], and (iii) big hit game state is controlled to a high-precision/second KT state [2R probability variation big hit], and (i) to (iii) big hit type jackpot game status During the big hit ending executed corresponding to the end, the player can select the effect mode. On the other hand, the period of the big hit ending executed in response to the end of the big hit game state of the normal big hit (6R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit) which is controlled to the low accuracy/high base state after the big hit game state ends, is in the production mode. You cannot select.

(Direction mode selection during the jackpot ending period)
Next, an example of an effect when the effect mode is selected during the big hit ending period of the probability variation big hit will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-6 and 11-7. FIG. 11-6 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the effect mode is selected in the big hit ending period of the probability variation big hit, and FIGS. 11-7 (A1) to (A4) show a high accuracy after the big hit ends. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production|presentation image at the time of selecting the production mode in the big hit ending period of [6R probability change big hit] controlled by 1st KT state, and FIG. 11-7 (B1)-(B4) is a big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production|presentation image at the time of selecting a production mode in the big hit ending period of [10R certainty change big hit] or [2R certainty change big hit] which is controlled by the high probability / 2nd KT state after completion.

(High-precision / production mode selection when controlled to the first KT state)
11-6 and 11-7 (A1) regarding performance examples when the performance mode is selected during the big hit ending period of [6R probability change big hit] that is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state) after the big hit. This will be described with reference to (A4).

First, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (A1), when the jackpot type is [6R probability variation jackpot], when the gaming state is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, it corresponds to the start of the jackpot ending period. Then, the effect mode selection period in which the effect mode can be selected is started (timing T1 shown in FIG. 11-6). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect mode selection screen, thereby starting the effect mode selection period.

On the effect mode selection screen, effect mode image display area 18TM250 in which images corresponding to each selectable effect mode (cloudy mode image 18TM200A, rain mode image 18TM200B, typhoon mode image 18TM200C) are displayed, and operation of push button 31B The operation promotion display 18TM210 for notifying that the production mode can be selected by prompting the player to select the production mode by operating the push button 31B, and the remaining period during which the operation of the push button 31B is valid (production mode The time bar 18TM220 for notifying the remaining period of the selection period) is included.

The effect mode image display area 18TM250 is in the center of the screen, the operation prompting display 18TM210 is displayed in the lower left part of the screen, and the time bar 18TM220 is displayed in the lower right part of the screen. The operation prompting display 18TM210 is an image simulating the shape of the push button 210. The character "PUSH" is displayed on the left side of the operation prompting display 18TM210, and the character "Select" is displayed on the right side of the operation prompting display 18TM210. By being displayed, the player is urged to select the effect mode by operating the push button 210. Further, the time bar 18TM220 displays 100% of the remaining time at the beginning of display, that is, at the timing when the effect mode selection period is started, and the ratio of the remaining time gradually decreases as time passes. The remaining time is displayed as 0% at the timing when the effect mode selection period ends.

The effect mode image corresponding to the effect mode currently selected is displayed in effect mode image display area 18TM250. In this example, since the cloudy mode image 18TM200A is displayed as the effect mode image, it means that the cloudy mode is selected as the effect mode. Here, when the push sensor detects that the push button 31B has been operated, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect mode image displayed in the effect mode image display area 18TM250 at the center of the screen to be displayed on the right end of the screen of the image display device 5. While moving, the effect mode image displayed on the left end of the screen is moved to the effect mode image display area 18TM250 at the center of the screen. The effect mode images displayed in the effect mode image display area 18TM250 are switched in the order of the cloudy mode image 18TM200A, the rain mode image 18TM200B, the typhoon mode image 18TM200C, and so on, each time the push button 31B is operated.

Further, the time bar 18TM220 is displayed in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5, and depending on the ratio of the range of the white portion to the entire width of the time bar 18TM220 (0 to 100%), the effect mode in the big hit ending period. The production mode selection period, which is a selectable period, is notified. The effect mode selection period indicated by the time bar 18TM220 is subtracted and updated each time time passes after the initial value (100%) is indicated, and finally reaches the final value (0%). Then, when the time bar 18TM220 reaches the final value (0%), the effect mode corresponding to the effect mode image displayed in the effect mode image display area 18TM250 is controlled. The player operates the push button 31B until the display of the time bar 18TM220 reaches the final value (0%), and the effect mode image to be displayed in the effect mode image display area 18TM250 corresponds to the desired effect mode. Switch to the production mode image.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-7 (A2), in response to the push button 31B being operated (at the timing T2 shown in FIG. 11-6), the effect control CPU 120 causes the rain displayed on the left end of the screen. The mode image 18TM200B is moved to the effect mode image display area 18TM250 in the center of the screen, and the cloudy mode image 18TM200A displayed in the effect mode image display area 18TM250 in the center of the screen is moved to the right end of the screen. At this time, since the rain mode image 18TM200B is displayed in the effect mode image display area 18TM250, the rain mode is selected as the effect mode. Further, the display of the time bar 18TM220 is updated to the remaining 75%, which means that 25% of the entire effect mode selection period has elapsed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (A3), in response to the push button 31B being operated (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-6), the effect control CPU 120 is displayed at the left end of the screen. The typhoon mode image 18TM200C is moved to the effect mode image display area 18TM250 in the center of the screen, and the rain mode image 18TM200B displayed in the effect mode image display area 18TM250 in the center of the screen is moved to the right end of the screen. At this time, since the typhoon mode image 18TM200C is displayed in the effect mode image display area 18TM250, the typhoon mode is selected as the effect mode. Further, the display of the time bar 18TM220 is updated to the remaining 25%, which means that 75% of the entire effect mode selection period has elapsed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (A4), the display of the time bar 18TM220 is updated to the remaining 0%, and at the timing when the rendering mode selection period ends (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 11-6). Based on the typhoon mode image 18TM200C being displayed in the mode image display area 18TM250, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode to be the typhoon mode. When the effect mode is determined to be the typhoon mode, the effect control CPU 120 enlarges and displays the typhoon mode image 18TM200C at the center of the screen to notify that the effect mode is controlled to the typhoon mode.

(High-precision / production mode selection when controlled to the second KT state)
FIG. 11-6 shows a production example in the case where the production mode is selected during the big hit ending period of [10R certainty variation big hit] or [2R certainty variation big hit] which is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) after the big hit ends. 11-7 (B1) to (B4).

First, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (B1), when the jackpot type is [10R probability variation jackpot] or [2R probability variation jackpot], when the gaming state is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the jackpot ending In response to the start of the period, the effect mode selection period in which the effect mode can be selected is started (timing T1 shown in FIG. 11-6). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect mode selection screen, thereby starting the effect mode selection period.

Here, unlike the case where the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability variation state) is controlled after the big hit ends, the production is based on the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) being controlled after the big hit ends. The control CPU 120 causes the characters "RUSH" to blink in the upper part of the screen (above the effect mode image display area 18TM250). By blinking and displaying the character "RUSH", it is possible to inform the player that the high-precision/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is controlled.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-7 (B2), in response to the push button 31B being operated (at the timing of T2 shown in FIG. 11-6), the effect control CPU 120 causes the rain displayed on the left end of the screen. The mode image 18TM200B is moved to the effect mode image display area 18TM250 in the center of the screen, and the cloudy mode image 18TM200A displayed in the effect mode image display area 18TM250 in the center of the screen is moved to the right end of the screen. At this time, since the rain mode image 18TM200B is displayed in the effect mode image display area 18TM250, the rain mode is selected as the effect mode. Also here, the word "RUSH" is displayed blinking on the upper part of the screen, so that the rain mode corresponding to the rain mode image 18TM200B is the production mode corresponding to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). The player can grasp. Further, the display of the time bar 18TM220 is updated to the remaining 75%, which means that 25% of the entire effect mode selection period has elapsed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (B3), in response to the push button 31B being operated (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-6), the effect control CPU 120 is displayed at the left end of the screen. The typhoon mode image 18TM200C is moved to the effect mode image display area 18TM250 in the center of the screen, and the rain mode image 18TM200B displayed in the effect mode image display area 18TM250 in the center of the screen is moved to the right side of the screen. At this time, since the typhoon mode image 18TM200C is displayed in the effect mode image display area 18TM250, the typhoon mode is selected as the effect mode. In this case as well, the character "RUSH" is displayed blinking on the upper part of the screen, so that the typhoon mode corresponding to the typhoon mode image 18TM200C is the production mode corresponding to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hitting RUSH state). The player can grasp. Further, the display of the time bar 18TM220 is updated to the remaining 25%, which means that 75% of the entire effect mode selection period has elapsed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (B4), the display of the time bar 18TM220 is updated to 0% remaining, and at the timing when the rendering mode selection period ends (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 11-6). Based on the typhoon mode image 18TM200C being displayed in the mode image display area 18TM250, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode to be the typhoon mode. When the effect mode is determined to be the typhoon mode, the effect control CPU 120 enlarges and displays the typhoon mode image 18TM200C at the center of the screen to notify that the effect mode is controlled to the typhoon mode.

At this time, based on being controlled to the highly accurate/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) after the end of the big hit, the effect control CPU 120 causes the enlarged typhoon mode image 18TM200C to be displayed in the upper right portion and the lower left portion, respectively. The special display 18TM100 in which the characters "RUSH" corresponding to being controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hitting RUSH state) is displayed is superimposed. Further, an image 18TM230 imitating a stamp with the characters "RUSH" is superimposed and displayed at the center of the enlarged typhoon mode image 18TM200C. The special display 18TM100 has a higher priority than the background image in the typhoon mode image 18TM200C (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the background image in the typhoon mode image 18TM200C and is superimposed and displayed so as to be seen by the player in the foreground) In addition, the image 18TM230 has a higher priority than the background image in the typhoon mode image 18TM200C and the special display 18TM100 (the display layer is higher than the background image in the typhoon mode image 18TM200C and the special display 18TM100. It is displayed in a superimposed manner so that the player can see it in the foreground. That is, the display priority in the typhoon mode image 18TM200C increases in the order of the background image <special display 18TM100 <image 18TM230 in the typhoon mode image 18TM200C.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 (B1) to (B3), after the big hit ends (), by blinking the character "RUSH" in the effect mode selection period (big hit ending period). A production is executed to inform that the high-precision/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is controlled after the big hit ending period), but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the production mode selection period (big hit ending). In the period), the effect of notifying that the high-precision/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is controlled is not executed, and it is determined whether or not the high-precision/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is controlled. It may be made difficult for the player to recognize.

For example, during the production mode selection period (big hit ending period), the suggestive effect is executed to control the high-precision/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) after the big hit ends (after the big hit ending period). May be suggested. Then, when the executed suggestion effect (RUSH suggestion effect) ends in a successful manner, the high-precision/second KT state (small hitting RUSH state) is controlled after the end of the big hit (after the end of the big hit ending period). On the other hand, when the executed suggestion effect (RUSH suggestion effect) ends in a failure mode, the high-precision/first KT state (probability change state) is controlled after the big hit ends (after the big hit ending period ends). ..

For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the character "RUSH" in the successful RUSH suggestion effect, and then displays the blackout effect (a dark image as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5). By doing so, the effect of reducing the visibility of the background image and the decorative pattern to make it difficult to visually recognize) is executed. Next, the operation prompting display 18TM210 for prompting the user to operate the push button 31B is displayed superimposed on the darkened image. When the push sensor detects that the push button 31B has been operated, the blackout effect is terminated (the background image is displayed by hiding the darkened image as a cover image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5). Also, the visibility of the decorative pattern is improved to make it easier to see.) By displaying the image 18TM230 with the word "RUSH" displayed in the center of the screen, the high-precision/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is achieved. Notify that it will move.

On the other hand, in the RUSH suggestion effect of the failure mode, the effect control CPU 120 displays the character "RUSH", and then executes the blackout effect, as in the case of the success mode. Then, as in the case of the success mode, the operation prompting display 18TM210 for prompting the user to operate the push button 31B is displayed in a superimposed manner on the darkened image. Then, when the push sensor detects that the push button 31B has been operated, the blackout effect is ended, and an image with the text "Failure" is displayed in the center of the screen to display the high accuracy/second KT. Notifying that the state (small hit RUSH state) is not to be entered (in this case, the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state) is to be notified).

As described above, in the production mode selection period of the big hit ending period, when the high-precision/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is controlled after the big hit ends, the successful RUSH suggestion effect is executed and the big hit ends. If the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is not controlled later, it is possible to execute the failure mode RUSH suggestion performance. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game when selecting the effect mode.

Here, the RUSH suggestive production of the success mode and the RUSH suggestive production of the failure mode have the same production mode of the first half of the production, and the player is the success mode or the failure in the first half of the RUSH suggestive production. It is not possible to know if it is a mode. Then, in the latter half of the RUSH suggestion production, whether it is a success mode (whether it is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) after the big hit ends) or a failure mode (high accuracy after the big hit ends/ Whether the first KT state (probably changed state) is controlled) is notified.

In this example, when the RUSH suggestion effect of the first mode (success mode) is executed, it is always controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) after the big hit ends, and the second mode (failure). When the RUSH suggestion effect of the aspect) is executed, an example is shown in which it is always controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state) after the jackpot is finished, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the RUSH suggestion effect of the first aspect is performed. Even if is executed, it is possible to provide a production pattern that is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state) after the jackpot is finished, or even when the RUSH suggestion production of the second aspect is executed. You may provide the effect pattern controlled to a highly precise/2nd KT state (small hit RUSH state) after the big hit ends. However, when the RUSH suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed, it is controlled to a high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) after the jackpot is finished, as compared with the case where the RUSH suggestion effect of the second aspect is executed. When the RUSH suggestion effect of the second aspect is executed, the control is performed to a high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state) after the jackpot is finished, as compared with the case where the RUSH suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed. It is assumed that there is a high rate of

As shown in FIGS. 11-6 and 11-7, during the effect mode selection period of the big hit ending period (the period of T1 to T4 shown in FIG. 11-6), the player operates the push button 31B to make a big hit. It is possible to select which one of the cloudy mode, the rain mode, and the typhoon mode the effect mode controlled after the game state ends. According to such a configuration, the player can select a desired effect mode while being controlled to the big hit game state, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (B4), in the effect mode selection period of the big hit ending period, the effect is based on being controlled to the high-precision/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) after the big hit ends. The control CPU 120 superimposes and displays the special display 18TM100 corresponding to being controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) on the upper right part and the lower left part of the typhoon mode image 18TM200C of the image display device 5, At the center of the typhoon mode image 18TM200C, an image 18TM230 imitating a stamp with the characters "RUSH" is superimposed and displayed.

In this way, when the gaming state after the big hit is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state), and the gaming state after the big hit is controlled to the high-precision/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) Depending on whether the effect can be executed in the common effect mode, the effect mode image displayed in the effect mode image display area 18TM250 is also made common in the effect mode selection period of the big hit ending period. That is, regardless of which gaming state is controlled, when the fog mode is selected, the fog mode image 18TM200A corresponding to the fog mode is displayed, and when the rain mode is selected, the rain mode is supported. The rain mode image 18TM200B is displayed, and when the typhoon mode is selected, the typhoon mode image 18TM200C corresponding to the typhoon mode is displayed.

However, when the game state after the big hit is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the effect control CPU 120 has the high-precision/first KT state (probability change state) after the big hit. Unlike the case of being controlled to, the additional information indicating that the game state after the big hit is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is displayed. Specifically, as additional information, the character "RUSH" (see (B1) to (B3) in Fig. 11-7) is displayed above the selected effect mode image. Further, as additional information, a special display 18TM100 is superimposed and displayed on the lower left and upper right portions of the decided effect mode image, and an image 18TM230 (Fig. 11- 7 (see B4)) is displayed in a superimposed manner. Thereby, while sharing the effect mode image corresponding to the effect mode being selected, the gaming state after the end of the big hit is the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state) and the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) It is made possible for the player to know which of the gaming states is controlled.

(Selecting the production mode during the period when the variable display is being executed)
As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the period during which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high-accuracy/first KT state, and the variable display of the second special symbol in the high-accuracy/second KT state. It is possible to select the effect mode during the period when is executed. An example of the effect when the effect mode is selected during the period in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-8 to 11-11.

FIG. 11-8 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the effect mode is selected during the period in which the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed in the high-accuracy/first KT state, and FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image when the effect mode is selected during a period in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high-accuracy/first KT state. Further, FIG. 11-10 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the effect mode is selected in the period in which the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed in the high-accuracy/second KT state, and FIG. -11 is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect image when the effect mode is selected during the period in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high-accuracy/second KT state.

(High-precision / 1st KT state production mode selection)
When the gaming state is the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state), an example of execution timing and effect image of each effect when selecting the effect mode during the period in which the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed Will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9.

As shown in FIG. 11-9 (A1), when the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state), when the cloudy mode is selected as the effect mode, the effect control CPU 120 The "cloudy image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. When the CUP 103 is performing the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time, the effect control CPU 120, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (in the main symbol Variable display of a certain second special symbol) is executed, and in the second small symbol display areas 51, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5, the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol). ) Variable display is executed, and in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5, the variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is a sub symbol) is displayed. Running.

The effect control CPU 120 displays “2” in the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015 of the image display device 5 because the first reserved storage number is 2, and the second reserved storage number is 4. Therefore, “4” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 18TM031 displays the active display 18TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second reserved display area 18TM021 displays four second reserved displays 18TM020.

The effect control CPU 120 selects an effect mode that indicates the currently selected effect mode (in this example, [cloudy mode]) in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5 in response to the effect mode being selectable. In addition to displaying the icon 18TM300, an operation prompting display 18TM210 is displayed below the icon 18TM300 to prompt the user to operate the push button 31B. The operation prompting display 18TM210 is an image imitating the push button 31B, and the character "SELECT" is displayed on the right side of the operation prompting display 18TM210, so that the player is operated by operating the push button 31B. It has been announced that it is possible to change modes.

In the present embodiment, when the push button 31B is operated during the period in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, [(effect mode)] indicated by the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 in the lower left part of the screen is displayed. In response to the change, [(effect mode)] shown in the effect mode selection icon 18TM300, the actual effect mode will be changed when the variable display of the second special symbol ends. ..

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect mode indicated by the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 to [cloudy mode]→[rain mode]→[typhoon mode] every time the push button 31B is operated. Switch in order. Then, at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol that has been executed is finished, the [effect mode] indicated by the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 in the lower left part of the screen is the effect mode currently controlled (that is, the execution It is confirmed whether or not it is different from the effect mode corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol which has been performed.

And when the [production mode] indicated by the production mode selection icon 18TM300 is different from the currently controlled production mode at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol is finished, the production mode change production is executed. Then, the effect mode is changed from the current effect mode to the effect mode indicated by effect mode selection icon 18TM300. On the other hand, if the [rendering mode] indicated by the rendering mode selection icon 18TM300 is the same as the currently controlled rendering mode (that is, the push button 31B has not been operated or the push button 31B has been operated). If the same effect mode as the current effect mode is selected), the effect mode change effect is not executed and the effect mode is not changed.

For example, at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol ends, when the actual effect mode is the cloudy mode, the effect mode shown in the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 is [rain mode] or [typhoon mode]. If there is, the effect mode change effect is executed, and if the effect mode indicated by the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 is [cloudy mode], the effect mode change effect is not executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (A2), when the push button 31B is operated (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 11-8), the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 at the lower left part of the screen. Switch the indicated production mode to [rain mode]. Then, even after the effect mode indicated by the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 is switched to [rain mode], the operation prompting display 18TM210 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B and the character "SELECT" on the right side thereof. By continuously displaying, the player is informed that the effect mode can be selected (changed) by further operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (A3), when the push button 31B is operated (timing T2 shown in FIG. 11-8), the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 in the lower left part of the screen. Switch the indicated production mode to [typhoon mode]. Then, even after the effect mode indicated by the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 is switched to the "typhoon mode", the operation prompting display 18TM210 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B and the character "SELECT" on the right side thereof. By continuously displaying, the player is informed that the effect mode can be selected (changed) by further operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (A4), at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol ends (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-9), the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to operate. Decorative design "1" in the design display area 5L, decorative design "4" in the design display area 5C, decorative design "8" in the design display area 5R are fixedly stopped, and the second small design of the image display device 5 is displayed. The second small symbol "1" in the area 51, the second small symbol "4" in the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol "8" in the second small symbol display area 5r2 are fixedly stopped. ..

In this example, the variation display result of the second special symbol is “small hit”, but when the gaming state is the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability variation state), the variation display result In order not to notify that it is a "small hit" (it is difficult for the player to recognize), the combination of decorative patterns that suggests that the variable display result is "out of bound" is fixedly stopped, and the variable display The combination of the second small symbols that suggests that the result is “out” is definitely stopped. Similarly, when the gaming state is the low-probability/first KT state (time saving state), the variation display result is not notified as "small hit" (it is difficult for the player to recognize). The combination of decorative symbols that suggests that the variable display result is “off” is fixedly stopped, and the combination of the second small symbols that suggests that the variable display result is “off” is fixedly stopped.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 indicating the [typhoon mode] at the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, and at the same time, the operation promotion display for prompting the user to operate the push button 31B. The 18TM210 and the character "Select with" displayed on the right side of the 18TM210 are deleted. This informs the player that the production mode cannot be selected (changed).

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (A5), the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect mode change effect (the period from T3 to T4 shown in FIG. 11-8), and “ The mode change image 18TM310 in which the characters "mode change" are displayed is displayed. The mode change image 18TM310 is displayed with a higher priority than the background image and the decorative design (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the background image and the decorative design and is superimposed and displayed so as to be seen by the player in the foreground). .. In addition, the mode change image 18TM310 is the active display 18TM030 of the active display area 18TM031, the first hold display 18TM010 of the first hold display area 18TM011, and the second hold display 18TM020 of the second hold display area 18TM021, that is, the variation of the special symbol. It is displayed with a higher priority than the object corresponding to the display.

Here, the mode change image 18TM310 is displayed with a higher priority than the background image and the decorative pattern, and the hold display and the active display, but is displayed in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1. The first small symbol, and the second small symbol displayed in the second small symbol display areas 512, 5c2, 5r2, and the first reserved memory number displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 18TM015, and The second reserved memory number displayed in the second reserved memory number special display area 18TM025 has a higher priority than the mode change image 18TM310 (the display layer is higher than the mode change image 18TM310, and is seen from the player). It is displayed in a superimposed manner so that it can be seen in the foreground. Therefore, while the mode change image 18TM310 is displayed, it is difficult to visually recognize the first hold display 18TM010 in the first hold display area 18TM011 and the second hold display 18TM020 in the second hold display area 18TM021, while the first hold display 18TM020 is difficult to see. The first reserved storage number displayed in the reserved storage number special display area 18TM015 and the second reserved storage number displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 are continuously visible.

At this time (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-8), the effect mode is changed to the typhoon mode from the variation display of the second special symbol to be executed next time, in response to the background image of the decorative symbol "typhoon". "Image" will be displayed. However, since the mode change image 18TM310 whose display priority is higher than that of the background image is displayed on the entire screen while the effect mode change effect is executed, it is difficult to visually recognize the “typhoon image” that is the changed background image. It is in a state.

Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control responds to the fact that the variable display result of the second special symbol executed last time (most recently executed) was "small hit", and the variable display result is as described above. In order not to notify that it is a "small hit" (it is difficult for the player to recognize), a combination of decorative patterns ("148" in this example) that suggests that the variable display result is "off" It is continuously fixedly stopped, and the combination of the second small symbols (“148” in this example) that suggests that the variable display result is “out” is continuously fixedly stopped. Here, the display priority of each effect image is as follows: background image <[decorative design, first hold display 18TM010, second hold display 18TM020, active display 18TM030] <mode change image 18TM310 <[first small design, second small design Symbol, first reserved storage number of first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015, second reserved storage number of second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025], in that order.

The mode change image 18TM310 is displayed with a higher priority than the background image and the decorative design (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the background image and the decorative design and is superimposed and displayed so as to be seen by the player in the foreground). .. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the background image and the decorative pattern while the mode change image 18TM310 is displayed. Further, the player cannot recognize that the background image has been changed from "cloudy image" to "typhoon image" (timing when the background image was changed from "cloudy image" to "typhoon image"). .. On the other hand, the second small pattern is displayed with a higher priority than the mode change image 18TM310 (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the mode change image 18TM310 and is displayed in a superimposed manner so that it can be seen by the player from the front). Therefore, it is clearly visible even during the execution period of the effect mode change effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (A6), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the effect mode change effect (timing T4 shown in FIG. 11-8). Corresponding to the end of the effect mode change effect, the display of the mode change image 18TM310 in which the characters "mode CHANGE" are displayed ends. When the typhoon mode is selected as the effect mode, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays the “typhoon image” as the background image of the decorative pattern, and thus the display of the mode change image 18TM310 with the higher display priority. With the completion of the above, the "typhoon image" as the background image of the decorative pattern becomes visible together with the decorative pattern.

Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control responds to the fact that the variable display result of the second special symbol executed last time (most recently executed) was "small hit", and the variable display result is as described above. In order not to notify that it is a "small hit" (it is difficult for the player to recognize), a combination of decorative patterns ("148" in this example) that suggests that the variable display result is "off" It is continuously fixedly stopped, and the combination of the second small symbols (“148” in this example) that suggests that the variable display result is “out” is continuously fixedly stopped. In FIG. 11-9 (A6), with the display of the mode change image 18TM310 having the higher display priority being completed, the decorative pattern and the first reserved display 18TM010 and the second reserved display, which have been difficult to visually recognize The hold display 18TM020 and the active display 18TM030 have returned to the clearly visible state again.

Because the first reserved storage number is 2, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays "2" in the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is Since it is 4, “4” is continuously displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 18TM031 continuously displays the active display 18TM030 corresponding to the previously executed (most recently executed) variable display, and the second reserved display area 18TM021 displays the second reserved display. Four 18TM020 are displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 indicating [typhoon mode] at the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (A7), when the CUP 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. , While starting the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol), in the second small symbol display areas 51, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5, the second small symbol (second symbol) The variable display of the information corresponding to the special symbol) is started (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 11-8). At this time, the CPU 120 for effect control displays the operation prompting display 18TM210 which prompts the user to operate the push button 31B in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5 and displays the character "SELECT" on the right side thereof. Thus, the fact that the effect mode can be selected is notified again.

(High-precision/second KT state production mode selection)
When the gaming state is the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), when the effect mode is selected during the period during which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the execution timing of each effect and the effect image An example will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11.

As shown in FIG. 11-11 (B1), when the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), when the cloudy mode is selected as the effect mode, for effect control The CPU 120 displays the "cloudy image" as the background image of the decorative pattern. When the CUP 103 is performing the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time, the effect control CPU 120, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (in the main symbol Variable display of a certain second special symbol) is executed, and in the second small symbol display areas 51, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5, the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol). ) Variable display is executed, and in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5, the variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is a sub symbol) is displayed. Running.

The effect control CPU 120 displays “2” in the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015 of the image display device 5 because the first reserved storage number is 2, and the second reserved storage number is 4. Therefore, “4” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 18TM031 displays the active display 18TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second reserved display area 18TM021 displays four second reserved displays 18TM020.

The effect control CPU 120 selects an effect mode that indicates the currently selected effect mode (in this example, [cloudy mode]) at the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5 in response to the effect mode being selectable. In addition to displaying the icon 18TM300, an operation prompting display 18TM210 that prompts the user to operate the push button 31B is displayed below the icon 18TM300, and the character "SELECT" is displayed on the right side thereof.

Here, when the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 displays the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) in the upper right portion and the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5. The special display 18TM100 in which the character of "RUSH" corresponding to being controlled by () is displayed is displayed. The special display 18TM100 is displayed with a higher priority than the background image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the background image and is superimposed and displayed so as to be seen by the player in the foreground).

The effect control CPU 120 has a special display 18TM100 at the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5, in which the word "RUSH" corresponding to being controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is displayed. While the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 is displayed, the operation promotion display 18TM210 is displayed below the effect mode selection icon 18TM300, and the character "SELECT" is displayed on the right side thereof. At this time, the effect mode selection icon 18TM300, the operation prompting display 18TM210, and the characters "select with" have a higher priority than the special display 18TM100 (the display layer is higher than the special image 18TM100, and is in front of the player). It is displayed in a superimposed manner so that it can be seen. That is, the display priority of each effect image increases in the order of background image<special display 18TM100<[effect mode selection icon 18TM300, operation promotion display 18TM210, and characters “select with”].

When in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B1), the image display device 5 displays a small hit continuous number display indicating the number of consecutive small hits in the second KT state. , A small winning continuous award ball number display indicating the number of award balls generated during a period in which the small hits continuously occur in the second KT state. In this example, after the [10R probability variable big hit] occurs and the state is shifted to the second KT state, it is assumed that three small hits have occurred up to the present time, and as shown in FIG. A case is shown in which characters such as "third time" are displayed as the continuous hit count display. Also, during the big hit game based on the first [10R probability variation big hit], 15 × 10 balls × 10 rounds = 1500 prize balls will be obtained, and for each subsequent small hit 10 × 3 balls = 30 prize balls Based on the fact that 30×3=90 prize balls have been obtained by three small hits, a total of 1590 prize balls have been obtained. As shown in B1), a case is shown in which characters such as "1590pt" are displayed as the small winning continuous award ball number display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B2), when the push button 31B is operated (timing T1 shown in FIG. 11-10), the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 in the lower left part of the screen. Switch the indicated production mode to [rain mode]. Then, even after the effect mode indicated by the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 is switched to the "rain mode", the operation prompting display 18TM210 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B and the character "SELECT" on the right side thereof. Is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B3), when the push button 31B is operated (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 11-10 ), the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 in the lower left part of the screen. Switch the indicated production mode to [typhoon mode]. Then, even after the effect mode indicated by the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 is switched to the "typhoon mode", the operation prompting display 18TM210 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B and the character "SELECT" on the right side thereof. Is continuously displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B4), the effect control CPU 120 causes the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5 to have a decorative symbol "1", and the symbol display area 5C to have a special symbol 18TM050 (elliptical object). (Small hitting pattern in which the character "OPEN" is shown), the decorative display "8" is fixedly stopped in the design display area 5R, and the second small design "5" is displayed in the second small design display area 512 of the image display device 5. 1", the second small symbol display area 5c2 has a second small symbol "0", and the second small symbol display area 5r2 has a second small symbol "8" fixedly stopped (T3 shown in FIG. 11-10). timing).

That is, in response to the variable display result of the second special symbol being "small hit", the combination of decorative symbols for notifying that the display result is "small hit" as a combination of decorative symbols is fixedly stopped. , The combination of the second small symbols corresponding to the combination of the decorative symbols is fixedly stopped. In addition, in response to being controlled to the small hitting game state, the occurrence of the small hitting is informed by displaying the character "small hitting!!" on the upper part of the screen. And since the game state is controlled to the small hitting game state, the effect control CPU 120 updates the small hitting continuous number display to "fourth time".

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 indicating the “typhoon mode” at the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, while at the same time urging the push button 31B to be operated. The prompt display 18TM210 and the character “SELECT” displayed on the right side thereof are deleted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B5), during the period when the game state is controlled to the small hitting game state and the special variable winning ball device 17 is open, the effect control CPU 120 causes the active display area 18TM031. The active display 18TM030 displayed on the screen and the four second reserved display 18TM020 displayed on the second reserved display area 18TM021 are erased, and the image display device 5 displays a character and "small hitting attacker open!" Display dialogue.

In addition, during the period when the special variable winning ball device 17 is open, three game balls are won in the special winning opening, and the number of prize balls is further increased by 10 balls×3 balls=30 balls, resulting in a total of 1620 balls. I shall. In this case, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B5), the effect control CPU 120 displays three images of “+10” at the bottom of the screen, and updates the small hit continuous medium award ball count display to “1620 pt”. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B6), the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect mode change effect (the period from T4 to T5 shown in FIG. 11-10), and the image is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. The mode change image 18TM310 in which the characters "mode change" are displayed is displayed. The mode change image 18TM310 is displayed with a higher priority than the background image and the decorative design (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the background image and the decorative design and is superimposed and displayed so as to be seen by the player in the foreground). .. In addition, the mode change image 18TM310 is the active display 18TM030 of the active display area 18TM031, the first hold display 18TM010 of the first hold display area 18TM011, and the second hold display 18TM020 of the second hold display area 18TM021, that is, the variation of the special symbol. It is displayed with a higher priority than the object corresponding to the display.

Here, the mode change image 18TM310 is displayed with a higher priority than the background image and the decorative pattern, and the hold display and the active display, but is displayed in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1. The first small symbol, and the second small symbol displayed in the second small symbol display areas 512, 5c2, 5r2, and the first reserved memory number displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 18TM015, and The second reserved memory number displayed in the second reserved memory number special display area 18TM025 has a higher priority than the mode change image 18TM310 (the display layer is higher than the mode change image 18TM310, and is seen from the player). It is displayed in a superimposed manner so that it can be seen in the foreground. Therefore, while the mode change image 18TM310 is displayed, it is difficult to visually recognize the first hold display 18TM010 in the first hold display area 18TM011 and the second hold display 18TM020 in the second hold display area 18TM021, while the first hold display 18TM020 is difficult to see. The first reserved storage number displayed in the reserved storage number special display area 18TM015 and the second reserved storage number displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 are continuously visible.

At this time (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 11-10), in response to the effect mode being changed to the typhoon mode from the change display of the second special symbol to be executed next time, “typhoon” as the background image of the decorative symbol. "Image" will be displayed. However, since the mode change image 18TM310 whose display priority is higher than that of the background image is displayed on the entire screen while the effect mode change effect is executed, it is difficult to visually recognize the “typhoon image” that is the changed background image. It is in a state.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the fact that the variation display result of the second special symbol executed last time (most recently executed) is "small hit", and the effect mode is the typhoon mode. As a combination of decorative designs, the design display area 5L displays a decorative design "2", the design display area 5C displays a decorative design "4", the design display area 5R displays a decorative design "7", and the design display area 5L The effect image 18TM060 (in this example, a note-shaped image) is superimposed and displayed on each numerical pattern displayed on 5C and 5R. Also, as a combination of the second small symbol, the second small symbol display area 512 is the second small symbol "2", the second small symbol display area 5c2 is the second small symbol "4", the second small symbol display area The second small symbol "7" is stopped and displayed on 5r2. Here, the display priority of each effect image is as follows: background image <[decorative pattern, first hold display 18TM010, second hold display 18TM020, active display 18TM030] <effect image 18TM060 <mode change image 18TM310 <[first small design , The second small symbol, the first reserved storage number of the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015, the second reserved storage number of the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025], in that order.

In the mode change image 18TM310, the display layer is higher than the background image and the decorative pattern (including the effect image 18TM060) and higher in priority than the background image and the decorative pattern (including the effect image 18TM060). Is displayed in a superposed manner so that it can be seen. Therefore, while the mode change image 18TM310 is displayed, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the background image and the decorative pattern (including the effect image 18TM060). Further, the player cannot recognize that the background image has been changed from "cloudy image" to "typhoon image" (timing when the background image was changed from "cloudy image" to "typhoon image"). .. On the other hand, the second small pattern is displayed with a higher priority than the mode change image 18TM310 (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the mode change image 18TM310 and is displayed in a superimposed manner so that the player can see it in the foreground). Therefore, it is clearly visible even during the performance mode change execution period.

Here, when the mode change image 18TM310 is displayed, the second small symbol (the symbol corresponding to the small hit) being displayed is a small hit corresponding to the typhoon mode from the small hit symbol "108" corresponding to the cloudy mode. It will be changed to a design (combination of numerical designs different from the jackpot design).

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B7), the effect control CPU 120 ends the effect mode change effect (timing T5 shown in FIG. 11-10). Corresponding to the end of the effect mode change effect, the display of the mode change image 18TM310 in which the characters "mode CHANGE" are displayed ends. When the typhoon mode is selected as the effect mode, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays the “typhoon image” as the background image of the decorative pattern, and thus the display of the mode change image 18TM310 with the higher display priority. With the completion of the above, the "typhoon image" as the background image of the decorative pattern becomes visible together with the decorative pattern.

Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control is a decoration when the effect mode is the typhoon mode, based on the fact that the variable display result of the second special symbol executed last time (most recently executed) is "small hit". As a combination of symbols, the decorative pattern "2" is continuously displayed in the symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol "4" is displayed in the symbol display area 5C, and the decorative symbol "7" is continuously displayed in the symbol display area 5R. The effect image 18TM060 (in this example, a note-shaped image) is continuously displayed on each of the numerical symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the second small symbol is used as a combination of the second small symbols. The second small symbol "2" in the display area 512, the second small symbol "4" in the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol "7" in the second small symbol display area 5r2 continuously. It is displayed. In FIG. 11-11 (B7), with the completion of the display of the mode change image 18TM310 having the higher display priority, the decoration pattern (including the effect image 18TM060) that has been once difficult to visually recognize, and the first The first hold display 18TM010, the second hold display 18TM020, and the active display 18TM030 have returned to the clearly visible state again.

Because the first reserved storage number is 2, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays "2" in the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is Since it is 4, “4” is continuously displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 18TM031 continuously displays the active display 18TM030 corresponding to the previously executed (most recently executed) variable display, and the second reserved display area 18TM021 displays the second reserved display. Four 18TM020 are displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 indicating [typhoon mode] at the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B8), when the CUP 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 displays the symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , While starting the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol), in the second small symbol display areas 51, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5, the second small symbol (second symbol) The variable display of the information corresponding to the special symbol) has started (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 11-8). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the operation prompting display 18TM210 in the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 to prompt the user to operate the push button 31B, and also displays the character "SELECT" on the right side thereof.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the high probability state (high accuracy/first KT state, high accuracy/second KT state), the production mode is selected in accordance with the operation of the player during the variable display of the second special symbol. (Change of production mode) is possible. When the gaming state is a low probability state (low-probability/low-base state, low-probability/first KT state), during the variable display of the second special symbol, the icon for effect mode selection is not displayed and the player is in effect mode. Cannot be selected (changing the effect mode). Also, when the gaming state is a high probability state (high-accuracy/first KT state, high-accuracy/second KT state), the period during which the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed (variable display of the second special symbol) Is not executed, the period during which only the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the period during which the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed and the variable display of the first special symbol is not executed), The icon for selecting the effect mode is not displayed, and the player cannot select the effect mode (change the effect mode).

As shown in FIG. 11-3 to FIG. 11-5, in the present embodiment, when the variable display result of the second special symbol is “small hit”, a small hit occurs due to a mode in which the decorative symbol is definitely stopped. The effect for informing is changed depending on which effect mode is controlled. Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 (B1) to (B3), during the period in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the effect mode is set in response to the push button 31B being operated by the player. You can switch. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B6), when the effect mode is changed, the effect mode change effect is executed, and the mode change in which the letters "mode CHANGE" are displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. The image 18TM310 is displayed.

As described above, in the present embodiment in which the combination of decorative patterns to be fixedly stopped when a small hit occurs is different depending on the effect mode, if the effect mode is changed, the mode change image 18TM310 is not displayed. It is assumed that the configuration (that is, the configuration that does not reduce the visibility of the background image and the decorative pattern) is adopted. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 (B1) to (B5), when the effect mode is controlled to the cloudy mode, the variable display result of the second special symbol is "small hit", and the image Special symbol 18TM050 (small hitting design in which the character "OPEN" is shown in an elliptical object) is fixedly stopped in the design display area 5C of the display device 5, and after the small hitting game ends, a background image, a decorative design, etc. As shown in FIG. 11-11 (B7), in the state where the visibility is not deteriorated (the state in which the background image and the decorative pattern can be continuously and clearly recognized) is changed, as shown in FIG. It will be changed to typhoon mode. As a result, with the change of the background image, the decoration pattern in the stopped state is also changed (the combination of the number patterns in which the effect image 18TM060 is superimposed and displayed) is displayed, so that a sudden screen (decoration pattern, background image) The change of will confuse the player.

Here, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B6), when the effect mode is changed, by superimposing the mode change image 18TM310 on the entire screen of the image display device 5, the symbol display area of the image display device 5 is displayed. By reducing the visibility of the entire screen including 5L, 5C, and 5R, the visibility of the decorative design in the production mode before the change is temporarily reduced, and then the visibility of the decorative design in the production mode after the change is improved. Therefore, even in the present embodiment in which the decorative design differs between the production mode before the change and the production mode after the change, the confusion of the player due to the switching of the screen (decorative pattern, background image) Can be prevented.

As shown in FIGS. 11-9 (A1) to (A4), when the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state), when the cloudy mode is selected as the effect mode, effect control "Cloudy image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern by the CPU 120 for use, and as shown in FIGS. 11-11 (B1) to (B5), the gaming state is the highly accurate/second KT state (small hitting RUSH state. When the cloudy mode is selected as the effect mode, the effect control CPU 120 displays "cloudy image" as the background image of the decorative pattern. The “cloudy image” as the background image is a background image common to the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state) and the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state).

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-9 (A1) to (A4), when the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state), the screen upper right portion and the screen lower left portion of the image display device 5 are displayed. 11-11(B1) to ((B1) to ((B1) to () although the special display 18TM100 corresponding to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hitting RUSH state) is displayed on the part. As shown in B5), when the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the high-precision/second KT state (in the upper right portion and the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5). The special display 18TM100 in which the character "RUSH" corresponding to the small hit RUSH state) is displayed is superimposed. According to such a configuration, the background image can be shared between the high-accuracy/first KT state and the high-accuracy/second KT state, and the high-accuracy/first KT state and the high-accuracy/second KT state can be specified. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 (B1) to (B5), when the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), and the cloudy mode is selected as the effect mode. , A special display 18TM100 is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, in which the word "RUSH" corresponding to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is displayed. ing. Then, even after the production mode is changed, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 (B7) to (B8), the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), and the production mode. When the typhoon mode is selected as, the characters “RUSH” corresponding to the high-precision/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) are displayed in the upper right portion and the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5. The special display 18TM100 shown is displayed. That is, since the special display 18TM100 is common regardless of the effect mode, the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) in the present embodiment in which a plurality of types of effect modes can be controlled. Can be made clearer.

As shown in FIG. 11-9, when the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state), as shown in FIG. 11-11, the game state is the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit). When the push sensor detects that the push button 31B has been operated by the player during the period in which the variable display of the second special symbol is being performed, the push mode is controlled in the RUSH state) The display of the "cloudy mode" shown in the selection icon 18TM300 is switched in the order of the display of the "rainy mode" and the display of the "typhoon mode". Then, at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol ends, the [typhoon mode] shown in the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 at the lower left of the screen is different from the currently controlled effect mode (cloudy mode). Based on, the effect mode is changed from the currently controlled effect mode (cloudy mode) to the effect mode (typhoon mode) indicated by the effect mode selection icon 18TM300. In this way, when the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state), when the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the second special During the period in which the variable display of symbols is being executed, it is possible to control any one of a plurality of types of effect modes based on the operation of the player, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

(Big hit countdown production)
As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be simultaneously executed in parallel. Further, when the gaming state is the high-accuracy/second KT state, the main symbol is the second special symbol and the sub symbol is the first special symbol. In this embodiment, when the CPU 103 is performing the variable display of the first special symbol whose display result is “big hit”, the second special whose display result is “out” or “small hit” When the variable display of the symbols is started, the effect control CPU 120 may execute the big hit countdown effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol whose display result is “big hit”. It should be noted that when the variable display of the first special symbol whose display result is "big hit" is being executed, the variable display result of the second special symbol that is started is "off" or "small hit". ..

When the big hit countdown effect is executed, the countdown display is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 until the variable display of the first special symbol whose display result is "big hit" is completed. The countdown display has a higher priority than the background image and the decorative design (the decorative design corresponding to the second special design which is the main design) (the display layer is higher than the background image and the decorative design and is in front of the player). It is displayed in a superimposed manner so that it can be seen. That is, since the countdown display is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 by executing the big hit countdown effect, the visibility of the decorative design corresponding to the second special design which is the main design is reduced, and the sub design. It can be noted that the variable display result of the first special symbol that is is a "big hit". Further, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the high-accuracy/second KT state, it is possible to control to one of the effect modes selected from a plurality of kinds of effect modes, but the jackpot countdown effect is an effect. It can be commonly executed even when the mode is controlled. According to such a configuration, in the present embodiment in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are simultaneously executed in parallel, in the effect regarding the big hit notification corresponding to the special symbol which is the sub symbol. The interest can be improved.

In the present embodiment, when the CPU 103 is performing the variable display of the first special symbol whose display result is “big hit”, the second special symbol whose display result is “out” or “small hit”. Although the example in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the big hit countdown effect at the timing of starting the variable display of No., the big hit countdown effect may be executed at another timing. For example, when the CPU 103 is performing the variable display of the second special symbol in which (i) the display result is “out” or “small hit”, (ii) the first special in which the display result is “big hit” When the variable display of the symbols is started, the effect control CPU 120 causes (ii) the display result to be a “big hit”, while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed (i) the display result is “out”. Or, the variable display of the second special symbol that is "small hit" is finished, and (iii) at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol that is "off" or "small hit" is started, The big hit countdown effect may be executed.

As described above, in the above-described embodiment, as an effect of the effect mode switching, the small hit RUSH can be played in the effect mode that suits the taste of each player, and the interest can be improved. Further, not only during the period when the big hit game state is controlled, but also during the variable display of the special symbol, the effect mode can be switched, so that the convenience of the player can be improved. Furthermore, in a situation where the small hit RUSH continues for a relatively long time, if the production mode does not change, the game becomes monotonous even if the advantageous value is given, and the interest is reduced, Since the effect modes can be switched, the monotony of the game during the small hit RUSH can be eliminated, and the interest due to the period in which the advantageous value is given can be further enhanced.

(Other features and modifications)
(1) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-29, the KT state (high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state), low-accuracy/first KT state (time saving state), high-accuracy/second KT state). If it is after (small hit RUSH state)), the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, so mainly [10R certainty variation big hit], [2R certainty variation big hit], [6R certainty variation big hit]. , And [2R normal big hit] occurs, [2R probability variation big hit] occurs, after the big hit game is over, it shifts to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) and the next big hit occurs. The example shows that the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is maintained until, but not limited to such a form, when [2R certainty variation big hit] occurs, shift to another game state. May be.

For example, when [2R probability variation big hit] occurs while being controlled to the KT state, after the big hit game is over, the state shifts to the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability variation state), and the next big hit occurs. The high-accuracy/first KT state (probability-changed state) is maintained until the display of fluctuations of 50 times is completed. When the next big hit does not occur and the fluctuation display of 50 times is finished, the 51st fluctuation display shifts to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) until the next big hit occurs. It may be a gaming state in which the highly accurate/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is maintained. When [2R probability variation big hit] occurs, the game state shifts to the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability variation state), but as a background image, "night at night scene" including the night sky and mountains. "Image", that is, a background image common to the case of the low accuracy/first KT state (time saving state).

At this time, when [2R probability variation big hit] occurs, when the big hit game is over, the state shifts to the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability variation state), and when the next big hit does not occur in the fluctuation display of 50 times. For example, the above-described successful RUSH suggestion effect may be executed on the 50th variation display, and the 51st variation display may shift to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). In addition, when [2R normal big hit] occurs, when the big hit game is over, the low-probability/first KT state (time saving state) is entered, and when the next big hit does not occur in the fluctuation display of 50 times. May execute the RUSH suggestion effect in the failure mode described above on the 50th variation display, and shift from the 51st variation display to the low certainty/non-KT state (normal state).

In this way, the number of rounds in the big hit game state is common (both two rounds) when the [2R probability variation big hit] occurs and when the [2R normal big hit] occurs while being controlled to the KT state. Since the common "night image" is displayed as the background image in any of the game states that shift after the jackpot game is over, the player can grasp which game state is controlled. It has become difficult. Then, when the next big hit does not occur on the 50th variation display, if the previous big hit was [2R probability variation big hit], the successful RUSH suggestion effect is executed on the 50th variation display. If the previous big hit was [2R normal big hit], the failure mode RUSH suggestion effect is executed at the 50th variable display. According to such a configuration, when [2R certainty variation big hit] or [2R normal big hit] occurs, it is possible to grasp which gaming state is controlled until the 50th variation display is executed. It becomes difficult to prevent a decrease in interest when the number of rounds in the big hit game state is two. In addition, by executing the RUSH suggestion effect at the time of the 50th variation display, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game in the KT state (low accuracy/first KT status, high accuracy/first KT status).

(2) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-3 to 11-5, when the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hitting game state) is controlled, occurrence of a small hit is dealt with. As an effect, an example in which the mode when the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped is different depending on the effect mode is shown, but the effect is not limited to this mode, and as an effect corresponding to the occurrence of a small hit, an effect during a small hit game (small It is possible to change the winning sound effect, winning effect effect, addition effect, etc. when the gaming ball wins the special winning opening during the period when the special variable winning ball device 17 in the winning game state is open, depending on the effect mode.

For example, the winning sound effect is produced in the special winning opening by reproducing and outputting a sound effect at the timing when the gaming ball wins in the special winning opening while the special variable winning ball device 17 in the small hitting game state is open. This is an effect that notifies that the game ball has won. At this time, when the effect mode is the cloudy mode, the effect sound A is reproduced and output as the effect sound, and when the effect mode is the rain mode, the effect sound B is reproduced and output as the effect sound. In the typhoon mode, the sound effect C may be reproduced and output as the sound effect.

Further, for example, the special variable winning ball device 17 includes a light guide plate device including a light guide plate and a transparent front decorative plate provided in front of the light guide plate, and allows light to enter the light guide plate. Alternatively, the decorative portion of the front decorative plate may be configured to emit light. For example, in the winning effect effect, when the special variable winning ball device 17 in the small hitting game state is open, when the gaming ball wins the special winning opening, light is incident on the light guide plate to decorate the front decorative plate. By illuminating the part, it is as if the special variable winning a prize ball device 17 is emitting a light, and it is an effect to notify that the game ball has won the special winning opening. In such a winning effect effect, the form of the special variable winning ball device 17 may be changed according to the effect mode by changing the color of the light incident on the light guide plate according to the effect mode. For example, when the effect mode is the cloudy mode, the color of light incident on the light guide plate is white, and when the effect mode is the rain mode, the color of light incident on the light guide plate is blue, and the effect mode is In the typhoon mode, the color of light incident on the light guide plate may be red.

In FIG. 11-3 (A3) described above, when the game ball is won in the special winning opening while the special variable winning ball device 17 in the small hitting game state is open, " An example of executing the addition effect of displaying the image of “+10” has been described. The mode of the addition effect may be different depending on the effect mode. For example, when the effect mode is the cloudy mode, the image of "+10" is displayed on the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5, and when the effect mode is the rain mode, the image of "+10" is displayed on the image display device. 5 is displayed in a mode of moving from the upper part of the screen toward the lower part of the screen (a mode related to the “rain image” of the background image), and when the effect mode is the typhoon mode, the image of “+10” is displayed on the image display device. 5 may be displayed in a manner of being randomly moved over the entire screen (a manner related to the “typhoon image” of the background image). Further, the mode (color, typeface, effect, etc.) of the "+10" image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be changed according to the effect mode.

(3) In the above-described embodiment, depending on the effect mode, the decorative pattern is combined depending on the type of decorative pattern, the combination of decorative patterns when the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped, and the effect image when the decorative pattern is fixedly stopped. Although the example in which the mode of variable display of the symbol is made different is shown, the mode of variable display of the decorative symbol may be made different by other effect elements.

For example, the speed of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be changed according to the effect mode. For example, when the effect mode is the cloudy mode, the variable display speed of the decorative pattern is slow, and when the effect mode is the rain mode, the variable display speed of the decorative pattern is higher than in the cloudy mode. If the production mode is fast and the typhoon mode is high, the speed of variable display of the decorative pattern may be faster than in the rain mode. The variation display speed of the decorative pattern increases in the order of cloudy mode <rain mode <typhoon mode.

Further, for example, the aspect of the decorative pattern itself that is variably displayed may be changed according to the effect mode. For example, when the production mode is the cloudy mode, the variable display of the decorative pattern in the white mode (the pattern in which white numbers are shown) is changed, and when the effect mode is the rain mode, the decorative pattern in the blue mode. The variable display (the design with blue numbers) is performed, and when the effect mode is the typhoon mode, the variable display of the decorative pattern in the red mode (design with red numbers) may be performed. ..

According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the display mode of the decorative pattern in accordance with the effect mode, and the gaming state is in a high probability state (high accuracy/first KT status, high accuracy/second KT status). ) Can improve the enjoyment of the game.

(4) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-3, 11-4, and 11-5, when the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). In the above, an example is shown in which the small hit continuous medium award ball number display is displayed in the common lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 regardless of which effect mode is controlled. Similarly, regardless of which effect mode is controlled, the small hit continuous number display may be displayed in a common area of the image display device 5 in a common display mode.

(5) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-6, (i) a big hit ending period of [6R probability variation big hit] controlled to a high accuracy/first KT state after the end of big hit, and (ii) end of big hit. Although an example in which the big hit ending period of [10R certainty variation big hit] or [2R certainty variation big hit] which is controlled to the high-precision/second KT state later is a common period has been shown, the invention is not limited to such a form, and (i) The jackpot ending period shown in (1) and the jackpot ending period shown in (ii) may be different periods. For example, assuming that the production mode selection period is common (for example, t seconds), in the case of (i), after the production mode selection period ends, the high-precision/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is controlled. Since the special display 18TM100 in which the word "RUSH" corresponding to that being displayed is displayed is not executed, shorten the period from the end of the effect mode selection period to the end of the big hit ending period. Of course (for example, 10 seconds), in the case of (ii), after the effect mode selection period ends, the “RUSH” corresponding to being controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) Since the effect of displaying the special display 18TM100 in which characters are displayed is executed, the period from the end of the effect mode selection period to the end of the big hit ending period may be set longer than in the case of (i). (Eg, 30 seconds). In this way, by making the big hit ending period [(t+10) seconds] shown in (i) different from the big hit ending period [(t+30) seconds shown in (ii), it is appropriate to correspond to the controlled game state. You may make it provide such a performance period.

(6) In the above embodiment, the example in which the effect mode can be selected by the operation of the player during the big hit ending period has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and during the big hit start period (fanfare production period), the player's The effect mode may be selectable by operation, or the effect mode may be selectable by the player's operation during the round period (round effect period).

(7) In the above embodiment, the example in which the display information such as the background image can be changed by the player's operation has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and is played during the small hit RUSH by the player's operation. The music to be played may be selectable. For example, during the big hit game state (fanfare production period, round production period, ending production period) when the big hit game state is controlled to the small hit RUSH state, subsequent small hit RUSH depending on the operation of the player. The music to be played may be selectable. Further, even during the small hit RUSH, the music to be played during the subsequent small hit RUSH may be changed according to the operation of the player. In a situation where the small hit RUSH continues for a relatively long time, if there is no change in the music, the game will be monotonous even if it is a period in which an advantageous value is given, and the interest will be reduced, but it will be played. Since the songs can be switched, the monotony of the game during the small hit RUSH can be eliminated, and the interest in the period in which the advantageous value is given can be further enhanced.

(8) In the above embodiment, in the case where the player's selection operation is performed within the variation period of the high probability state (high accuracy/first KT state, high accuracy/second KT state) and the second special symbol, After performing the production mode change production within the period from the end of the variation period of the second special symbol to the start of the next variation display (variation display of the second special symbol), the next variation display (the The change of the actual effect mode (background image) is performed before (or at the same time as) the change display of the two special symbols is started. Here, even in the high-probability state (high-accuracy/first KT state, high-accuracy/second KT state), the player selects the staging mode while the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed. I can't.

(8-1) And, as shown in FIGS. 11-9 and 11-11, in a high probability state (high-accuracy/first KT state, high-accuracy/second KT state) and within the fluctuation period of the second special symbol, When the player's selection operation is performed, before the variation period of the second special symbol ends, the actual production mode (background image) is not changed according to the selection operation, and the production mode name is changed. The display of has been changed to the display of the effect mode name to be changed. At this time, the player may be further informed that [the selected effect mode should be controlled from the next variable display]. For example, on the screen of FIG. 11-9 (A3), a message “The next change will be changed to typhoon mode.” may be displayed on the screen, and the message of FIG. 11-11 (B3) to (B5) On the screen, a message “The following fluctuation will be changed to typhoon mode.” may be displayed on the screen. Then, the next variable display (variable display of the second special symbol) is started by executing the effect mode change effect within the period until the next variable display (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed. Before (or at the same time as starting), the actual effect mode (background image) may be changed.

(8-2) Also, unlike the above example, the player's selection operation is performed within the variation period of the high probability state (high-precision/first KT state, high-precision/second KT state) and the second special symbol. In this case, before the variable period of the second special symbol ends, the display of the production mode name is changed and the actual production is performed according to the selection operation (for example, at the timing immediately after the selection operation is performed). The mode (background image) may also be changed. In such an effect configuration, the period in which the effect mode name is displayed and the actual effect mode (background image) can be changed in accordance with the selection operation is, for example, from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol (start of fluctuation of the second special symbol). It may be a period until the first decorative design is stopped (for example, the left decorative design is stopped in the design display area 5L), and 2 seconds from the start of fluctuation of the decorative design (start of fluctuation of the second special design). It may be a period until elapse.

(9) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-11, in the high-accuracy/second KT state, during the variable display of the second special symbol whose display result is the small hit symbol, the operation of changing the effect mode When performed, the background image in the small hit game state is the background image corresponding to the effect mode before the change. That is, the effect mode is not changed in the small hit game state (the effect mode before the small hit occurrence is maintained), and the effect mode is changed after the small hit game state is finished. Here, even when the second holding storage number when the small hit game state is finished is 0 (even when the second holding storage number is 0 when the effect mode change presentation is finished), the small hit game state The production mode after the end is changed to the selected production mode. That is, when the second holding storage number when the small hit game state is finished is 0 (when the second holding storage number is 0 when the effect mode change effect is finished), the small hit game The background image after the state is finished (the background image after the production mode change production is finished) is changed to the background image corresponding to the selected production mode, but the variation of the decorative design corresponding to the second special design No display is performed.

(10) In the above-described embodiment, the execution ratio of the pre-reading notice effect may be changed depending on the effect mode. For example, the cloud mode is the highest and the rain mode is 2 with respect to the execution ratio of the hold change effect that changes the display mode of the hold display (corresponding display corresponding to the variable display that is not executed) based on the determination result at the time of winning the start prize. It may be the second highest and the lowest typhoon mode. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect may be changed depending on the effect mode. For example, as a setting suggestion effect, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the special variable winning ball device 17 are in an open state, and a small hit is made based on the occurrence of a game ball winning the large winning opening or the special winning opening. When it is configured to be able to execute the prize suggestion effect at the time of winning and the prize ball number indication suggestion effect, the cloudy mode is the highest, the rain mode is the second highest, and the typhoon mode is the highest with respect to the execution ratio of these setting suggestion effects. It may be lowered.

In addition, the execution ratio may be different for each effect mode depending on the type of setting suggestion effect to be executed. For example, with regard to the execution ratio of the small hit winning suggestion effect, the cloudy mode is the highest, the rain mode is second highest, and the typhoon mode is the lowest. May be the highest, the rain mode may be the second highest, and the cloudy mode may be the lowest.

2. Description of the Related Art Some gaming machines are configured to be controllable in a special state that is different from the advantageous state. For example, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-33787 (FIG. 18), it is possible to perform a small hit game in which the special winning opening is opened in a predetermined pattern, and it is determined whether or not the small hit game is performed. A gaming machine has been proposed that notifies the result by a production design. Regarding the gaming machine that can be controlled in a special state as described in JP-A-2018-33787 (FIG. 18), there is room for improving the interest of the game. The configurations related to the means A1 to A9, the configurations related to the means B1 to B9, and the configurations related to the means C1 to C7 shown below are made in view of the above-mentioned actual circumstances, and the purpose thereof is special. It is to improve the interest of a game in a game machine that can be controlled in a state. The above-described embodiment shows an example of the configurations of the means A1 to A9, the configurations of the means B1 to B9, and the configurations of the means C1 to C7 described below.

The game machine of means A1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) comprising gaming state control means (CPU 103) for controlling a gaming state, and production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling production.
The game state control means (CPU 103),
An advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (big hit game state), a special state different from the advantageous state (small hit game state), and a special state in which a game value is likely to be given due to the special state (high accuracy/second KT state) And can be controlled to
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
In the special state (high accuracy/second KT state), a plurality of types of effect modes (cloudy mode, rain mode, and typhoon mode) based on the player's operation (the player has operated the push button 31B). It is possible to control one of the production modes,
It is possible to change the predetermined effect corresponding to the control of the special state according to the effect mode (when the effect mode is the cloudy mode as shown in FIGS. 11-3 (A1) to (A3)). When the variable display result of the second special symbol is "small hit", the special symbol 18TM050 (small hit symbol in which the character "OPEN" is shown on the elliptical object is indicated in the symbol display area 5C) is fixedly stopped. And, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 (B1) to (B3), when the effect mode is the rain mode, when the variable display result of the second special symbol is "small hit", the symbol A combination of decorative symbols (“135” in this example), which is the order of odd-numbered symbols, is definitely stopped in the display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as shown in FIGS. 11-5 (C1) to (C3). In the case where the effect mode is the typhoon mode, when the variable display result of the second special symbol is "small hit", the effect image 18TM060 (in this example, the musical note type is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R). (Image) is fixed to stop the combination of decorative patterns that are displayed superimposed)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the production mode can be selected by the player's operation, so that the interest of the game in the special state can be improved.

The game machine of means A2 is
A gaming machine of means A1,
A variable display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of performing variable display (variable display) is provided,
The variable display means (production control CPU 120) can execute variable display of decorative identification information (variable display of decorative pattern),
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can change the aspect of the variable display of the decoration identification information according to the effect mode (as shown in FIG. 11-3 (A2), the effect mode is In the cloudy mode, a numerical design (“0” to “9” in this example) as a decorative design, and a special design 18TM050 (a small hitting design in which the characters “OPEN” are shown in an elliptical object) When the production mode is the rain mode and the typhoon mode, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B2) and FIG. 11-5 (C2), a numerical pattern (in this example, as a decorative pattern) is displayed. , “0” to “9”) are displayed.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
It is possible to change the mode of variable display of the decoration identification information according to the effect mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special state.

The game machine of means A3,
A gaming machine of means A1 or means A2,
A variable display means (production control CPU 120) capable of performing variable display (variable display of decorative design, variable display of small design) is provided.
The variable display means (production control CPU 120) variably displays the first decoration identification information (variable display of the decorative pattern) and the second decoration identification information whose visibility is lower than that of the first decoration identification information (small). It is possible to execute (variable display of symbols),
The mode of variably displaying the second decoration identification information is common regardless of the effect mode (as shown in FIG. 11-2, the second small symbol is a numerical pattern of “0” to “9” regardless of the effect mode. The area where the second small symbol is displayed is the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 regardless of the effect mode)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, the variable display mode of the second decoration identification information can be made common regardless of the effect mode, so that the player can accurately grasp the second decoration identification information even if the effect mode is switched. It becomes possible.

The game machine of means A4,
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A3,
Variable display means (CPU 103) capable of executing variable display (variable display of special symbols),
With a hold display means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying the number of hold displays (first hold memory number, second hold memory number) corresponding to the number of variable displays (variable display of special symbols) not executed. Prepare,
The mode of the number of the hold display is common regardless of the effect mode (as shown in FIG. 11-2, the display mode of the first number of reserved memories and the display mode of the second number of reserved memories are both effect modes. The first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015 and the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 are common regardless of which effect mode is controlled).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the mode of the number of hold displays can be made common regardless of the effect mode, so that the player can accurately grasp the number of hold displays even when the effect mode is switched. ..

The game machine of means A5,
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A4,
A variable display means (CPU 103) capable of executing variable display (variable display) is provided,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120), during the variable display (during the period during which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed), to the action of the player (the push button 31B is operated by the player). Based on this, it is possible to change the effect mode (as shown in FIG. 11-9 and FIG. 11-11, the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 displayed at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. The [cloudy mode] is switched to [typhoon mode], and at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol ends, the [typhoon mode] shown in the production mode selection icon 18TM300 in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. ] Is different from the currently controlled effect mode (cloudy mode), the effect mode is changed from the currently controlled effect mode (cloudy mode) to the effect mode (typhoon mode) indicated by the effect mode selection icon 18TM300. has been edited)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to change the effect mode based on the operation of the player during the variable display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the effect mode.

The game machine of means A6 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A5,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can change the effect mode based on the player's operation (the push button 31B is operated by the player) in the advantageous state (big hit game state). (As shown in FIG. 11-7, in the effect mode selection period of the big hit ending period (the period of T1 to T4 shown in FIG. 11-6), a cloudy mode, rain as an effect mode controlled after the end of the big hit game state. It is possible to select from either mode or typhoon mode)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to select the effect mode by the operation of the player while being controlled to the advantageous state, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

The game machine of means A7 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A6,
The effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) can display a special display corresponding to the special state regardless of the effect mode (when the cloudy mode is selected as the effect mode, FIG. 11-11). As shown in (B1) to (B5), when the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the high level is displayed on the upper right part and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. The special display 18TM100 with the letters "RUSH" corresponding to the certain/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is superimposed and displayed, the production mode is changed, and the typhoon mode is selected as the production mode. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 (B7) to (B8), when the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the image display device 5 In the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen, the special display 18TM100 with the characters of "RUSH" corresponding to the high-precision/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is superimposed and displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to specify that the game is in the special state regardless of the effect mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special state.

The game machine of means A8,
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A7,
The effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) can display the game value display corresponding to the provided game value regardless of the effect mode (FIGS. 11-3, 11-4, and 11-5). As shown in, regardless of which production mode is controlled, the small hit continuous medium prize ball number display is displayed in the common lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the display mode and the display area of the game value display can be made common in each effect mode, so that the player can accurately understand the game value display even if the effect mode is switched. ..

The game machine of means A9,
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A8,
Variable display means (CPU 103) capable of executing variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) in parallel. Prepare,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120), in the special state (high accuracy/second KT state), the variable display of the first specific identification information (first special symbol) corresponding to the advantageous state (big hit game state). It is possible to execute a specific correspondence effect (big hit countdown effect) corresponding to the fluctuation display),
A mode of the specific correspondence effect (big hit countdown effect) is common regardless of the effect mode.
With such a configuration, in the special state, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game relating to the specific corresponding effect corresponding to the variable display of the first specific identification information corresponding to the advantageous state.

The game machine of means B1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) comprising gaming state control means (CPU 103) for controlling a gaming state, and production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling production.
The game state control means (CPU 103),
An advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (big hit game state), a special state different from the advantageous state (small hit game state), and a special state in which a game value is likely to be given due to the special state (high accuracy/second KT state) And can be controlled to
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
It is possible to execute a corresponding effect (variable display of decorative design) corresponding to variable display (variable display of special design),
In the special state (high accuracy/second KT state), based on the operation of the player (the push button 31B is operated by the player), a plurality of types of effect modes (symbol display area 5L) in which the modes of the corresponding effects are different In 5C and 5R, a variation between a numerical design (“0” to “9” in this example) and a special design 18TM050 (a small hitting design in which the letters “OPEN” are shown on an elliptical object) is used as a decorative design. In the cloudy mode in which the display is performed and in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, among the numerical symbols (in this example, the rain mode and the typhoon mode in which the variable symbols of "0" to "9") are displayed as decorative symbols, It is possible to control in one of the production modes,
When changing the effect mode, it is possible to execute a special effect that reduces the visibility of the corresponding effect (as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B6), when changing the effect mode, the effect mode change effect is By changing and displaying the mode change image 18TM310 in which the characters of “mode change” are displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 that is executed, the variation of the decorative pattern in which the display mode is different before and after the effect mode change The visibility of the display is reduced.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused when the mode of the corresponding effect is different when changing to the effect mode.

The game machine of means B2 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
As the corresponding effect, variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative pattern) can be executed,
The mode of variable display of the decoration identification information differs depending on the effect mode (when the effect mode is the cloudy mode, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a numerical symbol (in this example, "0 "-"9") and the special pattern 18TM050 (small hitting pattern in which the characters "OPEN" are shown on the elliptical object) are displayed in a variable manner, and when the effect mode is the rain mode and the typhoon mode. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, numerical symbols (in this example, "0" to "9") are displayed in a variable manner as decorative symbols.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The game machine of means B3 is
A gaming machine of means B1 or means B2,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
As the corresponding effect, a variable display of the first decoration identification information (variable display of the decorative pattern) and a variable display of the second decoration identification information having lower visibility than the first decoration identification information (variable display of the small pattern). Is feasible,
The mode of variably displaying the second decoration identification information is common regardless of the effect mode (as shown in FIG. 11-2, the second small symbol is a numerical pattern of “0” to “9” regardless of the effect mode. The area where the second small symbol is displayed is the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 regardless of the effect mode)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, the variable display mode of the second decoration identification information can be made common regardless of the effect mode, so that the player can accurately grasp the second decoration identification information even if the effect mode is switched. It becomes possible.

The game machine of means B4 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B3,
And a hold display unit (production control CPU 120) capable of displaying the number of hold displays (first hold memory number, second hold memory number) corresponding to the number of variable displays (variable displays) that are not executed,
The mode of the number of the hold display is common regardless of the effect mode (as shown in FIG. 11-2, the display mode of the first number of reserved memories and the display mode of the second number of reserved memories are both effect modes. The first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015 and the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 are common regardless of which effect mode is controlled).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the mode of the number of hold displays can be made common regardless of the effect mode, so that the player can accurately grasp the number of hold displays even when the effect mode is switched. ..

The game machine of means B5 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B4,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120), during the variable display (during the period during which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed), to the action of the player (the push button 31B is operated by the player). Based on this, it is possible to change the effect mode (as shown in FIG. 11-9 and FIG. 11-11, the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 displayed at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. The [cloudy mode] is switched to [typhoon mode], and at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol ends, the [typhoon mode] shown in the production mode selection icon 18TM300 in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. ] Is different from the currently controlled effect mode (cloudy mode), the effect mode is changed from the currently controlled effect mode (cloudy mode) to the effect mode (typhoon mode) indicated by the effect mode selection icon 18TM300. has been edited)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to change the effect mode based on the operation of the player during the variable display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the effect mode.

The game machine of means B6 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B5,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can change the effect mode based on the player's operation (the push button 31B is operated by the player) in the advantageous state (big hit game state). (As shown in FIG. 11-7, in the effect mode selection period of the big hit ending period (the period of T1 to T4 shown in FIG. 11-6), a cloudy mode, rain as an effect mode controlled after the end of the big hit game state. It is possible to select from either mode or typhoon mode)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to select the effect mode by the operation of the player while being controlled to the advantageous state, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

The game machine of means B7 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B6,
The effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) can display a special display corresponding to the special state regardless of the effect mode (when the cloudy mode is selected as the effect mode, FIG. 11-11). As shown in (B1) to (B5), when the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the high level is displayed on the upper right part and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. The special display 18TM100 with the letters "RUSH" corresponding to the certain/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is superimposed and displayed, the production mode is changed, and the typhoon mode is selected as the production mode. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 (B7) to (B8), when the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the image display device 5 In the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen, the special display 18TM100 with the characters of "RUSH" corresponding to the high-precision/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is superimposed and displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to specify that the game is in the special state regardless of the effect mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special state.

The game machine of means B8 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B7,
The effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) can display the game value display corresponding to the provided game value regardless of the effect mode (FIGS. 11-3, 11-4, and 11-5). As shown in, regardless of which production mode is controlled, the small hit continuous medium prize ball number display is displayed in the common lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the display mode and the display area of the game value display can be made common in each effect mode, so that the player can accurately understand the game value display even if the effect mode is switched. ..

The game machine of means B9 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to means B8,
The gaming state control means can execute a variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and a variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) in parallel. Yes,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120), in the special state (high accuracy/second KT state), the variable display of the first specific identification information (first special symbol) corresponding to the advantageous state (big hit game state). It is possible to execute a specific correspondence effect (big hit countdown effect) corresponding to the fluctuation display),
A mode of the specific correspondence effect (big hit countdown effect) is common regardless of the effect mode.
With such a configuration, in the special state, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game relating to the specific corresponding effect corresponding to the variable display of the first specific identification information corresponding to the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means C1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) comprising gaming state control means (CPU 103) for controlling a gaming state, and production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling production.
The game state control means (CPU 103),
An advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (a big hit game state), a special state different from the advantageous state (a small hit game state), and a game state that is controlled after the end of the advantageous state. Can be controlled to a special state (high-accuracy/second KT state) and a predetermined state (high-accuracy/first KT state) that is a gaming state controlled after the end of the advantageous state and is different from the special state. And
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
A predetermined display common to the special state (high accuracy/second KT state) and the predetermined state (high accuracy/first KT state) (“cloudiness as a background image”) "Image", "rain image", and "typhoon image"),
When the special state (high accuracy/second KT state) is controlled, it is possible to display a special display corresponding to the special state (a special display 18TM100 in which a character "RUSH" is displayed). A gaming machine to do.
The predetermined display can be shared between the special state and the predetermined state, and the special state and the predetermined display can be specified by the special display, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means C2 is
A gaming machine of means C1,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
It is possible to control to any one of the multiple effect modes (cloudy mode, rain mode, and typhoon mode).
It is possible to control to a common effect mode when the special state (high-accuracy/second KT state) is controlled and when the predetermined state (high-accuracy/first KT state) is controlled (FIG. As shown in 11-2, regardless of whether the game state is controlled to either the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state) or the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), as a common effect mode It is possible to control to the cloudy mode, and it is rain as a common effect mode regardless of whether it is controlled to any of the high-probability/first KT state (probability change state) and the high-probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). Typhoon mode as a common performance mode, which can be controlled to any mode, and is controlled in any of the high-precision/first KT state (probability change state) and the high-precision/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) game state. Controllable to)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to control in a common effect mode when it is controlled to a special state and when it is controlled to the predetermined state, and the material is common in the effect mode regardless of the game state. The development cost can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means C3 is
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2,
The game state control means (CPU 103),
Depending on the type of the advantageous state (6R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit), the game state is controlled to one of the special state and the predetermined state (as shown in FIG. 10-29, [ When 10R probability variation big hit] or [2R probability variation big hit] occurs, it shifts to the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) after the big hit game, and when [6R probability variation big hit] occurs , After the jackpot game is over, it shifts to the high-accuracy/first KT state (probability change state))
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the game state is controlled to be either the special state or the predetermined state according to the type of the advantageous state, so that the player is allowed to pay attention to the type of the advantageous state and the attraction of the effect related to the advantageous state is obtained. Can be improved.

The gaming machine of means C4 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C3,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
When the special state (high-accuracy/second KT state) is controlled and when the predetermined state (high-accuracy/first KT state) is controlled, the player's operation (the push button 31B by the player is Based on the fact that it has been operated, it is possible to control to any one of a plurality of effect modes (as shown in FIGS. 11-9 and 11-11, the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 The [cloudy mode] shown in the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 displayed in is switched to [typhoon mode], and at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol ends, the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5 Since the [typhoon mode] indicated by the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 in is different from the currently controlled effect mode (cloudy mode), the effect mode is selected from the currently controlled effect mode (cloudy mode). It has been changed to the effect mode (typhoon mode) shown in icon 18TM300)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the effect mode based on the operation of the player when it is controlled to the special state and when it is controlled to the predetermined state. The interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means C5 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C4,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
Any one of a plurality of effect modes based on the operation of the player (the push button 31B is operated by the player) while being controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) In the production mode selection period of the big hit ending period (the period of T1 to T4 shown in FIG. 11-6), after the big hit game state is finished, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (B1) to (B3). It is possible to select from cloudy mode, rain mode, and typhoon mode as the controlled production mode),
The special display can be displayed while being controlled to the advantageous state (as shown in FIG. 11-7 (B4), in the effect mode selection period of the big hit ending period, the typhoon mode image of the image display device 5 is displayed. A special display 18TM100 with the letters "RUSH" corresponding to being controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is superimposed on the upper right and lower left portions of the 18TM200C.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to easily specify that the special state is controlled when the advantageous state is controlled.

The gaming machine of means C6 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C5,
The production control means (production control CPU 120)
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests whether or not to be controlled to the special state (a RUSH suggestion effect that suggests to be controlled to a high-precision/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) after the end of a big hit can be executed. Is)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when selecting the effect mode.

The gaming machine of means C7 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C6,
The game state control means (CPU 103) concurrently displays a variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and a variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol). Is feasible,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120), in the special state (high accuracy/second KT state), the variable display of the first specific identification information (first special symbol) controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) It is possible to execute a specific corresponding effect (big hit countdown effect) corresponding to
A mode of the specific correspondence effect (big hit countdown effect) is common regardless of the effect mode.
With such a configuration, in the special state, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game relating to the specific corresponding effect corresponding to the variable display of the first specific identification information corresponding to the advantageous state.

[Explanation regarding the characteristic part 30TM]
Next, the characteristic unit 30TM will be described. In the embodiment described below, as shown in the above [description regarding the characteristic part 18TM], the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be simultaneously executed in parallel. ..

Further, in the embodiment described below, as shown in the above-mentioned [Explanation regarding the characteristic part 18TM], when the game state is controlled to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the player However, it is possible to select any effect mode from the cloudy mode, the rain mode, and the typhoon mode. In the above [description regarding the characteristic part 18TM], an example in which the effect mode can be selected in (i) the big hit ending period or (ii) the period during which the variable display is executed has been described. Then, (i) the effect mode can be selected only during the big hit ending period. In addition, you may apply the structure which can select a production mode in (i) big hit ending period or (ii) the period which is performing variable display with respect to embodiment shown below.

(Variation pattern)
When the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern in the high probability/second KT state based on the variation pattern table [high probability/second KT time] for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10-9(I) described above, the display result In some cases, the second variation pattern #32, which has a short variation time of 1.5 seconds, may be determined as the variation pattern in which "is a small hit". On the other hand, in the embodiment described below, as the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern when being controlled to the high probability/second KT state, the second special symbol shown in FIG. 12-1. The variation pattern table for symbols [high probability/at the time of the second KT] is used, and the second variation pattern #32 of the short variation in the variation time is not determined as the variation pattern in which the display result is “small hit”. There is. In the embodiment described below, the variation pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol in the high probability/second KT state is determined to be one of the second variation patterns #29 to #31, #33, and #34.

In the example illustrated in FIG. 12A, in the high probability/second KT state, when the display result is determined to be “out”, the variation pattern is the second variation time of 1.5 seconds and no reach. The variation pattern #29, the second variation pattern #30 with a variation time of 5 seconds and no reach, and the second variation pattern #31 with a variation time of 20 seconds and a reach are determined. In addition, in the high probability/second KT state, when the display result is determined to be “small hit”, the variation pattern is determined to be the second variation pattern #33 that has a variation time of 5 seconds and does not involve reach. .. Further, in the high probability/second KT state, when the display result is determined to be a “big hit”, the variation pattern is determined to be the second variation pattern #34 with a reach and a reach of 2 minutes.

Based on the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 12-1, by determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the second KT state, the variation time is 5 as the variation pattern when the display result is “small hit”. Only the second variation pattern #33, which is the second, will be determined. Therefore, when a small hit occurs in the second KT state, it is possible to secure a sufficient period for executing the effect of notifying that the small hit occurs.

As described in [Description of Characteristic Part 18TM], in the present embodiment, the gaming state includes a normal state (low probability/non-KT state) and a KT state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. In this characteristic unit 30TM, the gaming state is controlled to a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state: normal state), and a low probability and first KT state (low probability/first KT state: time saving). State), a high probability and a first KT state (high probability/first KT state; probability variation state), and a high probability and a second KT state (high probability/second KT state: small hit RUSH) State). Since the “relationship between the jackpot type and the game state” and the “relationship between the game state and the effect design and effect mode” in the present embodiment are the same as the relationship described in the above-mentioned “description regarding the characteristic part 18TM”, The description is omitted.

(High probability/screen composition in 2nd KT state)
FIG. 12-2 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of each effect information displayed on the screen when the game state is controlled to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). In this example, the cloudy mode is selected as the effect mode.

As shown in FIG. 12-2, in the jackpot ending period, when the player determines the fog mode as the effect mode, when the game state is controlled to the high probability/second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect. Mode is controlled to cloudy mode. When the production mode is the cloudy mode and the game state is controlled to the high probability/second KT state, the "cloudy image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. A special display 30TM100 corresponding to being controlled to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is displayed on the section and the lower left part of the screen. The special display 30TM100 is superimposed and displayed on the background image with a higher priority than the background image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the background image and is superimposed and displayed so as to be seen by the player in the foreground).

As shown in FIG. 12-2, the CPU 120 for effect control corresponds to the fact that the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is “small hit”, and corresponds to any of the numerical symbols (the book) in the symbol display area 5L. In the example, "1") is stopped, and one of the numerical symbols ("8" in this example) is stopped in the symbol display area 5R, and the special symbol 30TM050 (ellipse shaped object is "OPEN" in the symbol display area 5C) Is a decorative pattern in which the character "" is shown, and the decorative pattern for informing the occurrence of a small hit) is stopped. In this way, in the present embodiment, when the effect mode is controlled to the cloudy mode, the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is "small hit", corresponding to the symbol display areas 5L, 5R. The numerical symbols are fixedly stopped, and the special symbol 30TM050 is fixedly stopped in the symbol display area 5C. Thereby, even after the combination of the numerical symbols that do not reach the symbol display areas 5L and 5R is stopped, the player can expect a small hit (the special symbol 30TM050 is stopped in the symbol display area 5C). it can.

Further, the effect control CPU 120, in the cloudy mode, based on the small symbol corresponding to the special symbol 30TM050 to be fixedly stopped when a small hit is set to "0", in the second small symbol display area 512, "1" of the second small symbol corresponding to "1" of the decorative symbol (numeral symbol), the second small symbol display area 5c2, "0" of the second small symbol corresponding to the special symbol 30TM050, the second small symbol In the display area 5r2, the second small symbol "8" corresponding to the decorative symbol (numeric symbol) "8" is fixedly stopped.

As shown in FIG. 12-2, when the variable display result of the second special symbol is “small hit” in the second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 displays the small hit character in the central portion of the image display device 5. This will notify the occurrence of a small hit. In the present embodiment, the currently set setting value is suggested by the first setting suggesting effect that changes the mode of the small hit character at this time.

As the small hit character in the present embodiment, there are a small hit character 30TM150A in a normal mode (white mode), a small hit character 30TM150B in a blue mode, and a small hit character 30TM150C in a red mode. In the example shown in FIG. 12-2, the occurrence of the small hit is informed by displaying the small hit character 30TM150A of the normal mode and the words "small hit!!" in the central portion of the image display device 5.

Further, when the second KT state is being controlled, as shown in FIG. 12-2, in the history display area 30TM170A at the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, "the normal mode (with the occurrence of a small hit in the second KT state ( The small hit character history image 30TM160A corresponding to "displaying the small hit character 30TM150A in white mode" is displayed, and the number history display A indicating "the number of times the small hit character 30TM150A is displayed in the second KT state" is displayed. To be done.

When the second KT state is being controlled, as shown in FIG. 12-2, in the history display area 30TM170B at the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, "a blue aspect is generated due to the occurrence of a small hit in the second KT state." The small hit character history image 30TM160B corresponding to "the small hit character 30TM150B is displayed" is displayed, and the number history display B indicating "the display count of the small hit character 30TM150B in the second KT state" is displayed.

When the second KT state is controlled, as shown in FIG. 12-2, in the history display area 30TM170C at the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5, “a red mode is generated due to the occurrence of a small hit in the second KT state. The small hit character history image 30TM160C corresponding to "the small hit character 30TM150C is displayed" is displayed, and the number history display C indicating "the display count of the small hit character 30TM150C in the second KT state" is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 12B, the small hit character 30TM150A in the normal mode (white mode) is displayed as the 10th small hit occurs after being controlled to the second KT state. In this example, nine small hits have been completed from the time when the second KT state was controlled to the present time, and the small hit that occurs this time is the tenth small hit. Characters such as “×8” are displayed as the number-of-times history display A based on the fact that the small hit character 30TM150A in the normal mode (white mode) is displayed for eight of the small hits, and blue for each small hit. Based on the fact that the small hit character 30TM150B of the mode is displayed, a character such as “×1” is displayed as the number history display B, and the small hit character 30TM150C of the red mode is displayed for one small hit. Based on this, a character such as “×1” is displayed as the number-of-times history display C.

Further, since the first reserved memory number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved memory number special display area 30TM015 of the image display device 5 to display “0” and the second reserved memory number is 4. Therefore, “4” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 30TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 30TM031 displays the active display 30TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second hold display area 30TM021 displays four second hold displays 30TM020.

During the period of being controlled to the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 12B, the image display device 5 displays a small number of small hits indicating the number of small hits that have occurred after being controlled to the second KT state. Together with the number of prize balls awarded in the big hit game that triggered the control to the second KT state (the number of prize balls awarded based on the winning of the special variable prize ball device 7) and the small hit game in the second KT state. The small hit medium prize ball number display showing the number of prize balls including the number of prize balls (number of prize balls awarded based on winning in the special variable winning ball device 17) is displayed.

In this example, since the 10R certainty variation big hit occurs and is controlled to the second KT state, nine small hits have been completed so far, and the decorative pattern is displayed based on the variation pattern in which the display result is "small hit". The 10th small hit has occurred in response to the fixed stop. In this case, a character such as "10th time" is displayed as the small hit number display. In addition, in the big hit game of the 10R certainty variation big hit that became the opportunity to be controlled to the second KT state, 15 prize balls of 10 balls x 10 rounds = 1500 rounds are awarded, and 10 prizes of 3 balls for each subsequent small hit game. =30 prize balls were awarded, and 30×10=270 prize balls were awarded by a total of 9 small hit games, so that a total of 1770 prize balls were awarded. Characters such as "1770pt" are displayed as the number of small winning medium prize balls.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-2, when the second KT state is controlled, in the card image display area 30TM210 at the upper left portion of the screen of the image display device 5, a card image corresponding to the occurrence of a small hit in the second KT state. 30TM200 is displayed, and a card number display indicating the number of card images 30TM200 provided in the second KT state is displayed.

In the present embodiment, the timing when the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol whose display result is "small hit" is finished (the timing when the combination of the decorative symbols which is "small hit" is definitely stopped). Then, the number indicated by the card number display is incremented by one. That is, since the card image 30TM200 is displayed (applied) every time a small hit occurs in the second KT state, the number shown in the card number display corresponds to the number shown in the small hit number display. In the present example, characters such as “×10” are displayed as the card number display in response to the 10th small hit after the control in the second KT state.

The number history display A, the number history display B, the number history display C, the small hit number display, and the number-of-cards display described above are all game states different from the high-probability/second KT state ( A big hit occurs based on the variation display executed in the normal state, the low probability/first KT state, and the high probability/first KT state), and the high probability/second KT state occurs after the big hit game state ends. When it is controlled to 0, 0 is set as an initial value. That is, when the 10R certainty variation big hit or the 2R certainty variation big hit big hit game that occurs in a gaming state different from the high probability/second KT state is finished, and the gaming state shifts to the high probability/second KT state, each display item is displayed. The initial value 0 is set.

On the other hand, with regard to the small hit medium prize ball number display, based on the variable display executed in the gaming state (normal state, low probability/first KT state, high probability/first KT state) different from the high probability/second KT state. When a big hit occurs, 0 is set as an initial value. That is, when the big hit game of 10R certainty variation big hit or 2R certainty variation big hit that occurs in a game state different from the high probability/second KT state is started, the initial value 0 is set. Then, after that, every time a prize ball is awarded based on the winning of the special variable prize ball device 7, the number of awarded prize balls is added. Further, after the high probability/second KT state is controlled, the number of awarded prize balls is added every time a prize ball is awarded based on the winning of the special variable winning ball device 17.

After the high probability/second KT state is controlled, each time a small hit occurs, one of the count history display A, the count history display B, and the count history display C is incremented by one, and the small hit The number display is incremented by 1, and the card number display is incremented by 1.

When controlled to the high probability/second KT state, the above-mentioned small hit character history image 30TM160A and count history display A, small hit character history image 30TM160B and count history display B, small hit character history image 30TM160C and count history display C are displayed. It is possible to display the number of small hits, the card image 30TM200 and the number of cards, and the number of small winning medium prize balls on the screen.

Then, when a big hit of a big hit type that is not controlled to a high probability/second KT state (for example, a 6R certainty variation big hit or a 2R normal big hit) occurs (for example, a high-probability/big hit of a big hit type that is not controlled to a second KT state, a variable display) Is executed, or is controlled to the high probability/big hit game state of the big hit type which is not controlled to the second KT state), the above small hit character history image 30TM160A, the number of times history display A, and the small hit character history image 30TM160B. The number of times history display B, the small hit character history image 30TM160C, the number of times history display C, the number of small hits display, the card image 30TM200, the number of cards display, and the small hit medium prize ball number display are not displayed.

Here, the number of times the first setting suggestion effect indicated by the number history display A is not executed (for example, “×17”) and the number of times the first setting suggestion effect in the blue mode indicated by the number history display B is executed (for example, “ X2"), and the number of times the first setting suggestion effect in the red mode indicated by the number-of-times history display C has been executed (for example, "x1"), and the value of the small hit number display (for example, "20th time"), The value of the number of cards display (for example, “×20”) and the value of the number of small prize medium prize balls display (for example, “2100pt”) are both high probability/big hit type game state of the big hit type not controlled to the second KT state. Is reset when 0 ends.

On the other hand, based on the variable display of the special symbol executed in the high probability/second KT state, when a big hit of the type controlled by the high probability/second KT state (for example, 10R certainty variation big hit, 2R certainty variation big hit) occurs. Is the number of times the first setting suggestion effect indicated by the number history display A was not executed (for example, “×17”), and the number of times the first setting suggestion effect in the blue mode indicated by the number history display B was executed (for example, “×”). 2"), and the number of times the red-form first setting suggestion effect indicated by the number-of-times history display C has been executed (for example, "x1"), and the value of the small hit number display (for example, "20th time"), the card The number display value (eg, “×20”) and the small hit medium prize ball number display value (eg, “2100pt”) are not reset, and the high probability/second KT state after the end of the big hit game state Each value is carried over to and can be updated.

In this way, once the small hit RUSH state (high probability/second KT state) is entered, the number of times history display A and the number of times history display are displayed until the condition for ending the small hit RUSH state (high probability/second KT state) is satisfied. B, the number of times history display C, the small hit count display, the number of cards display, and the small hit medium prize ball count display can be displayed on the screen and updated.

(1st setting suggestion production)
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can execute the first setting suggesting effect as the setting suggesting effect that suggests the setting value of the gaming machine. The first setting suggestive effect is a predetermined timing (for example, before the fixed stop of the decorative symbol, when the variable display of the second special symbol whose display result is "small hit" is being executed in the second KT state. This is an effect for displaying a small hit character that notifies the occurrence of a small hit at the timing), and an effect for suggesting the set value of the gaming machine depending on the mode of the small hit character to be displayed. Since the mode of the small hit character at this time is determined at different rates according to the set value, the set value is suggested by the displayed mode of the small hit character.

In the present embodiment, when the variable display result of the second special symbol is "small hit" in the second KT state, when it is determined to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the central portion of the image display device 5 is displayed. , The small hit character 30TM150B in the blue form or the small hit character 30TM150C in the red form is displayed. That is, when the first setting suggestion effect is executed, the displayed small hit character is blue or red.

On the other hand, when the variable display result of the second special symbol in the second KT state is “small hit”, when it is determined not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the normal mode is displayed in the central portion of the image display device 5. The small hit character 30TM150A of (white form) is displayed. That is, when the first setting suggestion effect is not executed, the displayed small hit character is white.

In this way, when a small hit occurs, by displaying setting suggestion information (small hit character) indicating the set value, the player can determine whether or not the variable display result is "small hit". Of course, attention will also be paid to the setting suggestion information displayed in response to the variable display result being "small hit".

In the present embodiment, it is possible to raise the player's interest in the first setting suggestion effect by executing the first setting suggestion effect in response to the occurrence of the small hit in the second KT state. Here, when the game is controlled to a small hitting game state in which a game value is easily given (when an effect for informing the occurrence of a small hit is executed), a setting value that is advantageous to the player is suggested, so that the game is played. Will feel even more advantageous.

As a result, even if the second KT state is ended and the non-KT state (normal state) is controlled thereafter, the setting value that is advantageous to the player is suggested, so that the player may continue the game. Get higher In this way, by overlapping at least a part of the execution period of the first setting suggestion effect and the execution period of the effect for notifying the occurrence of the small hit (or the control period of the small hit game state), the player's willingness to play the game is increased. It can be increased to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

(Variation start effect determination process)
FIG. 12-3 is a flowchart showing the variation start time effect determination process. In this variation start time effect determination process, whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined.

The effect control CPU 120 executes this variation start time effect determination process in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the one set of commands (a reserved storage number subtraction designation command, a display result designation command, and a variation pattern command) that accompany the start of variable display of special symbols, Effect control pattern for executing the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol based on the display result designation command and the variation pattern command (of the control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) 12), the effect to be executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the specified variation pattern is determined by the variation start time effect determination process shown in FIG. 12C.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the gaming state is the high probability/second KT state (step S30TM1000). When the gaming state is not the high probability/second KT state (NO in step S30TM1000), the effect control CPU 120 directly ends the process.

When the gaming state is the high probability/second KT state (YES in step S30TM1000), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display result is “small hit” (NO in step S30TM1010). When the display result is not "small hit" (NO in step S30TM1010), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

When the display result is "small hit" (YES in step S30TM1010), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the first setting suggestive effect using the first setting suggestion effect execution/non-execution determination table (FIG. 12-4). (See reference), the process is terminated.

As illustrated in FIG. 12-4, in the first setting suggestion effect execution presence/absence determination table, determination values for determining whether the first setting suggestion effect execution is performed and the effect mode are allocated according to the set value. Has been.

When the setting value is “1” (that is, when the setting value designated by the setting value designation command is “1”), the effect control CPU 120 executes the first setting suggesting effect at a rate of 80%. It is decided not to do so, it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect in the blue mode at a rate of 10.5%, and it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect in the red mode at a rate of 9.5%. To do.

When the set value is “2” (that is, the set value specified by the set value specifying command is “2”), the effect control CPU 120 executes the first setting suggesting effect at a rate of 80%. It is decided not to do so, it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect of the blue mode at a rate of 9.5%, and it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect of the red aspect at a rate of 10.5%. To do.

When the setting value is “3” (that is, when the setting value specified by the setting value specifying command is “3”), the effect control CPU 120 executes the first setting suggesting effect at a rate of 80%. It is decided not to do so, it is decided to execute the first setting suggestive effect in the blue mode at a rate of 11%, and it is decided to execute the first setting suggestive effect in the red mode at a rate of 9%.

When the setting value is "4" (that is, when the setting value specified by the setting value specifying command is "4"), the effect control CPU 120 executes the first setting suggesting effect at a rate of 80%. It is decided not to do so, it is decided to execute the first setting suggestive effect in the blue mode at a rate of 9%, and it is decided to execute the first setting suggestive effect in the red mode at a rate of 11%.

When the setting value is "5" (that is, when the setting value specified by the setting value specifying command is "5"), the effect control CPU 120 executes the first setting suggesting effect at a rate of 80%. It is decided not to do so, it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect in the blue mode at a rate of 11.5%, and it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect in the red mode at a rate of 8.5%. To do.

When the setting value is "6" (that is, when the setting value specified by the setting value specifying command is "6"), the effect control CPU 120 executes the first setting suggesting effect at a rate of 80%. It decides not to do so, decides to execute the first setting suggestion effect of the blue mode at a rate of 8.5%, and decides to execute the first setting suggestion effect of the red mode at a rate of 11.5%. To do.

In this way, when the setting value is any of "1", "3", and "5" (that is, the setting value designated by the setting value designation command is any of "1", "3", and "5"). In this case), the proportion of the small hit character displayed in blue is higher than the proportion of the small hit character displayed in red. On the other hand, if the set value is any of "2", "4", and "6" (that is, if the set value specified by the set value specifying command is "2", "4", or "6"). In some cases), the percentage of the small hit character displayed in red is higher than the percentage of the small hit character displayed in blue.

Therefore, the first setting suggestion effect in which the blue small hit character is displayed is an effect that suggests that the setting value is an odd number (the setting value is any one of "1", "3", and "5"). ing. Also, the first setting suggestion effect in which the red small hit character is displayed is an effect that suggests that the setting value is an even number (the setting value is any of “2”, “4”, and “6”). ing. In this way, the first setting suggestion effect is an even-odd suggestion effect that suggests whether the set value is an even number or an odd number.

When the set value is “5” (that is, the set value specified by the set value specifying command is “5”), the set value is “3” (that is, by the set value specifying command). The proportion of the small hit character displayed in blue is higher than that in the case where the designated setting value is “3”). When the set value is “3” (that is, the set value specified by the set value specifying command is “3”), the set value is “1” (that is, by the set value specifying command). The proportion of the small hit character displayed in blue is higher than that in the case where the designated setting value is “1”).

When the set value is "6" (that is, the set value specified by the set value specifying command is "6"), when the set value is "4" (that is, by the set value specifying command The proportion of the small hit character displayed in red is higher than that in the case where the designated setting value is “4”). When the set value is "4" (that is, the set value specified by the set value specifying command is "4"), the set value is "2" (that is, by the set value specifying command). The proportion of the small hit character displayed in red is higher than that in the case where the designated setting value is “2”).

Therefore, in the first setting suggestion effect, the higher the proportion of the blue small hit character is displayed (the lower the proportion of the red small hit character is displayed), the higher the proportion that the set value is an odd value, and That is, the percentage of the set value (odd value) that is advantageous to the player is high. In this way, the first setting suggestion effect in which the blue small hit character is displayed is an effect that suggests that the setting value is an odd value, and also suggests that it is a high setting value among the odd values. It has become a production.

Further, in the first setting suggestion effect, the higher the proportion of the red small hit character is displayed (the lower the proportion of the blue small hit character is displayed), the higher the proportion that the set value is an even value, and That is, the ratio of the set value (even value) advantageous to the player is high. In this way, the first setting suggestion effect in which the red small hit character is displayed is an effect that suggests that the setting value is an even value, and also indicates that it is a high setting value among the even values. It has become a production.

As described above, the first setting suggestion effect is an even-odd suggestion effect that suggests whether the setting value is an even number or an odd number, and whether the setting value is any of "1" to "6". It is also a suggestive setting suggestive production.

(Relationship between jackpot type and super reach production)
As shown in FIG. 10-29, when the gaming state is controlled to have a high probability/second KT state, when the big hit type “10R probability variation big hit” occurs, the variation pattern of super reach The variable display is executed based on this. In this case, as the super reach effect, a battle effect in which the ally character 30TM300 and the enemy character 30TM310 battle each other is executed, and a victory effect in which the ally character 30TM300 wins over the enemy character 30TM310 is executed.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-29, when the gaming state is controlled to have a high probability/second KT state, when a jackpot of the jackpot type “10R probability variation jackpot” occurs, the jackpot game concerned. After the state ends, it is controlled to the high probability/second KT state. Therefore, the player can win the ally character 30TM300, and it is relatively easy to cause the special variable winning ball device 17 to win the game ball in the small hitting game state even after the big hitting game state ends. Know to continue. That is, the winning effect of the present embodiment is an effect of notifying (indicating) that the high probability/second KT state continues.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when the gaming state is controlled to a high probability/second KT state, the types of jackpots are “6R certainty variation jackpot”, “2R certainty variation jackpot”, and “2R normal jackpot”, When a jackpot of any type occurs, the variable display based on the variation pattern of super reach is executed. In this case, as the super reach effect, a battle effect in which the ally character 30TM300 and the enemy character 30TM310 battle each other is executed, and a defeat effect in which the ally character 30TM300 is defeated by the enemy character 30TM310 is executed.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-29, when the gaming state is controlled to have a high probability/second KT state, (i) if the jackpot type “6R certainty variation jackpot” occurs, High probability/first KT state is controlled after the jackpot gaming state ends, and (ii) when a jackpot of “2R probability variation big hit” of the jackpot type occurs, high probability/second KT state is controlled after the jackpot gaming state ends. And, (iii) when the big hit of the big hit type "2R normal big hit" occurs, it is controlled to the low probability/first KT state after the end of the big hit game state. By the defeat of the teammate character 30TM300, the player is controlled to a high probability/second KT state in which it is relatively easy to cause the special variable winning ball device 17 to win the game ball in the small hit game state after the big hit game state ends. It is unlikely that it is difficult to win the game balls to the special variable winning ball device 17 in the small hitting game state. It is highly likely that the probability is controlled to the high probability/first KT state or low probability/first KT state. To do. That is, the winning effect of the present embodiment is an effect that suggests (notifies) that the high-probability/second KT state will end.

However, when the jackpot type is "2R probability variable jackpot", once the defeat production is executed due to the stop of the decorative pattern, it is controlled to the high probability/second KT state after the jackpot game state ends (high probability/first Corresponding to (2KT state continues), the remaining period until the special symbol is fixedly stopped, the period from the fixed stop of the special symbol to the opening of the special winning opening (fanfare production period), large Opening period of prize holes (during period during round), period from closing of big winning port to opening of next big opening (period of interval direction), after closing of big winning port last During the period until the jackpot gaming state is ended (the period of ending effect), etc., a revival effect is informed (indicated) that the high probability/second KT state is controlled. For example, the revival effect may be an effect in which the teammate character 30TM300 who seems to have been defeated wins the enemy character 30TM310 in reverse. By adopting such an effect configuration, even if the defeat effect is executed, the player expects the subsequent rehabilitation effect, and the player's motivation for the game is maintained without excessively discouraging the player. be able to.

(High probability/setting suggestion in the second KT state)
Next, an example of an effect when the first setting suggestion effect is executed in the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-5 and 12-6. FIG. 12-5 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the first setting suggestion effect is executed in the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), and FIG. 12-6(1) to (8) is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect image when the first setting suggestion effect is executed in the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state).

FIG. 12-6 (1) to (3) is an example of an effect image when the variable display in which the display result is “small hit” is executed when the game state is controlled to the high probability/second KT state. 12-6 (4) to (8) show an example of the effect image in the case where the variable display in which the display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "2R normal big hit" is executed. ..

First, as shown in FIG. 12-6(1), when the game state is controlled to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), when the cloudy mode is selected as the effect mode, The control CPU 120 displays the "cloudy image" as the background image of the decorative pattern.

Here, when the game state is controlled to the high probability/second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 displays the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. The special display 30TM100 in which the character of "RUSH" corresponding to being controlled by () is displayed is displayed. The special display 30TM100 is displayed with a higher priority than the background image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the background image and is superimposed and displayed so as to be seen by the player in the foreground).

When CUP103 is performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) (Variable display) is performed, and in the second small symbol display areas 51, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5, the variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is performed. ing. Also, based on the fact that the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol executed last time (most recently executed) was “out”, the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1 of the image display device 5, In 5r1, the combination of the first small symbols (in this example, “245”) when the variable display is definitely stopped is continuously displayed.

Since the first reserved storage number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays “0” in the first reserved storage number special display area 30TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is 4. Therefore, “4” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 30TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 30TM031 displays the active display 30TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second hold display area 30TM021 displays four second hold displays 30TM020.

In this example, it is assumed that the small hits have occurred 19 times between the time when the high probability/second KT state is controlled and the present time, and the small hit character 30TM150A in the normal mode (white mode) is used for the 17 small hits. It is assumed that the small-sized hit character 30TM150B in the blue form is displayed for one small hit, and the small-sized hit character 30TM150C in the red form is displayed for one small hit.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the history display area 30TM170A at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 to display the character “×17” as the number-of-times history display A corresponding to the small hit character history image 30TM160A, and the image is displayed. In the history display area 30TM170B at the lower left of the screen of the display device 5, the character “×1” is displayed as the number-of-times history display B corresponding to the small hit character history image 30TM160B, and the history display at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. In the area 30TM170C, the character “×1” is displayed as the number-of-times history display C in association with the small hit character history image 30TM160C.

The effect control CPU 120 causes the card image display area 30TM210 in the upper left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 to display the character “×19” as the number of cards display corresponding to the card image 30TM200.

When controlled to the high probability/second KT state, as shown in FIG. 12-6(1), the image display device 5 displays the small hit count display and the small hit medium prize ball count display. To be done. In this example, after the occurrence of "10R probability variation big hit" and control to the high probability/second KT state, there are 19 small hits up to the present time, which corresponds to "19 small hit number display". Characters such as "Time" are displayed. Also, during the big hit game of "10R probability variation big hit", 15 × 10 balls × 10 rounds = 1500 prize balls are obtained, and after that, 10 × 3 balls = 30 prize balls are obtained for each small hit. , 30×19=570 prize balls were obtained in 19 small wins, and a total of 2070 prize balls were obtained. Characters such as “2070pt” are displayed.

The effect control CPU 120 determines that the display result of the variable display executed in the high probability/second KT state is “small hit”, and at step S30TM1020 of the variation start effect determination process, the first setting suggestion effect in the blue mode. Based on the fact that it has been decided to execute, a timing (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 12-5) after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of fluctuation of the decorative pattern (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 12-5), As shown in 12-6(1), a small hit character that notifies the occurrence of a small hit is displayed, and the first setting suggestion effect in the blue mode is executed. That is, the small hit character 30TM150B in a blue mode is displayed at the center of the image display device 5 to notify the occurrence of the small hit and suggest the set value.

The small hit character is displayed with a higher priority than the background image and the decorative pattern (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the background image and the decorative pattern and is superimposed and displayed so as to be seen by the player in the foreground).

Next, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 12-6 (2), the decorative symbol “1” in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5 and the special symbol 30TM050 (oval-shaped object) in the symbol display area 5C. (Small hit design in which the character "OPEN" is shown), and the decorative design "8" is stopped and displayed in the design display area 5R (timing T3 shown in FIG. 12-5).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays the blue mode small hit character 30TM150B in the center of the image display device 5 and also displays the line "small hit!!". In this way, the occurrence of the small hit is continuously notified and the setting value is suggested. Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the small hit number display to “20th time” in response to the start of the small hit game.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 calls the number history display B in the history display area 30TM170B at the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5 "x2" in response to the display of the blue-sized small hit character 30TM150B. The characters are updated, and the display of the number of cards in the card image display area 30TM210 at the upper left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 is updated to the characters “×20”.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays a decorative symbol “1” in the symbol display area 5L, a special symbol 30TM050 (a small hit symbol in which the letters “OPEN” are shown in an elliptical object) in the symbol display area 5C, symbol display The decoration symbol "8" is fixedly stopped in the area 5R, the second small symbol display area 5l2 of the image display device 5 is "1", and the second small symbol display area 5c2 is the second small symbol " 0", and the second small symbol "8" in the second small symbol display area 5r2 is fixedly stopped (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 12-5).

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-6(3), the effect control CPU 120 controls the gaming state to the small hitting gaming state and the special variable winning ball device 17 is open (FIG. 12-5). In the period of T4 to T5 shown in (1), the active display 30TM030 displayed in the active display area 30TM031 and the four second hold displays 30TM020 displayed in the second hold display area 30TM021 are erased, and the image display device 5 The blue-sized small hit character 30TM250B is continuously displayed on the screen, and the dialogue "OPEN!" is displayed.

Here, during the period in which the special variable winning ball device 17 is open, three game balls are won in the special winning opening, and the number of prize balls is further increased by 10 balls×3 balls=30 balls to become a total of 2100 balls. It is assumed that In this case, the effect control CPU 120 displays three “+10” images at the bottom of the screen and updates the small hit medium prize ball count display to “2100 pt” as shown in FIG. 12-6(3).

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-6(4), the effect control CPU 120 displays an image based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern command when the CUP 103 starts the variation display of the second special symbol. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the device 5, while starting the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol), the second small symbol display area 512 of the image display device 5, In 5c2, 5r2, the variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) has started (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 12-5).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 30TM030 in the active display area 30TM031 and the second hold displayed in the second hold display area 30TM021 as the second hold storage number becomes 3. The display 30TM020 is shifted to the active display area 30TM031 side by one, and “3” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 30TM025.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-6(5), the effect control CPU 120 displays “2” in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing at which the reach state in the variation pattern should be established. The decorative pattern is stopped and displayed to reach the reach state, and the letters "REACH!!" are displayed on the upper portion of the image display device 5 (timing T6 shown in FIG. 12-5). At this time, in the second small symbol display areas 51, 5c2, 5r2, the variable display of the small symbols is continued. That is, in the second small symbol display area 5l2 corresponding to the symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the second small symbol display area 5r2 corresponding to the symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, The second small symbol is continuously displayed in a variable manner without being stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-6(6), the effect control CPU 120 executes the battle effect based on the variation pattern of the super reach after the reach state is established. In this example, a battle effect accompanied by a defeat effect is executed in response to the occurrence of a big hit of a big hit type (for example, a 6R sure change big hit or a 2R normal big hit) that is not controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state. Here, along with the execution of the battle effect, the image display device 5 displays the teammate character 30TM300 and the enemy character 30TM310 (timing T7 shown in FIG. 13-5).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the small hit character history image 30TM160A and the number of times history display A (the character “×17”) in the history display area 30TM170A, and the small hit character history image 30TM160B and the number of times history display in the history display area 30TM170B. B (the character “×2”), the small hit character history image 30TM160C and the number-of-times history display C (the character “×1”) in the history display area 30TM170C are deleted. Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control erases the card image 30TM200 and the card number display (characters “×19”) in the card image display area 30TM210 of the image display device 5. Further, the effect control CPU 120 also erases the small hit number display (the character “20th time”) and the small hit medium prize ball number display (the character “2100pt”) in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5. ..

In this way, when the battle effect corresponding to the variation pattern of the super reach is executed, the small hit character history image and the number of times history display, the card image and the number of cards display, and the small hit number display and the small hit are displayed. By hiding any of the middle prize number displays, the player can be made to pay attention to the battle effect.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 12-6(7), in response to the occurrence of a big hit of a big hit type (for example, 6R certainty variation big hit or 2R normal big hit) that is not controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state, as shown in FIG. As a reach effect, a defeat effect in which the teammate character 30TM300 is defeated by the enemy character 30TM310 is executed (timing T8 shown in FIG. 12-5). The player understands that the teammate character 30TM300 is defeated by the enemy character 30TM310, and thus there is a high possibility that the high probability/second KT state is not controlled after the jackpot game state ends.

At this time, the CPU 120 for effect control keeps the variable display of the small symbols in the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2. That is, even after the defeat production is executed and the high probability/second KT state is suggested (notified), the second small symbol is continuously displayed in a variable manner without being stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-6(8), the effect control CPU 120 ends the battle effect and notifies the end of the high-probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), and a RUSH end image 30TM400. Is displayed (timing of T9 shown in FIG. 12-5). In this RUSH end image 30TM400, the characters "Small hit RUSH end" displayed in the center of the screen, the characters "Total" displayed below them, and the small hit middle prize ball number display ("2100pt" in this example) Character), and a card image 30TM200 and a card number display (the character of “×20” in this example) displayed below it.

The effect control CPU 120 that has received the symbol fixing designation command in response to the end of the variable display of the second special symbol, the second small symbol “2” in the second small symbol display area 5l2 of the image display device 5, The second small symbol display area 5c2 "2" of the second small symbol, and the second small symbol display area 5r2 the second small symbol "2" is fixedly stopped (timing of T10 shown in FIG. 12-5).

As shown in FIG. 12-6(2), in the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the number of times that a small hit has occurred but the first setting suggesting effect has not been executed (white small hit The number-of-times history display A (the character “×17” in this example) corresponding to the number of times the character 30TM150A is displayed, and the number of times that the first setting suggestive effect in the blue mode is executed (the small hit character 30TM150B in the blue mode is displayed). The number-of-times history display B (the character “×2” in this example) corresponding to the number of times of display) and the number of times the first setting suggestion effect of the red aspect was executed (the small hit character 30TM150C of the red aspect was displayed. The number-of-times history display C (the character “×1” in this example) corresponding to the number of times is displayed.

Therefore, the player has the number of times the small hit has occurred (for example, 20), the number of times the first setting suggestive effect has been executed (for example, 3 times), and the breakdown thereof (for example, the first setting suggestive effect in the blue mode is 2). Times, the first setting suggestion effect in the red mode is once) can be easily grasped. In the present embodiment, the higher the ratio of the number of times of execution of the first setting suggestive effect with respect to the number of times of execution of the first setting suggestive effect is, the higher the possibility of the odd setting value is, and the higher the odd setting value is. The possibility is high. Further, the higher the ratio of the number of times of execution of the first setting suggestion effect in the red mode to the number of times of execution of the first setting suggestion effect is, the more likely it is that it is an even set value, and the possibility that it is a high even set value. It will be expensive.

In this example, since the first setting suggestive effect in the blue mode is executed at a higher rate than the first setting suggestive effect in the red mode, the player has a higher probability that the set value is an odd value. Will be guessed. In this way, by displaying the execution history of the first setting suggestive effect, it is possible to make the player infer the setting value, and the high accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is controlled. You can improve your interest when you are there.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), regardless of the number of pending storages, and regardless of whether or not variable display of decorative symbols is being executed, the lower left portion of the screen It is possible to continuously display the frequency history display A, the frequency history display B, and the frequency history display C in the (history display area 30TM170A, the history display area 30TM170B, and the history display area 30TM170C). Therefore, the player can interrupt the game and take an image of the number-of-times history display A, the number-of-times history display B, and the number-of-times history display C by using the image pickup device such as a smartphone owned by the player.

Here, since the first setting suggestion effect itself is an effect associated with the occurrence of a small hit, the player concentrates on the game and cannot afford to take an image, and it is difficult to secure an imaging time. Further, even though the first setting suggestion effect has been executed, there is a high possibility that the user may miss the aspect of the first setting suggestion effect without noticing it. In the present embodiment, the number of reserved memories is 0, the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols) is not executed (and is not controlled to the big hit game state, and the small hit game state). Even if it is not controlled), the number history display A, the number history display B, and the number history display C are displayed. This can be grasped ex post facto, and the number of times history display A, the number of times history display B, and the number of times history display C can be easily imaged.

When the image captured by the player in this manner is an image in a state where a high setting value is suggested, the image should be uploaded to a website such as a social networking service (SNS). As a result, the effect of attracting customers at the game arcade where the game machine is installed can be enhanced. That is, providing a period in which it is easy to capture the number-of-times history display A, the number-of-times history display B, and the number-of-times history display C can also contribute to improving the operation of the gaming machine in the game arcade. ..

In the present embodiment, only in the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the execution history (number history display A, number history display B, and number history display C) of the first setting suggestion effect is displayed. Although it is possible to display the execution history of the first setting suggesting effect in other game states, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the first setting suggestion is also possible in other game states (other periods). The performance execution history (number history display A, number history display B, and number history display C) may be displayed. For example, in the high probability/first KT state or the low probability/first KT state, the execution history of the first setting suggestive effect may be displayed. In addition, the execution history of the first setting suggestion effect may be displayed in the state of waiting for the game ball to pass through the passage gate 41 or in the big hit game state, and the first setting suggestion effect may be displayed during the demo display period. The execution history of may be displayed.

(Second setting suggestion production)
In the present embodiment, as the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value of the gaming machine, the second setting suggestion effect different from the above-mentioned first setting suggestion effect can be executed. The second setting suggestion effect is when the jackpot type of the jackpot based on the variable display executed in the high probability/second KT state is a type not controlled to the high probability/second KT state (for example, “2R normal jackpot”). , Is a setting suggestion effect that is executed at a predetermined timing during a period in which the type of jackpot game state is controlled. In this way, after the first setting suggestion effect is executed, the second setting suggestion effect of a type (mode) different from the first setting suggestion effect may be executed in a period different from the first setting suggestion effect. is there.

The second setting suggestion effect is an effect related to the high probability immediately before being controlled to the big hit game state/the final number of the number of cards displayed in the second KT state, and the high probability/the small hit that has occurred in the second KT state. It is a production related to the number of times. In the second setting suggesting effect, the number of playing cards corresponding to the final number of cards displayed is turned over, and the set value is suggested by the design of the displayed playing cards. Specifically, the design (type) of each playing card is determined at a different rate according to the set value, so that each design (the final number of the number of displayed cards) of the folded playing cards ( The setting value will be suggested by the ratio of (type).

The effect control CPU 120 receives a fanfare effect that corresponds to a period for notifying the start of the big hit game state based on the reception of the big hit start designation command (fanfare designation command) from the CPU 103, and a special winning opening open display designation command from the CPU 103. Based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 during the opening period corresponding to the opening period, the special variable winning a prize ball device 7 based on receiving the display designation command from the CPU 103 opening interval effect corresponding to the closing period The second setting suggestion effect can be executed as one or more effects of the ending effect corresponding to the period of notifying the end of the big hit game state based on the reception of the big hit end designation command from the CPU 103.

In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion effect and the effect mode based on the reception of the big hit start designating command (fanfare designating command), and displays the special winning opening opening display. The second setting suggestion effect is executed as the in-round effect based on the reception of the designated command.

(Direction determination process at the start of jackpot)
FIG. 12-7 is a flowchart showing a big hit start effect determination process. The big hit start time effect determination process is a process executed based on that the effect control CPU 120 receives a big hit start designation command (fanfare designating command). Whether or not the second setting suggestion effect is executed and the timing for determining the effect mode of the second setting suggestion effect are not limited to the timing when the big hit start designation command (fanfare designating command) is received, and the big winning opening open display designation is performed. It may be the timing at which the command is received.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the jackpot type is "2R normal jackpot" (step S30TM2000). When the jackpot type is not “2R normal jackpot” (NO in step S30TM2000), the effect control CPU 120 directly ends the process.

When the big hit type is "2R normal big hit" (YES in step S30TM2000), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the value of the small hit number display is 1 or more (step S30TM2010). When the value of the small hit number display is not 1 or more, that is, when the value of the small hit number display is 0 (NO in step S30TM2010), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

Here, the type of big hit is "2R normal big hit" and the value of the number of small hits is 0 means that the big hit is based on the variable display executed in the gaming state which is not the high probability/second KT state. It is either a case that occurs, or a case where the big hit occurs without the small hit occurring even once in the high probability/second KT state. In such a case, the second setting suggestion effect is not executed.

That is, even if a high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is entered, if the number of occurrences of small hits in the high probability/second KT state is less than a predetermined number (one in this example), the second The setting suggestion effect will not be executed. The second setting suggestion effect may be executable even when the number of small hits in the high probability/second KT state is less than a predetermined number. In such an effect configuration, the small probability in the high probability/second KT state may be executed. When the number of times of occurrence of is smaller than the predetermined number of times, the second setting suggestion effect may be executed at a lower rate than when the number of times of small hits in the high probability/second KT state is equal to or larger than the predetermined number of times. ..

When the value of the small hit count display is 1 or more (YES in step S30TM2010), the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the second setting suggestion effect, and sets the effect mode of the second setting suggestion effect. , Based on the effect mode determination table of the second setting suggestion effect (see FIG. 12-8) (step S30TM2020), and the process ends.

In this example, the processing of step S30TM2010 and below is executed only when the big hit type is "2R normal big hit", but not limited to this, even when the big hit type is "6R probability variable big hit", You may perform the process after step S30TM2010.

In the present embodiment, when the value of the small hit number display is n (n≧1), the number of card images provided in the high probability/second KT state is n. Then, for each of the n card images, the design (type) of the playing card is determined based on the effect mode determination table of the second setting suggestive effect (see FIG. 12-8).

(Effect mode determination table of second setting suggestion effect)
As shown in FIG. 12-8, in the effect mode determination table of the second setting suggestion effect, a determination value for determining the effect mode of the second setting suggestion effect is assigned according to the set value. ..

When the setting value is “1” (that is, the setting value designated by the setting value designation command is “1”), the effect control CPU 120 sets the card type to 60% of the playing cards of “card”. The type (design) of "J" (jack) is determined, and the type (design) of "Q" (queen) of playing cards is determined at a rate of 40%.

When the set value is "2" (that is, the set value specified by the set value specifying command is "2"), the effect control CPU 120 sets the card type to "Trump" at a rate of 4%. A (Ace) type (picture) is determined, 38% of the cards are "J" (Jack) type (picture), and 58% of the cards are "Q" (queen). Determine the type (picture).

When the set value is "3" (that is, the set value specified by the set value specifying command is "3"), the effect control CPU 120 sets the card type to "Trump" at a rate of 4%. A (Ace) type (design) is determined, 58% of the playing cards are "J" (Jack) type (design), and 38% of the playing cards are "Q" (Queen). Determine the type (design).

When the set value is “4” (that is, the set value specified by the set value specifying command is “4”), the effect control CPU 120 sets the card type to 3% of the playing cards of “Trump”. A (Ace) type (picture) is determined, 38% of the cards are "J" (Jack) type (picture), and 58% of the cards are "Q" (queen). The type (design) is determined, and the type (design) of the “K” (King) of playing cards is determined at a rate of 1%.

When the set value is “5” (that is, the set value specified by the set value specifying command is “5”), the effect control CPU 120 sets the card type to 3% of the playing cards “Trump”. A (Ace) type (design) is determined, 58% of the playing cards are "J" (Jack) type (design), and 38% of the playing cards are "Q" (Queen). The type (design) is determined, and the type (design) of the “K” (King) of playing cards is determined at a rate of 1%.

When the set value is “6” (that is, the set value specified by the set value specifying command is “6”), the effect control CPU 120 sets the card type to 3% of the playing cards of “Trump”. A (Ace) type (picture) is determined, 38% of the cards are "J" (Jack) type (picture), and 58% of the cards are "Q" (queen). The type (design) is determined, and the type (design) of the “K” (King) of playing cards is determined at a rate of 1%.

In this way, when the setting value is any of "1", "3", and "5" (that is, the setting value designated by the setting value designation command is any of "1", "3", and "5"). In the case of (), the percentage of displaying the playing card “J” (jack) is higher than the percentage of displaying the playing card “Q” (queen). On the other hand, when the set value is any of "2", "4", and "6" (that is, the set value specified by the set value specifying command is any of "2", "4", and "6"). In the case of), the rate of displaying the playing card “Q” (queen) is higher than the rate of displaying the playing card “J” (jack).

Therefore, in the second setting suggestive effect in which the playing card “J” (jack) is displayed, the setting value is an odd number (that is, the setting value designated by the setting value designation command is “1”, “3”, “5”). It is a production that suggests that it is either). Also, the second setting suggestion effect in which the playing card “Q” (queen) is displayed suggests that the setting value is an even number (the setting value is any of “2”, “4”, and “6”). It is a production. In this way, the second setting suggestion effect is an even-odd suggestion effect that suggests whether the set value is an even number or an odd number.

Further, when the set value is "1" (that is, when the set value specified by the set value specifying command is "1"), the rate at which the playing card "A" (ace) is displayed is 0%. Is. On the other hand, when the set value is any of “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, and “6” (that is, the set value designated by the set value designation command is “2”, “3”). , “4”, “5”, or “6”), the proportion of playing card “A” (ace) displayed is 3% or 4%.

Therefore, in the second setting suggestion effect in which the playing card “A” (ace) is displayed, the setting value is different from 1 (that is, the setting value designated by the setting value designation command is “2”, “3”, It is an effect that suggests that it is "4", "5", or "6"). Particularly, in this example, since the playing card “A” (ace) is displayed, it is determined that the set value is not at least “1”. As described above, the second setting suggestion effect is also a 1-negative suggestion effect that suggests (notifies) that the set value is a value different from 1.

When the set value is any of "1", "2", and "3" (that is, when the set value specified by the set value specifying command is "1", "2", or "3") In some cases, the rate at which the playing card “K” (King) is displayed is 0%. On the other hand, when the setting value is any one of "4", "5", and "6" (that is, the setting value designated by the setting value designation command is any one of "4", "5", and "6"). In the case of), the percentage of displaying “K” (King) of playing cards is 1%.

Therefore, the second setting suggestion effect in which the playing card “K” (King) is displayed is one of the setting values “4”, “5”, and “6” (that is, the setting value designated by the setting value designation command). Is any one of "4", "5", and "6"). In particular, in this example, since the playing card “K” (King) is displayed, at least the set value is “4”, “5”, or “6” (high set value). Determine. In this way, the second setting suggestive effect is a high setting suggesting effect that suggests (notifies) that the set value is the high set value.

As described above, the second setting suggestion effect is a setting suggestion effect that indicates whether the setting value is an even number or an odd number, and a setting suggesting effect that suggests that the setting value is a value different from 1. It is also a setting suggestion effect that suggests that the set value is a high set value.

In the present embodiment, in response to the occurrence of the small hit in the high probability/second KT state, the first setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value by displaying the small hit character and the high probability/second KT state are controlled. High probability/second KT state when controlled to the big hit big hit game state (particularly high probability/second big hit game state not controlled to the second KT state) based on the fluctuation display executed when The second setting suggestion effect for notifying the type of the card image given in is executed.

The first setting suggestion effect is an even-odd suggestion effect that suggests whether the setting value is an even number or an odd number. As shown in FIG. 12-4, the difference between the proportion in which the small hit character is displayed in red and the proportion in which the small hit character is displayed in blue depends on whether the setting value is “1” or “2”. If it is 1.0%, the setting value is either "3" or "4", it is 2.0%, and the setting value is "5" or "6". Is 3.0%.

The second setting suggestion effect is also an even-odd suggestion effect that suggests whether the set value is an even number or an odd number. As shown in FIG. 12-8, the difference between the rate of displaying “J” (jack) of playing cards and the rate of displaying “Q” (queen) of playing cards is 20%. Therefore, the second setting suggestive effect is a setting suggesting effect in which it is easier to reflect whether the setting value is an even number or an odd number than the first setting suggesting effect.

The first setting suggestive effect in the blue mode is an effect that suggests that the setting value is an odd number, and the second setting suggesting effect in which the playing card “J” (jack) is displayed also has an odd setting value. It is a production that suggests. Here, when the first setting suggestion effect in the blue mode is executed, the second setting suggestion effect in which the playing card "J" (jack) is displayed is displayed rather than the ratio in which the set value of the game machine is an odd number. The rate at which the set value of the game machine is odd when executed is higher.

In addition, the first setting suggestive effect in the red mode is an effect that suggests that the setting value is an even number, and the second setting suggesting effect in which the playing card “Q” (queen) is displayed has an even set value. It is a production that suggests that there is. Here, when the first setting suggestion effect in the red mode is executed, the second setting suggestion effect in which "Q" (queen) of the playing cards is displayed rather than the ratio in which the setting value of the game machine is an even number is The rate at which the set value of the gaming machine is an even number when executed is higher.

In this way, the proportion of the setting value suggested by the second setting suggestive effect corresponds to the actual setting value of the gaming machine, the setting value suggested by the first setting suggesting effect is the actual setting value of the gaming machine. It is higher than the ratio corresponding to the set value. Therefore, the accuracy of the suggestion regarding the set value is higher in the second setting suggestive effect than in the first setting suggestive effect. The accuracy of the suggestion regarding the set value can be said to be the reliability of the suggestion regarding the set value.

In other words, the setting value estimated based on the second setting suggestion effect is more likely to be the setting value of the game machine than the setting value estimated based on the first setting suggestion effect. The second setting suggestive effect has a higher reliability of the setting suggesting (the accuracy of the setting suggesting) than the first setting suggesting effect.

In the present embodiment, both the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are effects that are executed upon occurrence of a small hit in the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). In addition, by the occurrence of a small hit in the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), by executing a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects with different suggestion accuracy (reliability of suggestion) regarding the set value, The interest can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-4, the first setting suggestion effect is an even-odd suggestion effect that suggests whether the set value is an even number or an odd number, and a high/low suggestion that suggests whether the set value is high or low. It is also a production. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-8, the second setting suggestion effect is an even-odd suggestion effect that indicates whether the setting value is an even number or an odd number, and the setting value is a value different from 1. It is 1 negative suggestion effect that suggests that there is, and is also a high setting suggestion effect that suggests that the set value is high setting.

As described above, the information about the setting suggested by the first setting suggesting effect is “whether the setting value is even or odd” and “whether the setting value is low or high”. The information on the setting suggested by the second setting suggesting effect is "whether the setting value is an even number or an odd number", "whether the setting value is 1", and "the setting value is 4 to 4". 6 is either or is not any of the above.” Therefore, the information related to the setting suggested by the first setting suggestion effect is different from the information related to the setting suggested by the second setting suggestion effect. ..

In the present embodiment, both the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are effects that are executed upon occurrence of a small hit in the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state). In addition, when a small hit occurs in the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects with different suggested information are executed, so that the interest can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-3, the variation start time effect determination process for determining the presence/absence of execution of the first setting suggestion effect and the effect mode is the timing at which the variable display of the second special symbol is started (second special This is the timing at which the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display of the symbol is started, and is executed, for example, at the timing at which the effect control CPU 120 receives the second variation pattern command). On the other hand, in the big hit start time effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion effect and the effect mode, the timing when the big hit game state is started (for example, the effect control CPU 120 issues the big hit start designation command (fanfare designation). Command)), the timing at which the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be opened (for example, the timing at which the effect control CPU 120 receives the special winning opening opening display designation command), and the like.

Further, the first setting suggestive effect is, as shown in FIG. 12-6, a period during which the gaming state is controlled to have a high probability/second KT state (particularly, a variable display period and a small display period in which the display result is “small hit”). It is executed during the winning game period), and the second setting suggestive effect is executed during the period when the gaming state is controlled to the big hit gaming state, as shown in FIG. 12-10 described later.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are different at the same time or within a short period by differentiating the timing of determining whether to execute the effect or the timing of determining the effect mode. In addition, it is possible to avoid the processing load caused by determining whether or not to execute a plurality of types of setting suggestive effects, and determining the effect mode of a plurality of types of setting suggestive effects.

Further, in the present embodiment, by executing the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect in different periods, it is possible to avoid the control load caused by executing the plurality of types of setting suggestion effects at the same time or within a short period. I am trying. Here, if the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are executed at the same time or within a short period of time, the player appropriately understands that a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects have been executed. Since it is difficult to properly identify the information suggested by the setting suggestion effect, it is meaningless to provide multiple types of setting suggestion effects, and rather the interest of setting suggestion effect is reduced. There is a risk that

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the execution period of the first setting suggestion effect and the execution period of the second setting suggestion effect are not overlapped so that the player can easily understand each setting suggestion effect and is suggested. It also makes it easier to identify the information that is present.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game state when the first setting suggestion effect is executed is the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), and the game state when the second setting suggestion effect is executed is It is a big hit game state (low probability/low base state). In this way, by executing the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect in different game states, the game state and the type of the setting suggestion effect are associated with each other, and the characteristics of the setting suggestion effect for each type are more clear. Can be converted.

Note that, in the present embodiment, an example in which the execution period of the first setting suggestion effect and the execution period of the second setting suggestion effect do not overlap is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment, and the execution period of the first setting suggestion effect is not limited to this. The execution period of the second setting suggestion effect may partially overlap.

Further, in the present embodiment, one execution period of the first setting suggestive effect (effect period in which the small hit character appears) is a period from the middle of the small hit change to the end of the small hit game state (for example, the figure 12-5, which is a period from T2 to T5), and is, for example, 5 seconds. On the other hand, the execution period (production period) of the second setting suggestion production is a period including one or a plurality of round periods in the jackpot gaming state (for example, a period from T2 to T3 shown in FIG. 12-9), for example, 20 seconds. Shall be In this way, it is assumed that the second setting suggestion effect having a higher suggestion accuracy (reliability of suggestion) regarding the setting is executed for a longer period than the first setting suggestion effect.

Note that the execution period of the first setting suggestive effect (effect period) is not limited to this, and the execution period of the first setting suggestive effect (effect period) may be longer than the execution period of the second setting suggestive effect (effect period). The periods may be the same.

(Specific example of setting suggestion production in big hit game state)
Next, a big hit of the big hit type "2R normal big hit" occurs based on the variable display of the second special symbol executed when the high-precision/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is controlled, A production example of the second setting suggestive production executed when being controlled to the big hit game state will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-9 and 12-10.

FIG. 12-9 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the second setting suggestion effect is executed in the big hit game state, when the big hit of “2R normal big hit” occurs in the big hit type. 12-10 (1) to (3) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image when the second setting suggestion effect is executed.

In the example shown below, until the high probability/second KT state before being controlled to the big hit gaming state, 20 small hits have finally occurred, and the number of card images 30TM200 provided It is assumed that there were 20 sheets. Then, in the jackpot start effect determination process, the type (design) of the playing card “J” (jack) is determined as the card type for the 12 card images, and the card type is determined for the 7 card images. It is assumed that the type (design) of the playing card “Q” (queen) is determined, and the type (design) of the playing card “K” (king) is determined as the card type for one card image. To do.

First, as shown in FIG. 12-10(1), the effect control CPU 120 receives the special winning opening open display designating command in the big hit jackpot game state where the big hit type is "2R normal big hit". Based on this, the second setting suggestion effect is executed. In the present example, the second setting suggesting effect is executed as the in-round effect for the first round, so that the character “Round1” is displayed in the upper right part of the screen of the image display device 5.

The effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state at a predetermined timing (at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 12-9) in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 together with the card image 30TM200 imitating a playing card. Display the number of card images (in this example, “×20”) indicating the number of card images corresponding to the value (20 in this example) of the final small hit count display in the high probability/second KT state before Let

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-10(2), the CPU 120 for effect control replaces the one card image 30TM200 displayed in the central portion of the screen of the image display device 5 with the card image of the playing card. After changing to 30TM200X, a card image reversal effect for displaying the design on the back side of the playing card is executed (timing T2 shown in FIG. 12-9). This card image reversal effect is repeatedly executed a number of times corresponding to the display of the number of cards, that is, a number of times corresponding to the value of the small hit number display (20 times in this example).

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-10(3), the effect control CPU 120 is at the timing when the patterns on the back side of all the playing cards are revealed (the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 12-9, The final result of the second setting suggestion effect is notified at the timing when the image inversion effect is completed).

In this example, in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, a card image 30TM200J indicating the type (picture) of the playing card “J” (jack) and a card number display J indicating the number of card images 30TM200J (this example) are displayed. “×12”) is displayed. As a result, the player recognizes that the trump “J” (jack) type (pattern) is determined as the card type for 12 times of the lottery corresponding to the number of small hits (20 times in this example). ..

Further, in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5, along with the card image 30TM200Q indicating the type (design) of the playing card “Q” (queen), the card number display Q (in this example, the number of card images 30TM200Q) is displayed. “×7”) is displayed. Thereby, the player grasps that the type (design) of the card “Q” (queen) is determined as the card type for seven times of the lottery corresponding to the number of small hits (20 times in this example). ..

Further, in the upper left portion of the screen of the image display device 5, along with the card image 30TM200K indicating the type (picture) of the card “K” (King), the card number display K (in this example, the number of card images 30TM200K) is displayed. “×1”) is displayed. Furthermore, around the card image 30TM200K, an effect image 30TM220 that emphasizes the high setting value (4 or more is confirmed) is displayed. Thereby, the player grasps that the type (design) of the card “K” (King) is determined as the card type in one of the lottery equivalent to the number of small hits (20 times in this example). ..

In this example, the number of times that the card type was determined as the type (pattern) of the playing card “A” (ace) in the lottery equivalent to the number of small wins (20 times in this example) was 0. , The card image 30TM200A indicating the type (design) of the playing card “A” (ace) is not displayed on the screen. In the lottery equivalent to the number of small hits, if the number of times the card type is determined as the type (design) of the playing card “A” (ace) is one or more, the type of the playing card “A” (ace) ( The card image 30TM200A on which the picture is shown is displayed on the screen.

Not limited to such a form, the number of times when the card type is determined as the type (design) of the playing card “A” (ace) in the lottery equivalent to the number of small hits (20 times in this example) is 0. Even when there is a card, the card image 30TM200A indicating the type (design) of the playing card “A” (ace) may be displayed on the screen, and the display of the number may be set to 0 (“×0”).

(I) In the present embodiment, when the "J" (jack) card image 30TM200J, the "Q" (queen) card image 30TM200Q, and the playing card "A" (ace) card image 30TM200A are displayed. Does not display the effect image corresponding to the card image of each type (picture), but when the "K" (king) card image 30TM200K is displayed, the effect image 30TM220 corresponding to the card image 30TM200K is displayed. It will be displayed around the card image 30TM200K.

(Ii) In this embodiment, the "J" (jack) card image 30TM200J and the "Q" (queen) card image 30TM200Q are displayed in the same size. On the other hand, both the "A" (ace) card image 30TM200A and the "K" (king) card image 30TM200K are "J" (jack) card images 30TM200J and "Q" (queen) cards. The image is displayed in a size larger than 30TM200Q. The "A" (ace) card image 30TM200A and the "K" (king) card image 30TM200K are displayed in the same size, but an effect image is added to the "A" (ace) card image 30TM200A. On the other hand, the effect image 30TM220 is added to the card image 30TM200K of "K" (king).

Therefore, the visibility of the “K” (King) card image 30TM200K is the highest, the visibility of the “A” (Ace) card image 30TM200A is the second highest, and the visibility of the “J” (Jack) card image 30TM200J is the highest. And the visibility of the "Q" (queen) card image 30TM200Q are the lowest. The relationship of visibility is as follows: "J" (jack) card image 30TM200J="Q" (queen) card image 30TM200Q<"A" (ace) card image 30TM200A<"K" (king) card image 30TM200K( And an effect image 30TM220).

That is, the set value is more than the visibility of the suggestion information (“J” (jack) card image 30TM200J, “Q” (queen) card image 30TM200Q) indicating whether the set value is even or odd. The visibility of the suggestion information (“A” (Ace) card image 30TM200A, “K” (King) card image 30TM200K) that suggests the level of “A” is increased. Further, suggestion information suggesting that the set value is 4 or more than the visibility of the suggestion information indicating that the set value is 2 or more (the card image 30TM200A of "A" (ace)) ("K" (King) card image 30TM200K) has high visibility. In this way, the more the set value suggested by the suggestive information is for the player, the higher the visibility of the suggestive information is, so that a plurality of suggestive information is displayed in parallel at the same time. I am trying to enhance the effect of production.

From the result of the second setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 12-10(3), the player determines that the number of "J" (jack) card images 30TM200J is equal to the number of "Q" (queen) card images 30TM200Q. It is estimated that there is a high possibility that the set value is an odd number (any one of “1”, “3”, and “5”) because the number is clearly larger than the other. Further, since the "K" (King) card image 30TM200K (and the effect image 30TM220) is displayed, the setting value among the high setting values ("4", "5", "6") is "5". It is highly probable that

In this way, in the second setting suggestion effect, a plurality of pieces of information (even number or odd number, 2 or more, 4 or more) regarding the setting value are suggested at the same time in parallel, so that the player infers the setting value from the plurality of clues. It becomes possible to do. Thereby, the player's interest in the second setting suggestion effect can be further increased.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of being controlled to the big hit game state of the high probability/second KT state, the big hit type (high probability/big hit type controlled to the second KT state after the big hit game state is finished) is controlled, Big hit game state of high probability / second KT state ends with no second setting suggestion effect (high probability / big hit type controlled to a different game state from the second KT state after the big hit game state ends) The second setting suggestive effect can be executed only when the control is performed.

That is, the second setting when the condition that the high probability/second KT state continues (for example, the display result of the fluctuation display executed in the high probability/second KT state is 10R certainty variation big hit or 2R certainty variation big hit) A condition that the high probability/second KT state ends (for example, the display result of the variable display executed in the high probability/second KT state is 6R certainty variation big hit or 2R normal big hit) is satisfied, rather than the suggestion effect execution rate. The execution ratio of the second setting suggestive effect in the case of performing is higher. The player cannot expect to be awarded a prize ball at the same pace as before due to the end of the high probability/second KT state. However, as a result of the execution of the second setting suggestion effect, if the player can expect that the gaming machine is set to the high setting value, the disappointment due to the end of the high probability/second KT state is reduced, and the game is continued. Likely to do. In this way, by executing the second setting suggestion effect with the end of the high probability/second KT state, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Also, the second setting suggestion effect is an effect related to the value of the small hit number display in the high probability/second KT state before being controlled to the big hit game state, and the larger the value of the small hit number display at that time is. By increasing the suggestion information, the player can estimate the set value with high accuracy. Specifically, as the value of the number of small hits is increased, the ratio between the number of "J" (jack) card images 30TM200J and the number of "Q" (queen) card images 30TM200Q is shown in FIG. 12-8. When the set value approaches 2 and the set value is 2 or more, the ratio of the "A" (ace) card image 30TM200A displayed is high, and when the set value is 4 or more, "K" ( The rate at which the (King) card image 30TM200K is displayed is increased. This allows the player to estimate the set value with high accuracy. Therefore, the player is also interested in the number of small hits that occur in the high probability/second KT state, and in the high probability/second KT state, the aim is to generate as many small hits as possible. You will play a game. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the gaming interest of the gaming machine controlled to the high probability/second KT state.

In the present embodiment, the second setting suggestion effect is executed during the round period when the big hit type is controlled to the big hit game state of "2R normal big hit", but the present invention is not limited to this, and the fanfare period and the interval. The second setting suggestion effect may be executed in any of the period and the ending period. For example, the second setting suggestion effect is started in the fanfare period, the second setting suggestion effect is continued until the first round period, the first interval period, and the second round period, and the second setting suggestion is performed in the ending period. You may make it finish production. In this way, by making it possible to continuously execute the second setting suggestion effect including the period other than the round period, even in the big hit type gaming state where the number of rounds is relatively small and the effect execution period is restricted, The execution period of the setting suggestion production can be secured.

(Second special display)
In the above example, when the gaming state is controlled to high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), when the gaming state is controlled to high probability/first KT state (probability variation state) Differently, the special display 30TM100 including the characters of "RUSH" corresponding to being controlled to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. An example was given.

For example, the display mode of the special display 30TM100 may be changed based on the determination result at the time of winning the start prize. For example, the display mode of the special display 30TM100 is set to "High probability/second KT state (small hitting RUSH state) for at least a predetermined period (variable display count for the number of reserved memories) based on the determination result at the time of winning the start prize. May be changed to a mode of notifying (suggesting).

In the example shown below, the effect control CPU 120, at the start of variation of the second special symbol, (a) the gaming state is controlled to a high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), (b) special The display 30TM100 is displayed, (c) the display result of the variable display to be started is determined to be "non-big hit (departure or small hit)", (d) the number of second reserved memories is 1 or more. There is, (e) the determination result at the time of the starting winning prize regarding the variable display of the suspended special symbol (the variable display of the suspended decorative symbol) is all "non-big hit (departure or small hit)", When all of the conditions (a) to (e) are satisfied, the display mode of the special display 30TM100 including the characters "RUSH" is changed at a predetermined ratio (for example, a ratio of 80%) to display "SUPER RUSH". The second special display 30TM100S including characters is used.

That is, the special display 30TM100S is information for informing (indicating) that the current gaming state is the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), while the second special display 30TM100S is the current information. It is information (indication) that informs that the gaming state is a high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), and the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is at least for a predetermined period (reserved memory count). The change display count of minutes is information for notifying (suggesting) that it will continue.

In addition, in the example shown below, the effect control CPU 120 has at least one of the above conditions (c) to (e) in a state where the second special display 30TM100S is displayed at the start of variation of the second special symbol. Is not established, the second special display 30TM100S including the characters "SUPER RUSH" is returned to the special display 30TM100 including the characters "RUSH". Further, even when all of the conditions (c) to (e) are satisfied, the second special display 30TM100S is returned to the special display 30TM100 at a predetermined ratio (for example, a ratio of 20%).

(Specific example of second special display)
Next, a specific example in which the second special display is displayed in the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-11 and 12-12. FIG. 12-11 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the second special display is displayed in the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), and FIG. 4) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image when the second special display is displayed in the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state).

First, in the example shown in FIG. 12-11, the gaming state is controlled to a high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), and then the variable display of the nth second special symbol is started. Thus, the number of second reserved memories is 3. The variable display of the second special symbol for the nth time is a small hit variation in which the display result is "small hit". During this variable display period of the n-th second special symbol, it is assumed that a new starting winning is generated in the variable winning ball device 6B, and the second number of reserved memories becomes 4.

Then, at the timing when the small hit variation ends and is controlled to the small hit game state (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 12-11), as shown in FIG. 12-12(1), the small hit character 30TM250A is supported. Display the dialogue "OPEN!" In this example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a “cloudy image” as the background image of the decorative pattern based on the selection of the cloudy mode as the effect mode.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 displays the letters “RUSH” corresponding to being controlled to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) on the upper right portion and the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5. The displayed special display 30TM100 is displayed. The special display 30TM100 is displayed with a higher priority than the background image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the background image and is superimposed and displayed so as to be seen by the player in the foreground).

In the present example, four small hits have occurred up to the present time, including the small hit that has occurred this time, and a normal mode (white mode) small hit character 30TM150A is displayed for all four small hits. I shall. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 causes the history display area 30TM170A at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 to display the character “×4” as the number-of-times history display A in association with the small hit character history image 30TM160A, and the history. In the display area 30TM170B, the character "x0" is displayed as the number-of-times history display B in association with the small hit character history image 30TM160B, and in the history display area 30TM170C, the number of times history display C is associated with the small hit character history image 30TM160C. The character "x0" is displayed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 causes the card image display area 30TM210 in the upper left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 to display the character “×4” as the card number display corresponding to the card image 30TM200.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 finishes the small hitting game state, and at the timing when the next variable display of the second special symbol is started (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 12-11), the second special display 30TM100S. It is determined whether or not to display. Here, the game state is controlled to a high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the special display 30TM100 is displayed, and the display result of the variable display to be started (specified by the display result specification command) Display result) is determined to be "non-big hit (small hit in this example)", the number of the second holding storage after subtraction is 3, and variable display of the held special symbol (held decorative symbol) All the determination results at the time of winning the start regarding the variation display) are “non-big hits (departure or small hits)”, and thus all the above-described conditions (a) to (e) are satisfied. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the special display 30TM100 at a rate of 80% to the second special display 30TM100S, and does not change the display mode of the special display 30TM100 at a rate of 20%.

As shown in FIG. 12-12(2), when the game state is controlled to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), when the (n+1)th variation display is started, the effect control CPU 120 Is a variable display of decorative symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern command. While starting, in the second small symbol display areas 51, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5, the variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is started.

Here, based on the decision to display the second special display 30TM100S, the effect control CPU 120 displays the characters “SUPER RUSH” in the upper right part and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. The second special display 30TM100S is displayed. The second special display 30TM100S is displayed with a higher priority than the background image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the background image and is superimposed and displayed so as to be seen by the player in the foreground).

Since the second special display 30TM100S is displayed, the player has a high probability/third until at least the currently displayed variable display ends and all the pending storage (three variations) at the present time is exhausted. By understanding that the 2KT state (small hit RUSH state) continues, it is possible to play the game with a sense of security.

After the gaming state is controlled to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the (n+1)th variation display, the (n+2)th variation display, and the (n+3)th variation display all have display results. It is a small hit variation that is a "small hit", and it is assumed that a new start winning is not generated during each small hit variation period and the small hit game state period corresponding to each small hit variation. The (n+4)th variation display after the gaming state is controlled to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is a variation display in which the display result is “out”, and this (n+4)th It is assumed that, during the variable display period, new start winnings are generated twice in the variable winning ball apparatus 6B, and the number of second reserved memories is increased from 0 to 2.

With the end of the (n+4)-th variation display in which this display result is “out”, the effect control CPU 120 causes the decorative symbol “1” to be displayed in the symbol display area 5L, as shown in FIG. 12-12(3). , The decorative design "4" in the design display area 5C, the decorative design "2" in the design display area 5R is fixedly stopped (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 12-11), and the second small design display of the image display device 5 The second small symbol "1" in the area 51, the second small symbol "4" in the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol "2" in the second small symbol display area 5r2 are fixedly stopped. ..

Here, in this example, since the gaming state is controlled to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the display result of the (n+1)th variation display to the (n+3)th variation display is “small”. It is assumed that the small hit character 30TM150A in the normal mode (white mode) is displayed for each of the three small hits. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 causes the history display area 30TM170A at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 to display the character “×7” as the number-of-times history display A corresponding to the small hit character history image 30TM160A. ..

Further, the effect control CPU 120 causes the card image display area 30TM210 at the upper left portion of the screen of the image display device 5 to display the character “×7” as the card number display corresponding to the card image 30TM200.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the next second special symbol (the (n+5)th variable display after the game state is controlled to have a high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state)). At the timing (timing T4 shown in FIG. 12-11), it is determined whether or not to continuously display the second special display 30TM100S (whether or not to return to the special display 30TM100). Here, at the time of starting winning, one of the two starting winnings in the (n+4)th variation display period after the gaming state is controlled to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state) It is assumed that the judgment result of “is a big hit”.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 12-12 (4), in the state where the second special display 30TM100S is displayed at the start of the variation of the second special symbol, the above (c) to (e). Based on the fact that the condition (e) in () is not satisfied, the second special display 30TM100S including the characters "SUPER RUSH" is returned to the special display 30TM100 including the characters "RUSH". It should be noted that, of the two start winnings in the (n+4)th variation display period after the gaming state is controlled to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), any of the starting winnings is the one at the time of starting winning. Even if the determination result is “out”, as described above, the second special display 30TM100S is returned to the special display 30TM100 at a predetermined ratio (for example, 20% ratio).

As shown in FIG. 12-12(4), when the gaming state is controlled to the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the (n+5)th second variable symbol variation display is started. The production control CPU 120, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern command, decorative symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol). ), the variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is started in the second small symbol display areas 512, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5.

In addition, based on the determination not to display the second special display, the effect control CPU 120 causes the high probability/second KT state (small hit RUSH) to be displayed in the upper right portion and the lower left portion of the screen of the image display device 5. The special display 30TM100 in which the character of "RUSH" corresponding to being controlled to (state) is displayed is displayed. The special display 30TM100 is displayed with a higher priority than the background image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the background image and is superimposed and displayed so as to be seen by the player in the foreground).

As described above, in a situation where it is determined that the high probability/second KT state (small hitting RUSH state) will continue for a predetermined period, the configuration in which the second special display 30TM100S is displayed to notify that fact is shown in FIG. By further applying the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect related to the occurrence of the small hit to the game machine capable of executing, as shown in FIGS. You can

Here, in the examples shown in FIGS. 12-12(1) to (4), information on the setting suggestive effect (for example, the small hit character history image 30TM160A and the number of times is set) rather than the visibility of the special display 30TM100 and the second special display 30TM100S. The visibility of the history display A, the small hit character history image 30TM160B and the number of times history display B, and the small hit character history image 30TM160C and the number of times history display C is high (the display layer is higher than the special display 30TM100 and the second special display 30TM100S). There is a superimposed display so that it can be seen from the front of the player).

Not limited to such a form, information relating to setting suggestive effects (for example, small hit character history image 30TM160A and number history display A, small hit character history image 30TM160B and number history display B, small hit character history image 30TM160C and number history display The visibility of the special display 30TM100 and the second special display 30TM100S is higher than the visibility of C) (the display layer is higher than the information related to the setting suggestive effect and is displayed in a superimposed manner so that it can be seen in the front of the player). ).

Not limited to such a form, rather than the visibility of the special display 30TM100, information relating to the setting suggestive effect (for example, the small hit character history image 30TM160A and the number history display A, the small hit character history image 30TM160B and the number history display B, the small hit character history image 30TM160B On the other hand, the visibility of the hit character history image 30TM160C and the number of times history display C) is high (the display layer is higher than the special display 30TM100 and is superimposed and displayed so as to be seen by the player in the foreground). The second special display rather than the visibility of information (for example, small hit character history image 30TM160A and number history display A, small hit character history image 30TM160B and number history display B, small hit character history image 30TM160C and number history display C) The visibility of the 30TM100S may be high (the information regarding the setting suggestion effect is also displayed in a superposed manner so that the player can see it in front of the player). That is, although the display area is common between the special display 30TM100 and the second special display 30TM100S, the visibility of the second special display 30TM100S may be higher than the visibility of the special display 30TM100.

(Other modifications)
(1) In the above embodiment, in response to the occurrence of the small hit in the high probability/second KT state, the first setting suggestion effect executed in the high probability/second KT state and the first setting suggestion effect executed in the large hit game state. Although an example in which the 2 setting suggestion effect can be executed is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and in addition to the 1st setting suggestion effect and the 2nd setting suggestion effect, the 3rd setting suggestion effect is provided as another setting suggestion effect. It may be executable.

For example, when a small hit occurs in the high probability/second KT state, the number of game balls to be won in the special winning opening within one opening period of the special variable winning ball device 17 is normally 0 to 3. .. However, in rare cases, there are cases where four or more game balls are won in the special winning opening within one opening period of the special variable winning ball device 17 (so-called over-winning occurs). The third setting suggestion effect is an effect that can be executed when more than a predetermined number (three in this example) of game balls are won in the special winning opening within one opening period of the special variable winning ball device 17. Good. That is, the third setting suggestion effect may be an effect for notifying that an over-winning has occurred, and may be an effect for giving an indication regarding the setting.

As described above, in one small hit game (one opening period of the special variable winning ball device 17), an image of "+10" is displayed at the bottom of the screen each time the gaming ball wins the special winning opening. It Here, for the "+10" images displayed according to the fourth and subsequent winnings, the display mode may be determined at different rates according to the set value. For example, when the set value is "1" or "2", 80% of the characters display "+10" in blue, and 20% display the characters of "+10" in red. When the set value is any of "3" to "6", the character "+10" is displayed in blue at a rate of 20% and the character "+10" is displayed in red at a rate of 80%. To do. In this way, the effect mode of the third setting suggestion effect may be determined at different rates depending on the set value.

According to such a configuration, since it is possible to focus on the number of winning game balls to the special winning opening in one small hit game state, the interest of the small hit game is improved. In addition, since a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects will be executed in association with the occurrence of one small hit, the player can infer the set value based on the plurality of types of setting suggestion effects. Therefore, the accuracy of the estimation can be improved.

(2) In the above embodiment, the example in which the second setting suggestive effect is executed during the period when the gaming state is controlled to the big hit gaming state is shown, but the second setting suggesting effect is performed in another gaming state. It may be executed. For example, the second setting suggestion effect may be executed in any of the high-probability/second KT state, the high-probability/first KT state, the low-probability/first KT state, and the normal state. In addition, the second setting suggestive effect is a demonstration screen (for example, a demo display at the first customer waiting demonstration based on the reception of the first customer waiting demo display specifying command, a second customer waiting demo display specifying command being received. It may be possible to execute it during the period in which the demo display during the second customer waiting demonstration is displayed).

(3) In the above embodiment, the example in which the first setting suggestion effect is executed in the variable display period of the second special symbol in which the display result is “small hit” in the high probability/second KT state has been shown. Not limited to such a form, the first setting suggestive effect may be executed in the variable display period of the second special symbol in which the display result is “out” in the high probability/second KT state. Here, the ratio of the first setting suggestive effect to be executed in the variable display period of the second special symbol whose display result is "small hit" is in the variable display period of the second special symbol whose display result is "off." It is assumed that the ratio is higher than the rate at which the first setting suggestion effect is executed.

Further, the first setting suggestive effect is not limited to the variable display period of the second special symbol, the period during which it is controlled to the small hitting game state, and the next variable display of the second special symbol after the small hitting game state is over. It may be executed during a period until it is started. In addition, the first setting suggestion effect is, when the determination result at the time of starting winning when the game ball is won in the variable winning ball device 6B (when the number of second holding memories is increased) is determined to be "small hit". Alternatively, it may be executed during the period from the time of the start winning prize to the execution of the variable display which is the determination target at the time of the start winning prize.

(4) In the above embodiment, the information suggested by the first setting suggestive effect includes the information “whether the setting value is an even number or an odd number”, and the information suggested by the second setting suggestive effect. Also, the example in which the information "whether the set value is an even number or an odd number" is included is also shown. That is, an example in which the information suggested by the first setting suggesting effect and the information suggested by the second setting suggesting effect overlap (is common) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form. The information suggested by the first setting suggestion effect and the information suggested by the second setting suggestion effect may not overlap at all. For example, in the first setting suggestion effect, only the information "whether the setting value is even or odd" is suggested, and in the second setting suggesting effect, the information "whether the setting value is 1". Only one may be suggested.

(5) In the above embodiment, an example in which the setting suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the setting value of the gaming machine has been described, but the setting suggesting effect is not limited to such an aspect, and the power source of the gaming machine It may be an effect that suggests whether or not the set value has been changed when it is thrown. For example, if the setting change mode for changing the set value is controlled when the power of the game machine is turned on, the setting change mode is not controlled when the power of the game machine is turned on. The predetermined setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case.

(Example of slot machine)
In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified as the gaming machine capable of executing the setting suggestive effect, but the gaming machine capable of executing the setting suggesting effect is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 but is a slot machine. Good.

In the slot machine, a low accuracy state (normal state) as a game state, an AT game state described later, a high accuracy X state (pullback zone X) described later, and a high accuracy Y state (pullback zone Y) described later are controlled. Possible, corresponding to the winning of a specific combination when the gaming state is the AT gaming state, the first setting suggestive effect executed during the AT gaming state, and the high accuracy X state (pullback zone X) It is assumed that the second setting suggestion effect that is performed can be executed.

The AT game state in the slot machine is a game state controlled by the main control unit, and is an assist time that is a notification period during which a navigation effect for notifying information (operation procedure etc.) according to an internal lottery result can be executed. Say.

Both the high-accuracy X state (pullback zone X) and the high-probability Y state (pullback zone Y) in the slot machine are gaming states controlled by the main control unit, and a period of a predetermined number of games after the AT gaming state ends. In the gaming state controlled in, the winning probability of the AT lottery for selecting whether to control the AT gaming state is higher than the low probability state (normal state).

The high-probability X state (pullback zone X) is a gaming state corresponding to a first predetermined period (for example, five games) after the AT gaming state ends, and when a weak rare small win is won during this period. If the player wins the AT lottery again at a low rate (for example, 30%) and wins the strong rare small combination, it is a gaming state in which the player wins the AT lottery again at a high rate (for example, 80%). Also, the high-accuracy Y state (pullback zone Y) is a gaming state corresponding to a second predetermined period (for example, 10 games) after the AT gaming state ends, and a rare small role (weak rare small role) during this period. If the player wins a strong rare small role, the gaming state is such that the AT lottery is won again at an extremely high rate (for example, 100%). Therefore, of the high-accuracy Y state (pullback zone Y) and the high-probability X state (pullback zone X), the high-probability Y state (pullback zone Y) is highly advantageous to the player.

For example, there are a plurality of types of winning combinations (for example, a navigation target combination with push-order navigation and a non-navigation target without push-order navigation) as a winning combination of the game while the game state is controlled to the AT game state. In the period in which the gaming state is controlled to the AT gaming state, the first setting suggestion effect is executed when a specific winning combination (for example, a navigation target winning combination) is won. In addition, after the AT gaming state ends, the second setting suggestion effect is executed during the period when the gaming state is controlled to the highly accurate X state (pullback zone X).

1 ... pachinko game machine 2 ... game board 3 ... game machine frame 4A, 4B ... special symbol display device 5 ... image display device 6A ... winning ball device 6B ... variable winning ball device 7 ... special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9... Frame LED
10 General prize hole 11 Main board 12 Production control board 13 Voice control board 14 LED control board 15 Relay board 17 Special variable winning ball device 20 Normal pattern display 21 Gate switch 22A, 22B Start Mouth switch 23... 1st count switch 24... 2nd count switch 30... Hitting ball operation handle 31A... Stick controller 31B... Push button 32... Movable body 41... Passage gate 100... Game control microcomputers 101, 121... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103... CPU
104, 124... Random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120... CPU for production control
123... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of being set to any one of a plurality of setting values,
Game state control means capable of controlling in an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
And a production control means for controlling the production,
The effect control means executes a first setting suggestion effect and a second setting suggestion effect different from the first setting suggestion effect as setting suggestion effects for suggesting settings based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. Is possible,
A game machine characterized in that a period during which the first setting suggestive effect is executed is different from a period during which the second setting suggestive effect is executed.

Images